JP7793271B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

Among these types of gaming machines, there are those that can execute navigation effects that suggest operation modes and suggestion effects that suggest lottery results (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-81239

In gaming machines such as those described in Patent Document 1, which use effects that suggest operation modes or lottery results, there is a problem in that malfunctions in the effects can make the suggested content difficult to understand.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can optimally perform effects that suggest operation modes and lottery results.

(A) A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are provided, each of which can variably display a plurality of types of identifiable identification information;
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units,
Deriving operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) that a player operates to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
A specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) that displays a specific suggestion image (navigation image) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination (main role) corresponding to the type of specific result, based on the result determined by the advance determination means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
Equipped with
The system is characterized in that, based on the display results being derived on all variable display sections, processing is executed to erase the specific suggestion image (navigation image), regardless of whether the specific suggestion image is displayed or not .
According to this feature, the specific suggestion image is erased based on the display results being derived on all variable display sections, so that the specific suggestion image does not continue to be displayed even after the game has ended, preventing the presentation that accompanies the progress of the game from being disrupted.

The present invention may have only the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention, or it may have both the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention and features other than those specific features.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the card unit and the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the card unit and the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the transition of game states. This is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, the symbol combinations of winning combinations, and the awarding of prizes when winning. This is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, the symbol combinations of winning combinations, and the awarding of prizes when winning. This is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, the symbol combinations of winning combinations, and the awarding of prizes when winning. This is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, the symbol combinations of winning combinations, and the awarding of prizes when winning. 10 is a diagram for explaining the combination of winning roles that are read out as the roles to be selected for each game state. FIG. This is a diagram to explain reel control when a push order role is won. A diagram showing the game start command sent by the main control unit to the performance control unit when the start switch is operated. 10 shows a game end command sent by the main control unit to the performance control unit at the time of the third stop. A diagram showing the types of commands that the main control board sends to the medal count control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine installation information command. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine characteristics. A diagram showing the structure of a reel information command. A diagram showing details of the device operation information. A diagram showing the structure of a favorable zone information command. A diagram showing details of advantageous zone information. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of an input command. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a settlement command. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a start command. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a termination command. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a dispensing pulse command. A diagram showing the structure of a jackpot command. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of a hall computer signal. A diagram showing the structure of the gaming machine fraud 1 command. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of setting information. A diagram showing the structure of the gaming machine fraud 2 command. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of door information. A diagram showing the structure of the gaming machine fraud 3 command. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a main control state command. A diagram showing the configuration of a main control board error command. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of main control board errors. A diagram showing the structure of a gaming machine performance information (preliminary) command. A diagram showing a list of commands from the medal count control board to the main control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a response command. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a frame-side information command. A diagram showing an example of communication between the main control board and the medal count control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining communication of a frame-side information command. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing performed when the main control board receives a command. This is a diagram showing the flow of communication between the main control board and the medal count control board after the power is turned on. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of communication when the serial number is normal. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of communication when a serial number mismatch error occurs. A figure showing an example of communication when an error related to a gaming medal occurs. A figure showing an example of communication occurring before the sending and receiving of a gaming machine installation information command. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timeout when powering on. 10 is a diagram illustrating the bet number setting operation and the settlement operation. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which a new bet amount setting operation is performed after a bet amount setting operation has been performed and before a response command is received. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which a new payment operation is performed after a payment operation and before a response command is received. This figure shows an example in which a new settlement operation is performed after the bet number setting operation and before the response command is received. This figure shows an example in which a new bet number setting operation is performed after a settlement operation and before a response command is received. A diagram explaining a serial number error in the bet number setting operation. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a serial number error during a payment operation. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a process of checking frame side information. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating display control of the number of dispensed coins. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a role ratio monitor. A figure showing an example of the display of the role ratio monitor. A diagram for explaining the initialization process of role ratio information. 1 is an address map of a memory area used by the main control unit. 10 is an address map of an internal RAM area used by the main control unit. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a register bank included in a CPU of a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a startup process of a main control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an initial setting process performed by a main control unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an external RAM initialization process performed by the main control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a setting change process performed by a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the control content of the main processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a card unit and a slot machine when the main control unit and the medal count control unit are integrated. This is a diagram to explain communication between the performance control unit, main control unit, medal count control unit, and CU control unit. 10 is an address map of an internal RAM area used by the main control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the control content of a continuous area transfer process A performed by a main control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the control content of a continuous area transfer process B performed by the main control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an LDQ instruction for reading or writing two bytes of data. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the appearance of a game information display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing external signal processing. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining the lighting state of an outer end signal lamp in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining a first modified example of the lighting mode of the outer end signal lamp. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining a second modified example of the lighting mode of the outer end signal lamp. 10 is a flowchart showing the ball payout control pre-processing of the main control unit. This is a flowchart showing the post-ball control processing of the main control unit, which executes the determination of the end of the advantageous zone based on the initial value. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a difference counter of a RAM. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of communication between the first register bank and RAM via the CPU. This is a diagram to explain the first pattern of determining the end of the advantageous period based on initial value settings. This is a diagram to explain the second pattern of determining the end of the advantageous period based on initial value settings. This is a diagram to explain the third pattern of determining the end of the advantageous period based on initial value settings. This is a diagram to explain the fourth pattern of determining the end of the advantageous period based on initial value settings. This is a flowchart showing the post-ball control processing of the main control unit when determining the end of the advantageous zone based on the judgment value. A figure to explain the first pattern of determining the end of a favorable zone based on a judgment value. A figure to explain the second pattern of determining the end of a favorable zone based on a judgment value. A figure to explain the third pattern of determining the end of a favorable period based on a judgment value. A figure to explain the fourth pattern of determining the end of a favorable period based on a judgment value. This is a diagram to explain command communication between the main control board and the performance control board. This is a diagram explaining the control content of the update process regarding the number of use of the difference number counter on the performance control side performed by the performance control unit. This figure explains the control content of the update regarding the number of awards on the performance control side performed by the performance control unit. This is a diagram to explain the commands sent from the main control board to the performance control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table for allocating modes in the AT1 state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings for each mode in the AT1 state. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a special flag. A diagram showing the execution status of push order navigation. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the execution status of 7Navi. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the execution status of error notification, etc. ! A diagram showing the execution status of navigation. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the performance control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the performance control main processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the performance control process. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of the performance determination process 1. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the configurations of a performance process table, a navigation process table, and a stop process table. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of the effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of a display control process. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the configuration of a video table and a video list. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing settings of a display layer for each video type. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of the display process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of a playlist used by a display control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of a moving image based on moving image data set in multiple layers. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of lamp control processing. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lamp data table and the settings of lamp layers by light emission type. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a lamp layer. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating LED lighting control by a lamp layer. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of sound control processing. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the configuration of a sound designation command table and a command list. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing settings of tracks by audio type. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of a sound setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the structure of a playlist used by the sound control unit and the audio output mode based on audio data set in multiple tracks. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of a start fail-safe process. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of a termination fail-safe process. A diagram showing the configuration of the navigation process table (push order navigation). A diagram showing the configuration of the navigation process table (push order navigation). A diagram showing the configuration of the navigation process table (push order navigation). A diagram showing the configuration of the navigation process table (push order navigation). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a navigation process table (7Navi). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a navigation process table (!Navi). FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a seven-segment display according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an output port, a DG, and the like according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a signal switching process. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating switching of a selection signal. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the output state of a selection signal when a state transition occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the output state of a selection signal when a state transition occurs.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are provided, each of which can variably display a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units.
Deriving operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) that a player operates to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
A specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) that displays a specific suggestion image (a navigation image that suggests an operation mode for stopping the main character) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination (main character) corresponding to the type of specific result, based on the result determined by the pre-determining means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
A special suggestion effect execution means for executing a special suggestion effect (7 navigation) that displays a special suggestion image (a navigation image suggesting an operation mode for stopping the 7-matching replies) that suggests a special operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a special display result combination (7-matching replies) based on the determination result of the advance determination means being a special result (7-matching replies);
an image data specifying means (movie list) for specifying image data (movie data) for displaying an image;
Equipped with
the image data designation means is capable of designating image data (moving image data) and a layer of the image data,
When multiple image data (video data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are different, images based on each image data are displayed overlapping in accordance with the layer priority, and if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, an image based on any one of the multiple image data is displayed,
A feature of this device is that the same layer (layer 50) is specified when specifying image data (video data) for displaying a specific suggestion image (a navigation image suggesting the operation mode to stop the main character) when executing the specific suggestion effect (push order navigation), and when specifying image data for displaying the special suggestion image (a navigation image suggesting the operation mode to stop the 7-line lip) when executing the special suggestion effect (7 navigation).
According to this feature, the same layer is specified both when image data for displaying a specific suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of a specific suggestion effect, and when image data for displaying a special suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of a special suggestion effect. Therefore, even if both image data for displaying a specific suggestion image and image data for displaying a special suggestion image are specified, only an image based on one of the image data is displayed, thereby preventing images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1,
The display area in which the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character) is displayed and the display area in which the special suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the 7-match lip) is displayed are characterized by including a common display area.
According to this feature, both specific suggestion images and special suggestion images are displayed in a common display area, making it easier to recognize the operation modes suggested by these images and preventing images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other in the common display area.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1 or 1-2,
When multiple image data (video data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, only the image based on the image data that was set first or the image data that was set last among the multiple image data is displayed.
According to this feature, when multiple image data are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, it is only necessary to display the image based on the first or last specified image data among the multiple image data, thereby simplifying control.

A gaming machine of form 1-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
The device is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character) or the special suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the 7-match reply) from the start of displaying the specific suggestion image to the end of displaying the image.
According to this feature, from the start of displaying a specific suggestion image or special suggestion image until the display ends, the specific suggestion image or special suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data for which other layers are specified.

A gaming machine of form 1-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-4,
In the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation) or the special suggestion performance (7 navigation), after starting to display the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode to stop the main character) or the special suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode to stop the 7-matching lip), it changes to a different image depending on the establishment of the update condition (stop operation),
The feature of this method is that the same layer (layer 50) as the image data for displaying the specific suggestion image or the image data for displaying the special suggestion image is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the image after the change.
According to this feature, an image that has changed from a specific suggestion image or a special suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as an image based on image data for which another layer is specified.

A gaming machine of form 1-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-4,
In the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation) or the special suggestion performance (7 navigation), after starting to display the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode to stop the main character) or the special suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode to stop the 7-matching lip), it changes to a different image depending on the establishment of the update condition (stop operation),
The method is characterized in that a layer with a higher priority than the image data for displaying the specific suggestion image or the image data for displaying the special suggestion image is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the image after the change.
According to this feature, even if image data for displaying a specific suggestion image or a special suggestion image remains, the changed image can be displayed preferentially.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are provided, each of which can variably display a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units.
Deriving operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) that a player operates to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
a first predetermined suggestion effect execution means for executing a first predetermined suggestion effect (! Small Red Navigation, ! Big Red Navigation) that displays a first predetermined suggestion image (! Small Red Navigation navigation image, ! Big Red Navigation navigation image) that suggests that the determination result of the advance determination means has become a first predetermined result (weak cherry, strong cherry);
a second predetermined suggestion effect execution means for executing a second predetermined suggestion effect (! Small purple navigation, ! Large purple navigation) that displays a second predetermined suggestion image (! Small purple navigation image, ! Large purple navigation image) that suggests that the determination result of the advance determination means has become a second predetermined result (Chance eye A, Chance eye B);
an image data specifying means (movie list) for specifying image data (movie data) for displaying an image;
Equipped with
the image data designation means is capable of designating image data (moving image data) and a layer of the image data,
When multiple image data (video data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are different, images based on each image data are displayed overlapping in accordance with the layer priority, and if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, an image based on any one of the multiple image data is displayed,
The same layer (layer 50) is specified when specifying image data (video data) for displaying the first predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! small red navigation, ! large red navigation) when executing the first predetermined suggestion performance (! small red navigation, ! large red navigation), and when specifying image data for displaying the second predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! small purple navigation, ! large purple navigation) when executing the second predetermined suggestion performance (! small purple navigation, ! large purple navigation).
According to this feature, the same layer is specified both when image data for displaying a first predetermined suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of a first predetermined suggestion performance, and when image data for displaying a second predetermined suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of a second predetermined suggestion performance. Therefore, even if both image data for displaying the first predetermined suggestion image and image data for displaying the second predetermined suggestion image are specified, only an image based on one of the image data is displayed, thereby preventing images suggesting different predetermined results from being displayed overlapping each other.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1,
The display area in which the first predetermined suggestion image (! small red navigation image, ! large red navigation image) is displayed and the display area in which the second predetermined suggestion image (! small purple navigation image, ! large purple navigation image) are displayed comprise a common display area.
According to this feature, both the first predetermined suggestion image and the second predetermined suggestion image are displayed in a common display area, making it easier to recognize the different predetermined results suggested by these images, and preventing images suggesting different predetermined results from being displayed overlapping each other in the common display area.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1 or 2-2,
When multiple image data (video data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, only the image based on the image data that was set first or the image data that was set last among the multiple image data is displayed.
According to this feature, when multiple image data are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, it is only necessary to display the image based on the image data that was specified first or the image data that was specified last among the multiple image data, thereby simplifying control.

A gaming machine of form 2-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-3,
The present invention is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the first predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! small red navigation, navigation image of ! large red navigation) or the second predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! small purple navigation, navigation image of ! large purple navigation) from the start of displaying the first predetermined suggestion image to the end of displaying the image.
According to this feature, the first or second specified suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data for which other layers are specified, from the time the display of the first or second specified suggestion image begins until the display ends.

A gaming machine of form 2-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-4,
In the first predetermined suggestion effect (! small red navigation, ! large red navigation) or the second predetermined suggestion effect (! small purple navigation, ! large purple navigation), after starting to display the first predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! small red navigation, ! large red navigation) or the second predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! small purple navigation, ! large purple navigation), the image is changed to a different image when an update condition (stop operation) is met,
The image data (video data) for displaying the changed image is characterized by specifying the same layer (layer 50) as the image data for displaying the first predetermined suggestive image or the image data for displaying the second predetermined suggestive image.
According to this feature, an image that has changed from the first predetermined suggestion image or the second predetermined suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as an image based on image data for which another layer is specified.

The gaming machine of form 2-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-4,
In the first predetermined suggestion effect (! small red navigation, ! large red navigation) or the second predetermined suggestion effect (! small purple navigation, ! large purple navigation), after starting to display the first predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! small red navigation, ! large red navigation) or the second predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! small purple navigation, ! large purple navigation), the image is changed to a different image when an update condition (stop operation) is met,
The method is characterized in that a layer with a higher priority than the image data for displaying the first predetermined suggestive image or the image data for displaying the second predetermined suggestive image is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the image after the change.
According to this feature, even if image data for displaying the first predetermined suggestive image or the second predetermined suggestive image remains, the changed image can be displayed with priority.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are provided, each of which can variably display a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units.
Deriving operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) that a player operates to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
a first specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a first specific suggestion effect (! Small Red Navigation) that displays a first specific suggestion image (! Small Red Navigation navigation image) that suggests the possibility that the determination result of the pre-determination means has become a specific result (strong cherry);
a second specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a second specific suggestion effect (! Big Red Navigation) that displays a second specific suggestion image (! Big Red Navigation navigation image) that suggests that the possibility that the result determined by the advance determination means will be a specific result (strong cherry) is higher than when the first specific suggestion effect (! Small Red Navigation) is executed;
an image data specifying means (movie list) for specifying image data (movie data) for displaying an image;
Equipped with
the image data designation means is capable of designating image data (moving image data) and a layer of the image data,
When multiple image data (video data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are different, images based on each image data are displayed overlapping in accordance with the layer priority, and if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, an image based on any one of the multiple image data is displayed,
The present invention is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) is specified when specifying image data (video data) for displaying the first specific suggestion image (navigation image of ! small red navigation) when executing the first specific suggestion performance (! small red navigation), and when specifying image data for displaying the second specific suggestion image (navigation image of ! large red navigation) when executing the second specific suggestion performance (! large red navigation).
According to this feature, the same layer is specified both when image data for displaying the first specific suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of the first specific suggestion performance, and when image data for displaying the second specific suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of the second specific suggestion performance.Therefore, even if both image data for displaying the first specific suggestion image and image data for displaying the second specific suggestion image are specified, only an image based on one of the image data is displayed, so that although both suggest the possibility of a predetermined result, images suggesting different possibilities are prevented from being displayed overlapping each other.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1,
The display area in which the first specific suggestion image (the navigation image of the ! small red navigation) is displayed and the display area in which the second specific suggestion image (the navigation image of the ! large red navigation) is displayed include a common display area.
According to this feature, both the first specific suggestion image and the second specific suggestion image are displayed in a common display area, making it easier to recognize that the possibilities suggested by these images are different, and preventing images suggesting different possibilities from being displayed overlapping each other in the common display area.

The gaming machine of form 3-3 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1 or 3-2,
When multiple image data (video data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, only the image based on the image data that was set first or the image data that was set last among the multiple image data is displayed.
According to this feature, when multiple image data are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, it is only necessary to display the image based on the image data that was specified first or the image data that was specified last among the multiple image data, thereby simplifying control.

A gaming machine of form 3-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-3,
The present invention is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the first specific suggestion image (navigation image with a small red navigation !) or the second specific suggestion image (navigation image with a large red navigation !) from the start of displaying the image until the end of displaying the image.
According to this feature, the first specific suggestion image or the second specific suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data for which other layers are specified, from the time the display of the first specific suggestion image or the second specific suggestion image begins until the display ends.

A gaming machine of form 3-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-4,
In the first specific suggestion effect (! small red navigation) or the second specific suggestion effect (! large red navigation), after the display of the first specific suggestion image (! small red navigation image) or the second specific suggestion image (! large red navigation image) is started, it is changed to a different image when an update condition (stop operation) is met,
The method is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) as the image data for displaying the first specific suggestion image or the image data for displaying the second specific suggestion image is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the image after the change.
According to this feature, an image that has changed from the first specific suggestion image or the second specific suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as an image based on image data for which another layer is specified.

A gaming machine of form 3-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-4,
In the first specific suggestion effect (! small red navigation) or the second specific suggestion effect (! large red navigation), after the display of the first specific suggestion image (! small red navigation image) or the second specific suggestion image (! large red navigation image) is started, it is changed to a different image when an update condition (stop operation) is met,
The method is characterized in that a layer with a higher priority than the image data for displaying the first specific suggestion image or the image data for displaying the second specific suggestion image is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the image after the change.
According to this feature, even if image data for displaying the first specific suggestion image or the second specific suggestion image remains, the changed image can be displayed preferentially.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are provided, each of which can variably display a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units.
Deriving operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) that a player operates to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
A specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) that displays a specific suggestion image (a navigation image that suggests an operation mode for stopping the main character) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination (main character) corresponding to the type of specific result, based on the result determined by the pre-determining means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
an image data specifying means (movie list) for specifying image data (movie data) for displaying an image;
Equipped with
the image data designation means is capable of designating the image data (moving image data) and a layer of the image data,
When multiple image data (video data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are different, images based on each image data are displayed overlapping in accordance with the layer priority, and if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, an image based on any one of the multiple image data is displayed,
When executing the specific suggestion effect (push order navigation), even if the specific operation mode suggested varies depending on the type of specific result (push order role), the same layer (layer 50) is specified for the image data (video data) used to display the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character).
According to this feature, when a specific suggestion performance is executed, even if the specific operation mode suggested varies depending on the type of specific result, the same layer is specified for the image data for displaying the specific suggestion image, so even if multiple image data are specified for displaying specific suggestion images suggesting different specific operation modes, only an image based on one image data is displayed, thereby preventing images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

The gaming machine of form 4-2 is the gaming machine according to form 4-1,
Even if the specific operation mode suggested depending on the type of specific result (push order role) differs, the display area in which the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main role) is displayed is characterized by including a common display area.
According to this feature, even if the specific operation mode suggested depending on the type of specific result differs, the specific suggestion images are displayed in a common display area, making it easier to recognize the operation mode suggested by these images and preventing images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other in the common display area.

The gaming machine of form 4-3 is the gaming machine according to form 4-1 or 4-2,
When multiple image data (video data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, only the image based on the image data that was set first or the image data that was set last among the multiple image data is displayed.
According to this feature, when multiple image data are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, it is only necessary to display the image based on the image data that was specified first or the image data that was specified last among the multiple image data, thereby simplifying control.

A gaming machine of form 4-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-3,
A feature of this system is that the same layer (layer 50) is specified for the image data (video data) used to display the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character) from the start of displaying the image to the end of displaying the image.
According to this feature, the specific suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data for which other layers are specified from the time the display of the specific suggestion image starts until the display ends.

A gaming machine of form 4-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-4,
In the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation), after starting to display the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode to stop the main character), it changes to a different image when the update condition (stop operation) is established,
The image data (video data) for displaying the image after the change is characterized by specifying the same layer (layer 50) as the image data for displaying the specific suggestion image.
According to this feature, an image that has changed from a specific suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as an image based on image data for which another layer is specified.

A gaming machine of form 4-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-4,
In the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation), after starting to display the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode to stop the main character), it changes to a different image when the update condition (stop operation) is established,
The image data (video data) for displaying the image after the change is assigned a layer with a higher priority than the image data for displaying the specific suggestion image.
According to this feature, even if image data for displaying a specific suggestion image remains, the changed image can be displayed with priority.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are provided, each of which can variably display a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units.
Deriving operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) that a player operates to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
audio output means (speakers 53, 54) for outputting audio;
A specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) that outputs a specific suggestion sound (a navigation sound that suggests an operation mode to stop the main character) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination (main character) corresponding to the type of specific result, based on the determination result of the pre-determining means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
audio data designation means (sound designation command) for designating audio data for outputting audio;
Equipped with
the audio data designation means is capable of designating the audio data and a track of the audio data;
When multiple pieces of audio data are designated, if the tracks of the multiple pieces of audio data are different, audio based on the audio data designated for each track is synthesized and output, and if the tracks of the multiple pieces of audio data are the same, audio based on any one of the multiple pieces of audio data is output,
When executing the specific suggestion effect (push order navigation), even if the specific operation mode suggested depending on the type of specific result (push order role) differs, the same track (track 2) is specified for the audio data for outputting the specific suggestion sound (navigation sound suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character).
According to this feature, when a specific suggestion performance is executed, even if the specific operation mode suggested varies depending on the type of specific result, the same track is specified for the audio data for outputting the specific suggestion sound, so even if multiple audio data are specified for outputting specific suggestion sounds that suggest different specific operation modes, only audio based on one audio data is output, thereby preventing sounds suggesting different operation modes from being output simultaneously.

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is the gaming machine according to form 5-1,
When multiple audio data are specified, if the tracks of the multiple audio data are the same, only the audio based on the first or last specified audio data among the multiple audio data is output.
According to this feature, when multiple audio data are specified, if the tracks of the multiple audio data are the same, it is only necessary to output the audio based on the first or last specified audio data among the multiple audio data, thereby simplifying control.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is the gaming machine according to form 5-1 or 5-2,
The volume can be specified for each audio data.
When the specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) is executed, even if the specific operation mode suggested varies depending on the type of specific result (push order role), the same volume is specified for the audio data used to output the specific suggestion sound (navigation sound suggesting the operation mode to stop the main character).
According to this feature, when a specific suggestion performance is executed, even if the specific operation mode suggested varies depending on the type of specific result, the volume of the specific suggestion sound does not change, making the specific suggestion sound easier to hear.

A gaming machine of form 5-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 5-1 to 5-3,
A sound based on the sound data corresponding to the displayed image is output, and
When specifying audio data corresponding to images that are displayed exclusively (for example, a push order navigation image and an ! navigation image), the same track (track 2) is specified.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent sounds corresponding to images that are exclusively displayed from being output at the same time.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are provided, each of which can variably display a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units.
Deriving operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) that a player operates to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
a predetermined light-emitting unit (performance effect LED 52);
a specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) by illuminating the predetermined light-emitting unit (effect effect LED 52) in a specific suggestion pattern (light-emitting pattern suggesting an operation mode for stopping the main character) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination (main character) corresponding to the type of specific result, based on the determination result of the pre-determining means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
a light emission data setting means (lamp layer) for setting light emission data (lamp data) that defines the light emission pattern of the predetermined light emitting unit (performance effect LED 52);
a light emission data specifying means (lamp command) for specifying light emission data (lamp data) to be set in the light emission data setting means (lamp layer);
Equipped with
The light emission data setting means (lamp layer) includes a plurality of setting areas (lamp layers 1 to 4),
The light emission data designation means (lamp command) can designate a setting area (lamp layer) of the light emission data together with the light emission data (lamp data),
When multiple pieces of light-emitting data (lamp data) are designated, if the setting areas (lamp layers) of the multiple pieces of light-emitting data are different, the predetermined light-emitting unit (performance effect LED 52) is illuminated based on the light-emitting data set in the setting area with the highest priority, and if the setting areas of the multiple pieces of light-emitting data are the same, the predetermined light-emitting unit is illuminated in a light-emitting pattern based on any one of the multiple pieces of light-emitting data,
When executing the specific suggestion effect (push order navigation), even if the specific operation mode suggested varies depending on the type of specific result (push order role), the same setting area (lamp layer 2) is specified for the light-emitting data (lamp data) that defines the specific suggestion pattern (light-emitting pattern that suggests the operation mode to stop the main role).
According to this feature, when a specific suggestion effect is executed, even if the specific operation pattern suggested varies depending on the type of specific result, the same setting area is specified for the light-emitting data that defines the specific suggestion pattern, so even if multiple light-emitting data that define specific suggestion patterns that suggest different specific operation modes are specified, the light-emitting pattern will be based on one light-emitting data, preventing the operation mode suggested by the light-emitting pattern from becoming difficult to recognize.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
When multiple pieces of light-emitting data (lamp data) are specified, if the setting areas (lamp layers) of the multiple pieces of light-emitting data are the same, the specified light-emitting section (performance effect LED 52) is illuminated in a light-emitting pattern based on the first or last specified piece of light-emitting data among the multiple pieces of light-emitting data.
According to this feature, when multiple light emission data are specified, if the setting areas of the multiple light emission data are the same, the light emission pattern can be based on the first or last specified light emission data among the multiple light emission data, thereby simplifying control.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1 or 6-2,
When the specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) is executed, if the specific operation mode suggested varies depending on the type of specific result (push order role), light emission data (lamp data) is set which defines the light emission pattern in which different light emission parts among the specified light emission parts (effect effect LED 52) emit light.
According to this feature, when a specific suggestion effect is executed, if the specific operation mode suggested depending on the type of specific result differs, different light-emitting elements will light up, making it possible to easily recognize the operation mode from the difference in the light-emitting elements.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are provided, each of which can variably display a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units.
Deriving operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) that a player operates to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
A special suggestion effect execution means for executing a special suggestion effect (7 navigation) that suggests a special operation mode (stop operation within the pull-in range of the black 7 symbol) of the derivation operation means for deriving a special display result combination (7-matching lip) based on the determination result of the advance determination means being a special result (7-matching lip, 7-mismatching lip);
Equipped with
When the determination result of the pre-determination means is a predetermined result (watermelon), by operating the deriving operation means in a predetermined operation mode (stop operation in the reel-in range of the watermelon symbol) different from the special operation mode, a predetermined display result combination (watermelon) corresponding to the predetermined result is derived, and by operating the deriving operation means in the special operation mode (stop operation in the reel-in range of the black 7 symbol), the predetermined display result combination is not derived,
Based on an operation to start the variable display of the variable display section, it is determined whether or not a decision has been made to execute the special suggestion effect (7 Navi) and whether or not the result of the decision made by the advance decision means is the predetermined result (watermelon), and the special suggestion effect is executed on the condition that a decision has been made to execute the special suggestion effect and it has been determined that the result of the decision made by the advance decision means is not the predetermined result.
According to this feature, even if a malfunction causes the result of determination by the advance determination means to be the predetermined result, and even if it is determined that a special suggestion effect should be executed, the special suggestion effect will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent the derivation operation means from being operated in a special operation mode suggested by the erroneously executed special suggestion effect, making it impossible to derive the predetermined display result combination corresponding to the predetermined result.

The gaming machine of aspect 7-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 7-1,
When the determination result of the advance determination means is the first special result (7-match lip) among the special results, the derivation operation means is operated in the special operation mode (stop operation in the pull-in range of the black 7 pattern) to derive the special display result combination (7-match lip), and when the determination result of the advance determination means is the second special result (7-mismatch lip) among the special results, a non-special display result combination (7-mismatch lip) different from the special display result combination is derived,
The method is characterized in that it determines whether or not to execute the special suggestion effect (7 navi) when the result of the determination by the advance determination means is the first special result (7-matching lip) or the second special result (7-mismatching lip).
According to this feature, the special suggestion effect can be executed both when the first special result is obtained, which can lead to a special display result combination, and when the second special result is obtained, which does not lead to a special display result combination, so that the opportunities for the special suggestion effect can be increased, and the execution of the special suggestion effect can create expectations that a special display result combination will be derived.

The gaming machine of aspect 7-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 7-2,
When the determination result of the advance determination means is the first special result (7's replay) or the second special result (7's mismatch replay), if the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the special operation mode (stop operation within the reel-in range of the black 7 symbol), neither the special display result combination (7's replay) nor the non-special display result combination (7's mismatch replay) is derived, but a display result combination (any replay) that results in a win is derived.
According to this feature, when the first special result or the second special result is obtained, if the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the special operation mode, neither the special display result combination nor the non-special display result combination is derived, but a display result combination that results in a win is derived, so even if the special suggestion effect is not executed when the first special result or the second special result is obtained, the player will not be disadvantaged.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are provided, each of which can variably display a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units.
Deriving operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) that a player operates to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
A specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means to derive a display result combination (main role) corresponding to the type of specific result, based on the result determined by the advance determination means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
A special suggestion effect execution means for executing a special suggestion effect (7 navigation) that suggests a special operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a special display result combination (7-matching lip) based on the determination result of the advance determination means being a special result (7-matching lip, 7-mismatching lip);
Equipped with
Based on an operation to start the variable display of the variable display section, it is determined whether or not a decision has been made to execute the special suggestion effect (7 navigation) and whether or not a decision has been made to execute the specific suggestion effect (push order navigation), and the special suggestion effect is executed on the condition that it is determined that a decision has been made to execute the special suggestion effect and that a decision has not been made to execute the specific suggestion effect.
According to this feature, even if a malfunction has determined that a specific suggestion effect will be executed, and even if a special suggestion effect will be executed, the special suggestion effect will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent effects suggesting different operation modes from being executed in combination.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 8-1,
When the determination result of the advance determination means is the first special result (7-match lip) among the special results, the derivation operation means is operated in the special operation mode (stop operation in the pull-in range of the black 7 pattern) to derive the special display result combination (7-match lip), and when the determination result of the advance determination means is the second special result (7-mismatch lip) among the special results, a non-special display result combination (7-mismatch lip) different from the special display result combination is derived,
The method is characterized in that it determines whether or not to execute the special suggestion effect (7 navi) when the result of the determination by the advance determination means is the first special result (7-matching lip) or the second special result (7-mismatching lip).
According to this feature, the special suggestion effect can be executed both when the first special result is obtained, which can lead to a special display result combination, and when the second special result is obtained, which does not lead to a special display result combination, so that the opportunities for the special suggestion effect can be increased, and the execution of the special suggestion effect can create expectations that a special display result combination will be derived.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 8-2,
When the determination result of the advance determination means is the first special result (7's replay) or the second special result (7's mismatch replay), if the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the special operation mode (stop operation within the reel-in range of the black 7 symbol), neither the special display result combination (7's replay) nor the non-special display result combination (7's mismatch replay) is derived, but a display result combination (any replay) that results in a win is derived.
According to this feature, when the first special result or the second special result is obtained, if the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the special operation mode, neither the special display result combination nor the non-special display result combination is derived, but a display result combination that results in a win is derived, so even if the special suggestion effect is not executed when the first special result or the second special result is obtained, the player will not be disadvantaged.

A gaming machine of form 8-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 8-1 to 8-3,
When the determination result of the pre-determination means is one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order combinations), the derivation operation means is operated in a specific operation mode corresponding to the type of specific result, thereby deriving a display result combination (main role) corresponding to the type of specific result;
When the result of the pre-determination means is one of a plurality of specific results (push order roles), it is determined that the specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) will be executed.
According to this feature, by executing the specific suggestion effect, it is possible to derive a display result combination corresponding to the type of specific result.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) for playing games,
A disable state control means for controlling the game to a disabled state (error state, setting change state, setting confirmation state) in which the game progress is disabled;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
a disablement state notification means for displaying a disablement state corresponding image (an error image, an image during setting change, an image during setting confirmation) corresponding to the disablement state (an error state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state) on the image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
Equipped with
When a game is started based on a start operation to start the game, a process is executed to erase the images corresponding to the disabled state (error image, image indicating that settings are being changed, image indicating that settings are being checked).
According to this feature, even if the disabled state has ended but the image corresponding to the disabled state continues to be displayed due to a malfunction, the image corresponding to the disabled state is erased when the game starts based on the start operation, thereby preventing the presentation as the game progresses from being hindered.

A gaming machine of aspect 9-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-1,
a disablement state flag setting means for setting a disablement state flag (an error flag, a setting change flag, a setting confirmation flag) when the device is controlled to the disablement state (an error state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state),
When a game is started based on the start operation, it is determined whether or not the disabling flag (error flag, setting change in progress flag, setting confirmation in progress flag) is set, and when it is determined that the disabling flag is not set, a process is executed to erase the image corresponding to the disabling state (error image, setting change in progress image, setting confirmation in progress image).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the disabled state corresponding image from being erased even though the image is controlled to be in the disabled state.

A gaming machine of aspect 9-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-2,
the disabled state control means terminates control of the disabled state when a release condition is met in the disabled state (error state, setting change state, setting confirmation state),
The disabling flag setting means is characterized by clearing the disabling flag (error flag, setting change in progress flag, setting confirmation in progress flag) when a release condition is met in the disabling state (error state, setting change state, setting confirmation state).
According to this feature, the disablement flag is cleared when the release condition that ends the disabled state is met, so that when game play begins based on the start operation, it can be properly determined whether the disabled state has ended or not.

A gaming machine of aspect 9-4 is a gaming machine according to aspect 9-2 or 9-3,
the disabled state control means terminates control of the disabled state when a release condition is met in the disabled state (error state, setting change state, setting confirmation state),
When the release condition is met in the disabled state (error state, setting change state, setting confirmation state), a process is executed to erase the image corresponding to the disabled state (error image, image during setting change, image during setting confirmation).
According to this feature, the image corresponding to the disabled state is erased when the release condition that ends the disabled state is met, so that the image corresponding to the disabled state can be erased appropriately.

A gaming machine of aspect 9-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 9-1 to 9-4,
When a game is started based on the start operation, a process for erasing the images corresponding to the disabled state (error image, image in the process of changing settings, image in the process of checking settings) is executed before the processes related to the progress of the game (effect determination process 1, effect setting process).
According to this feature, when a game is started based on a start operation, the image corresponding to the disabled state is erased before the processing related to the progress of the game, so that the image corresponding to the disabled state does not affect the presentation as the game progresses.

A gaming machine of aspect 9-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 9-1 to 9-5,
a start control information transmitting means for transmitting control information (a game start command) indicating the start of a game when the game is started based on the start operation;
The device is characterized in that, based on receiving control information (game start command) indicating the start of the game, it executes processing to erase the disabled state corresponding images (error image, setting change image, setting confirmation image).
According to this feature, the disabled state corresponding image can be erased upon receiving control information indicating the start of a game.

A gaming machine of aspect 9-7 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 9-1 to 9-6,
an image setting area (layer) in which image data (moving image data) for displaying an image is set;
The image setting area (layer) includes a plurality of setting areas, and when image data (video data) is set in each of the different setting areas, images based on the image data set in each setting area are displayed in an overlapping manner in accordance with the priority of the setting areas;
The image data (video data) for displaying the disabled state corresponding images (error image, image during setting change, image during setting confirmation) is characterized in that it is set in a setting area (layer 20) that has a higher priority than the image data for displaying the performance image.
According to this feature, when the device is controlled to be in the disabled state, the disabled state corresponding image can be displayed with priority over the effect image.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are provided, each of which can variably display a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units.
Deriving operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) that a player operates to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
A specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) that displays a specific suggestion image (navigation image) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination (main role) corresponding to the type of specific result, based on the result determined by the advance determination means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
Equipped with
When a game is started based on a start operation for starting the game, a process for erasing the specific suggestion image (navigation image) is executed.
According to this feature, even if a specific suggestion image from a previous game continues to be displayed due to a malfunction, the specific suggestion image is erased when the game starts based on the start operation, thereby preventing the presentation that accompanies the progress of the game from being hindered.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are provided, each of which can variably display a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units.
Deriving operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) that a player operates to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
A specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) that displays a specific suggestion image (navigation image) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination (main role) corresponding to the type of specific result, based on the result determined by the advance determination means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
Equipped with
The method is characterized in that, based on the result of displaying the specific indication image (navigation image) on all the variable display sections, a process is executed to erase the specific indication image (navigation image).
According to this feature, the specific suggestion image is erased based on the display results being derived on all variable display sections, so that the specific suggestion image does not continue to be displayed even after the game has ended, preventing the presentation that accompanies the progress of the game from being disrupted.

A gaming machine according to aspect 10-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 10-1 or 10-2,
The display device is characterized in that, based on the operation of the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display section, a process for updating or erasing the specific suggestion image (navigation image) is executed.
According to this feature, the specific suggestion image can be updated or erased every time the deriving operation means is operated in the suggested operation mode.

A gaming machine of aspect 10-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 10-1 to 10-3,
The identification suggestion image (navigation image) includes a plurality of types of suggestion images corresponding to the types of the identification result,
Regardless of the type of suggestion image that is displayed, the process for erasing the specific suggestion image (navigation image) is common.
According to this feature, regardless of the type of suggestion image being displayed, the specific suggestion image is erased by a common process, thereby reducing the program capacity.

A gaming machine of aspect 10-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 10-1 to 10-4,
The identification suggestion image (navigation image) includes a plurality of types of suggestion images corresponding to the types of the identification result,
Execute a process for erasing the specific suggestion image based on the fact that the deriving operation means is operated in an operation manner other than the operation manner suggested by the specific suggestion image (navigation image);
When the derivation operation means is operated in an operation manner other than that suggested by the specific suggestion image (navigation image), the process for erasing the specific suggestion image is common regardless of the type of suggestion image being displayed.
According to this feature, when the derived operation means is operated in an operation manner other than the operation manner suggested by the specific suggestion image, the specific suggestion image is erased by common processing regardless of which type of suggestion image is displayed, thereby reducing program capacity.

[Configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 1 is a front view of a card unit and a slot machine.

Referring to Figure 1, each of the gaming islands (not shown) installed in an amusement hall (hall) is equipped with a slot machine 2, and a card unit (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as CU) 3, an example of a gaming device, is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the slot machine 2 at a predetermined side position. The card unit is also referred to as a "game medal lending device."

Slot machine 2 is a slot machine in which the player does not pick up medals and insert them into an insertion slot, and medals are not paid out to the player. Therefore, gaming value is added directly to credits (gaming points that can be used in games (hereinafter referred to as "gaming medals" or simply "medals")) in accordance with lending operations, etc.

Furthermore, unlike conventional slot machines, not only do they not have a medal insertion slot or payout outlet, but they also do not require devices to control inserted medals, such as medal selectors or hoppers. Slot machines like this, which do not require any medals at all, are called "controlled gaming machines" or "medalless slot machines."

Figure 1 shows slot machine 2 as viewed from the front (front) side. Inside slot machine 2, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as left reel, center reel, and right reel) with multiple types of symbols arranged around their periphery are arranged side by side in a horizontal direction, and three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen through transmission window 3W.

Each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotated by a corresponding reel motor 32L, 32C, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 2. As a result, the symbols on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in a continuously changing manner in the transparent window 3W. Furthermore, by stopping the rotation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed in the transparent window 3W as a display result.

Reel LEDs 55 (shown in Figure 2) are provided inside reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The reel LEDs 55 illuminate reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (shown in Figure 1) from behind. The reel LEDs 55 are made up of 12 LEDs corresponding to the three consecutive symbols on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can illuminate each symbol independently.

A display area of the liquid crystal display 51 is located in front of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (on the player's side). The liquid crystal display 51 is designed so that each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be seen from the player's side through the transparent area corresponding to the transparent window 3W of the display area and the transparent window 3W.

Figure 3 shows the arrangement of symbols on the reels. As shown in Figure 3, each reel has several types of identifiable symbols ("Character," "Black 7," "White 7," "BAR," "Replay," "Plum," "Cherry," "Watermelon," "Moon," and "Orange") arranged in a predetermined order.

The protrusion 95 protrudes toward the front of the slot machine 2. By protruding toward the front of the slot machine 2, the protrusion 95 forms an upper surface 96. The upper surface 96 of the protrusion 95 is provided with the MAXBET switch 6, 1BET switch 20, bet number clear switch 21, effect switch 57, and game information display unit 90, while the front side of the protrusion 95 is provided with the start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and count button 10. The upper surface 96 may be a sloped surface that gently slopes from the back to the front from a position below the transparent window 3W.

The start switch 7 is used to start the reels spinning after the bet amount has been set. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to stop the reels while they are spinning, with 8L corresponding to the left reel, 8C corresponding to the center reel, and 8R corresponding to the right reel. The count button 10 is used to count the number of credits (number of game medals) and convert them into the number of medals held.

A door open detection switch 25, shown in Figure 2, is provided on the inside of the front door of the slot machine 2. The door open detection switch 25 detects whether the front door is open. Furthermore, a power supply box is provided inside the housing. The setting key switch 37 and reset/setting switch 38, shown in Figure 2, are provided on the front of the power supply box. The setting key switch 37 switches between the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The reset/setting switch 38 normally functions as a reset switch for clearing an error state or a play stop state, and in the setting change state functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (ball payout rate) of the internal lottery. A setting value display 24, shown in Figure 2, is provided on the inside of the front door of the slot machine 2.

In this embodiment, of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that start spinning, the first reel to stop is referred to as the first stopped reel, and its stop is referred to as the first stop. Similarly, the second reel to stop is referred to as the second stopped reel, and its stop is referred to as the second stop, and the third reel to stop is referred to as the third stopped reel, and its stop is referred to as the third stop, final stop, or all reels stop.

Next, we will explain the flow of the game on slot machine 2. When playing a game on slot machine 2, first, a lending operation is performed on CU3 to secure credits (game medals). This lending operation corresponds to the two-step operation of "lending medals" and "manually inserting the loaned medals into the slot" in conventional slot machines that use a medal payout system.

When the MAXBET switch 6 is operated while credits are present, the maximum bet within the credit range is added, and the credits are reduced by the added amount. Once the specified number of bets is set, the pay line L becomes active, and operation of the START switch 7 becomes active, i.e., the game can be started.

Here, a winning line is a line set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed in the transparent window 3W of each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning combination. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 1, the winning line is the winning line L set across the symbols lined up on the bottom row of reel 2L, the middle row of reel 2C, and the bottom row of reel 2R.

When the start switch 7 is operated while the game is ready to start, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R will spin, and the symbols on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R will change continuously. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, or 2R will stop, and the display result will be derived and displayed in the transparent window 3W.

A game ends when all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R come to a stop, and a win occurs when a predetermined combination of symbols appears on the payline L as a result of the display on each of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When a win occurs, the player is awarded a number of points determined according to the win. These points are added to the player's credits.

Credits can be counted and converted into medals by operating the count button 10. By converting them into medals, you can record those medals on your card when you finish playing.

In this embodiment, when the count button 10 is pressed once, all of the game balls currently owned by the player are counted, regardless of how long the button is pressed (whether it is pressed and held or not). However, this is not limited to this, and the counting operation may be repeatedly performed depending on how long the count button 10 is pressed (for example, a counting process of 50 balls is performed every time the button is pressed for 0.3 seconds). Furthermore, regardless of how long the button is pressed, a predetermined number (for example, 50 balls) of game balls may be counted into the player's medals when the button is pressed once.

A credit display segment 7S and speakers 53 and 54 are provided at the top of the LCD display 51. The credit display segment 7S is made up of five 7-segment segments and displays the number of credits held by the player. By being provided at the top of the slot machine 2, the credit display segment 7S can display the number of credits stored in the slot machine 2 to players other than the player playing with the slot machine 2 or to store staff. The speakers 53 and 54 emit sound effects that match the presentation.

As described above, the MAXBET switch 6 is a switch used to maximize the number of bets. In other words, the MAXBET switch 6 is used to progress the game. In this embodiment, the MAXBET switch 6 is also used for presentation effects. In other words, when the same operation is performed on the MAXBET switch 6, different processing is executed depending on whether the operation is a valid operation or an invalid operation. In this way, the MAXBET switch 6 is used both for progress of the game and presentation effects.

The following describes valid and invalid operations of the MAXBET switch 6. A valid operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is an operation performed on the MAXBET switch 6 in a bet setting status in which a bet can be set. A bet setting status refers to a period in which a bet can be accepted, such as a "status in which one or more credits remain and a bet of less than three coins has been set" or a "status in which one or more credits remain and no bet has been set." When the MAXBET switch is operated in a "status in which one or more credits remain and a bet of less than three coins has been set in the bet counter," the bet is set to the remaining credits, up to a maximum of three coins. When the MAXBET switch is operated in a "status in which one or more credits remain and no bet has been set," the bet is set to the remaining credits, up to a maximum of three coins. In this way, the MAXBET switch 6 is used as a switch for progressing the game by setting a bet when a valid operation is performed in a bet setting status.

On the other hand, an invalid operation of the MAXBET switch 6 refers to an operation performed on the MAXBET switch 6 in a bet setting impossible situation, where it is not possible to set a bet. The bet setting impossible situation includes "the period from the start to the end of a game." In other words, any operation on the MAXBET switch 6 is invalid while the reels are spinning and a game is being played. In this embodiment, the slot machine 2 may display an operation prompting the player to invalidate the MAXBET switch 6 while the reels are spinning. When the player invalidates the MAXBET switch 6 at this time, an effect is produced, such as an image suggesting the degree of advantage. In this way, the MAXBET switch 6 in this embodiment is used as a trigger for displaying an effect image when an invalid operation is performed in a bet setting impossible situation. In other words, the MAXBET switch 6 is used to progress the game during the period when valid operations are accepted, and is used for effect production during the period when invalid operations are accepted.

[Card unit configuration]
The configuration of the CU 3 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 1. This CU 3 accepts visitor cards (also called general cards) with prepaid functions, which are gaming storage media issued to general players who are not registered as members, and member cards, which are gaming storage media issued to member players who are registered as members of the gaming facility. The visitor cards and member cards are composed of IC cards.

CU3, which accepts these cards, has the function of converting the gaming value owned by the player (such as prepaid balance, number of medals held, or number of medals saved (also called "number of balls saved")) identified by the information stored on the card into the number of credits (number of gaming medals).

The front side of CU3 is provided with a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 that protrudes forward from the front of the device, and a card insertion/ejection slot 309 for inserting member cards and visitor cards. A member card or visitor card inserted into this card insertion/ejection slot 309 is accepted by a card reader/writer (not shown), and the information recorded on the card is read.

The surface of the aforementioned protruding portion 305 facing the player is provided with a display 312, a replay button 319 for executing a replay game using the membership card ID (also simply referred to as the card ID or C-ID) recorded on the membership card when the membership card is accepted, and the number of medals (number of balls) specified by the membership card ID, and an IR photosensitive unit 320 that receives infrared signals from a remote control (not shown) carried by an amusement center attendant, converts them into electronic signals, and outputs them.

The display 312 is capable of displaying the prepaid balance (also referred to as the card balance or simply the balance) recorded on the inserted gaming recording medium (card), the number of medals held, the number of credits (number of gaming medals), and various other information, and its surface is made up of a transparent touch panel. It is configured so that various operations can be input by touching the various display items displayed on the display section of the display 312 with a finger.

When the medal button 324 is operated, a portion of the number of medals recorded on the inserted card is withdrawn and converted into credits (number of game medals). When the replay button 319 is operated, if the inserted card stores the number of medals the player has acquired, a portion of that number of medals is withdrawn and converted into credits, and the player can play on the slot machine 2 based on the converted credits.

On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and does not store the number of medals held, but the saved medals are stored in the hall's management computer, etc., some of the saved medals are withdrawn and converted into credits, allowing play on the slot machine 2. In other words, if both saved medals and saved medals are stored in association with the inserted card, the saved medals will be withdrawn first. Furthermore, a dedicated medal payout button for withdrawing saved medals may be provided in addition to the replay button 319, and the replay button 319 may be used as a dedicated button for withdrawing saved medals.

Here, "credits (game medals)" refers to data that can be used to set the bet amount and can also be converted into "owned medals." "Credits" are generated in exchange for withdrawing the balance on a prepaid card, the number of owned medals, or the number of saved medals.

The "number of medals held" is a numerical conversion of the number of credits (number of medals played) that a player owns as a result of playing a slot machine. This "number of medals held" is stored in a manner that allows it to be identified by the player's card. The number of medals held may also be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals held that is installed in the gaming facility.

"Number of saved medals (number of saved balls)" refers to the number of medals a player has deposited at the amusement facility. The number of medals a player has won through play is managed as the number of saved medals on the day, but is managed as the "number of saved medals" from the day after they were won. In other words, the number of credits (number of game medals) a player has won and counted at the amusement facility on the day is called "points," and the number of medals a player has won and deposited at the amusement facility on or before the day before is called the "number of saved medals." This "number of saved medals" is generally managed by the hall management computer or other management computer installed at the amusement facility.

The direction in which each of the above data - "Balance," "Number of saved medals (number of saved balls)," "Number of medals held," and "Number of credits (number of game medals)" - can be converted is shown by arrows: "Balance, Number of saved medals, Number of medals held" → "Number of credits" → "Number of medals held" → "Number of saved medals."

In this embodiment, the medal count data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but is stored in a host server such as a hall management computer in association with the membership card number, so that the corresponding medal count can be searched for based on the membership card number. On the other hand, the number of medals held is recorded directly on the card.

However, both may also be stored in the upper server in association with the card number. In the case of visitor cards, the number of medals held is also recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the number of medals held may also be stored in the upper server in association with the card number. When storing the number in association with the card number in this upper server, data that can identify the time it was stored in the upper server may be written to the card (membership card, visitor card) and then discharged. In addition, the prepaid balance is written directly to the card (membership card, visitor card) and then discharged.

The number of medals held is stored on the card (membership card, visitor card) or on the host server, for example, when the counting button 10 is operated and the counting process is performed. However, instead, the number may be stored all at once when the card is returned.

Also, when a player finishes playing and returns the card from CU3, the medals stored in CU3 can be temporarily stored as saved balls in the hall server, and when the player inserts the card into the same or a different CU3 on the same day the card is returned, only the medals for that day that were temporarily stored as saved balls can be stored again in that CU3, and credits can be added within the range of the medals stored, allowing play.

Banknotes inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 are taken in by a currency validator (not shown) and their authenticity and banknote type are identified.

The front side of CU3 is also provided with a loan button 321 and a card return button 322. The loan button 321 is a button operated to debit the balance recorded on the inserted card to obtain the number of credits. Specifically, by operating the loan button 321, the number of credits is added according to the balance debited. The card return button 322 is operated when the player ends play, and is an operation button to store the confirmed number of medals held at the end of play (number of medals held at the time the card was inserted - number of medals converted from number of medals to number of credits + number counted by the counting operation) in the inserted card and then eject it.

As explained above, the slot machine 2 according to this embodiment converts the number of medals held, as specified by the card, into the number of credits (number of game medals), and furthermore, the number of credits can be used to set the number of bets. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new slot machine (managed game machine) that does not use medals, without causing confusion to players who are accustomed to conventional slot machines in which medals are loaned, credits are secured by inserting those medals, and the number of bets is set using those credits.

[Internal configuration of card unit and slot machine]
2 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the card unit and the slot machine 2. The control circuits of the CU 3 and the slot machine 2 will be outlined with reference to FIG.

CU3 is provided with a CU control board 32, which is provided with a CU control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer and other components. This CU control unit 323 is the main control function unit of CU3, and is provided with a CPU as the control center, ROM which stores programs and control data for the CPU to operate, RAM which functions as the CPU's work area, and an input/output interface which maintains signal consistency with peripheral devices.

The CU control unit 323 is provided with an external output terminal (not shown) for communicating with the hall management computer and the hall server that performs security management. The CU 3 transmits its status and gaming machine status information received from the slot machine 2 to external devices such as the hall management computer (hall computer) and the hall server that performs security management via the external output terminal. The CU control unit 323 communicates with the medal count control board 17 of the slot machine 2 via the communication control IC 325. The communication control IC 325 and medal count control board 17 are connected, for example, via an asynchronous serial communication port. Communication between the communication control IC 325 and medal count control board 17 is performed via the connection terminal board 1000.

Communication between the CU control unit 323 and the medal count control board 17 is bidirectional, exchanging loan information (information regarding the operation to withdraw the balance stored on the inserted card and use it for play on the slot machine 2) and loan response information (information regarding the response to the loan information), while other counting information (information regarding the counting process from credit to held medals) and gaming machine information is communicated unidirectionally from the medal count control board 17 to the CU control unit 323. As a result, the slot machine 2 does not recognize whether the CU3 has received the counting information and gaming machine information. The CU3 is provided with a connection part (not shown) to the slot machine 2, and the slot machine 2 is provided with a connection part (not shown) to the CU3. These connections are composed of, for example, connectors.

The CU control unit 323 manages and stores the medals held by the player while the player is playing. The display unit 312 displays images corresponding to data such as the balance or number of medals held output from the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the touch panel on the surface of the display unit 312, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the loan button 321, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. Note that the loan button 321 is not limited to being provided in the CU 3, but may also be provided in the slot machine 2 and input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the card return button 322, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323.

The slot machine 2 is equipped with a main control board 16 that controls the progress of play on the slot machine 2, a medal count control board 17 that controls the credits owned by the player, a presentation control board 15 that controls presentations according to the game status, and a power supply board 101. The power supply board 101 generates power to drive the electrical components that make up the slot machine 2 and supplies it to each section.

The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC 100V power from an external source, and this AC 100V power generates the DC voltage required to drive the electrical components that make up the slot machine 2, which is then supplied to the main control board 16, medal count control board 17, and performance control board 15.

The medal count control board 17 is equipped with a microcomputer for payout control, which is the medal count control unit 171. The medal count control unit 171 is equipped with a CPU 171a as the control center, a ROM 171b that stores programs and control data for the CPU 171a to operate, a RAM 171c that functions as a work area for the CPU 171a, and an input/output interface to maintain signal consistency with peripheral devices.

The medal count control board 17 is connected to a RAM clear switch 293 for erasing information stored in RAM 171c and a door open detection switch 25, and receives detection signals from these connected switches. The medal count control board 17 is also connected to a count button 10, and receives a detection signal from the count button 10.

A role ratio monitor 89 is connected to the medal count control board 17, and the display is controlled by a medal count control unit 171. A backup memory 294 is also connected to the medal count control board 17, and the medal count control board 17 backs up the role ratio information to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 89.

The role ratio monitor 89 normally displays numerical values indicating the performance of the slot machine (hereinafter also referred to as "role ratio information"). Numeric values indicating the performance of the slot machine include, for example, the instructed role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the consecutive role payout ratio for the past 6,000 games, the role payout ratio for the past 6,000 games, the consecutive role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the role status ratio to the total cumulative payout number. Details of this information will be explained below.

The main control board 16 is equipped with a game control microcomputer, the main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 is equipped with a CPU 161a as the control center, a ROM 161b that stores programs and control data for the CPU 161a to operate, a RAM 161c that functions as a work area for the CPU 161a, and an input/output interface to maintain signal integrity with peripheral devices.

Reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to the main control board 16 and are driven under the control of the main control unit 161. The setting key switch 37, reset/setting switch 38, and start switch 7 are also connected to the main control board 16, and detection signals from these connected switches are input. The game assist display 12 and setting value display 24 are also connected to the main control board 16, and the displays are controlled by the main control unit 161.

The bet number clear switch 21, 1BET switch 20, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, door open detection switch 25, and MAXBET switch 6 are also connected to the main control board 16 via the relay board 1100, and detection signals from these connected switches are input. The 1-3BET LEDs 14-16 are also connected to the main control board 16 via the relay board 1100, and the display is controlled by the main control unit 161. If the main control unit 161 detects that the MAXBET switch 6 has been operated during the period in which the invalid operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is accepted, it sends an operation command indicating that the invalid operation of the MAXBET switch 6 has been performed to the performance control unit 151.

The performance control board 15 is equipped with a performance control microcomputer, the performance control unit 151. The performance control unit 151 is equipped with a CPU 151a as the control center, a ROM 151b that stores programs and control data for the CPU 151a to operate, a RAM 151c that functions as a work area for the CPU 151a, and an input/output interface to maintain signal consistency with peripheral devices.

A performance switch 57 is connected to the performance control board 15, and a detection signal from the performance switch 57 is input. Performance devices such as an LCD display 51, performance effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel LEDs 55, and credit display segments 7S are also connected to the performance control board 15, and these performance devices are driven under the control of the performance control unit 151.

In addition, a light intensity/volume adjustment board 111 is connected to the performance control board 15. Switches for adjusting the light intensity and volume are connected to the light intensity/volume adjustment board 111, and detection signals from these switches are input to the performance control board 15 via the light intensity/volume adjustment board 111.

The main control unit 161 sends various commands to the performance control unit 151. Commands sent from the main control unit 161 to the performance control unit 151 are sent in only one direction; commands are never sent from the performance control unit 151 to the main control unit 161. The performance control unit 151 receives commands sent from the main control unit 161 and performs various controls to produce performances.

The medal count control unit 171 sends various commands to the main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 also sends various commands to the medal count control unit 171. In other words, communication between the medal count control unit 171 and the main control unit 161 is two-way. In addition, the medal count control board 17 supplies backup power to the main control board 16, and data stored in the RAM 161c of the main control board 16 is retained for the period when backup power is supplied even after a power outage.

The medal count control unit 171 also stores credits in a predetermined area of RAM 171c. Specifically, the credit count is stored in a credit counter. The medal count control unit 171 updates the credits stored in the predetermined area of RAM 171c during the credit addition process or credit subtraction process.

The set bet amount is stored in a specified area of RAM 161c. Specifically, the set bet amount is stored as a BET counter. When the value stored in the BET counter is "3", the game can begin. Hereinafter, the value stored in the BET counter may be simply referred to as the "bet amount."

As explained above, medalless slot machines that do not require medals are equipped with a medal count control board 17. Functions related to the insertion and payout of medals in conventional slot machines are concentrated on the medal count control board 17. Furthermore, while conventional slot machines that require medals must be equipped with devices related to the insertion and payout of medals, such as medal selectors and hoppers, medalless slot machines do not require such devices.

Furthermore, by configuring a medal-less slot machine as in this embodiment, it is possible to share parts with conventional slot machines. Specifically, because the credit update function (function related to medal insertion and payout) is concentrated in the medal count control board 17, a conventional slot machine can be configured by replacing the medal count control board 17 of the medal-less slot machine. When configuring a conventional slot machine, it is sufficient to provide the medal count control board 17 with functions related to medal insertion and payout, and then connect devices related to medal insertion and payout, such as a medal selector and hopper, to the medal count control board 17. This configuration ensures compatibility with conventional slot machines, and by sharing parts, it is possible to reduce costs in the design and manufacture of the slot machine.

When a detection signal is input from the start switch 7, the main control unit 161 drives the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R to rotate and performs a lottery to determine the winning combination.

The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game status, but can be broadly divided into special combinations that transition to a big bonus (BB) or regular bonus (RB), small combinations that result in the payout of medals, and replay combinations that allow you to start the next game without having to set a bet amount.

The main control unit 161 draws for winning combinations, drives the reels to spin, and then waits for the player to stop the reels. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, or 8R is operated, the main control unit 161 stops the rotation of the reel corresponding to that stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R. The main control unit 161 stops the three symbols and executes a win determination process to determine whether or not a win has occurred. If a win is determined to have occurred, the player is awarded a number of credits according to the type of win. A power-on switch 102 is connected to the power supply board 101, and a detection signal from the power-on switch 102 is input.

In this embodiment, a "game" refers to the period from when the start switch 7 is operated until reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stop. When playing a game, the bet amount is set before the start switch 7 is operated, and medals are paid out and the game state is changed after reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stop, so these incidental processes are also included in the "game" in a broad sense.

In addition, in this embodiment, operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is also referred to as the MAXBET operation, operation of the start switch 7 as the start operation, operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as the stop operation, operation of the count button 10 as the count operation, operation of the lend button 321 as the lending operation, and operation of the card return button 322 as the return operation.

The slot machine 2 is also configured so that the medal payout rate changes according to a set value. More specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in a lottery that affects the player's advantage, such as an internal lottery. The set value has six levels, from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate decreasing in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In other words, when the set value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage gradually decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

To change the setting value, the setting key switch 37 must be turned ON before the slot machine 2 is powered ON. When the setting key switch 37 is turned ON and the power is turned ON, the setting value read from RAM 161c is displayed on the setting value display 24, and the system transitions to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset/set switch 38. In the setting change state, when the reset/set switch 38 is operated, the displayed value on the setting value display 24 is updated by one (when operated again from setting value 6, it returns to setting value 1). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the displayed value is confirmed as the setting value. When the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in RAM 161c of the main control unit 161, and the system transitions to a state in which game play can proceed.

[state transition]
4 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state. As shown in FIG. 4, the states managed by the main control unit 161 include game states related to the payout rate.

Game play states include non-internal, internal, and BB. Internal is a state in which play can proceed and the medal payout rate is guaranteed based on a predetermined design value. Note that in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, players are expected to play most games in the internal state.

On the other hand, during the non-internal period, the player does not play, or if they do play, the time spent playing is extremely short. During the non-internal period, if a BB is won and the BB prize is missed, the game state will transition to the internal period from the next game. In other words, during the internal period, the BB win is carried over.

Whether inside or outside the internal area, a game in which BB can be won (hereinafter also referred to as a "BB win game") may be played. Specifically, during a non-internal area, if the BB symbol combination can be derived by operating stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in a game in which BB is won, BB will be won. In this case, the game state will be controlled to BB from the next game. In other words, during a non-internal area, a game in which BB is won will be a BB win game.

Inside the machine, the BB win is carried over. Here, if a BB and a small win are won simultaneously, the reels are controlled to prioritize the small win symbol combination. Furthermore, if the small win symbol is a symbol with no misses, in a game in which a BB and a small win are won simultaneously, the small win symbol will always win, regardless of the operation of stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a BB cannot win. Similarly, if a BB and a replay symbol are won simultaneously, the replay symbol combination is controlled to prioritize the replay symbol combination. Since a replay symbol is generally a symbol with no misses, in a game in which a BB and a replay symbol are won simultaneously, the replay symbol combination will always win, regardless of the operation of stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a BB cannot win. Therefore, during the internal game, if a BB symbol combination can be derived by operating stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R only in a game that results in a loss in the internal lottery (a game that does not result in any winning combination), the BB will be won. In this case, the game state will be controlled to BB from the next game onwards. In other words, during the internal game, a game that results in a loss in the internal lottery becomes a game in which the BB can be won.

During BB, the BB game is played for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 60G), but because the payout rate during BB is approximately 101%, the net increase in coins hardly increases at all. Therefore, to the player, BB is simply a state in which a predetermined number of games (e.g., 60G) are played. When BB ends, the game state transitions back to non-internal.

Internal states include normal zones and advantageous zones. Normal zones are states in which navigation is not executed and are non-announcement states in which navigation information cannot be announced. Advantageous zones are states in which navigation can be executed and are announcement states in which navigation information can be announced. In this embodiment, among the advantageous zones, navigation is not executed in the normal advantageous zone, but navigation can be executed in the high probability state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and ending state. Note that navigation may also be executed in the normal advantageous zone, but in the high probability state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and ending state, the probability of executing navigation to win the main role when the push order role is won is higher than in the normal advantageous zone. In this way, navigation is executed with a higher probability in the high probability state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and ending state than in the normal advantageous zone.

In the normal zone, when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won (advantageous zone win), the state is controlled to the advantageous zone. Note that in this embodiment, the condition for winning the advantageous zone is that most of the roles that can be won during normal play are won, so the normal play duration is approximately 1G. Note that the condition for winning the advantageous zone may also be met when any of the roles that can be won during normal play is won.

During the normal interval, navigation is not executed in games in which the push order role is won, so the net increase in coins a player can win per game will be 0 or a negative number, taking into account the number of medals used to set the bet amount. Note that the net increase in coins per game is the number of medals paid out per game minus the number of medals used to set the bet amount per game. In this embodiment, the normal payout rate is set to 40%. Thus, normally, the payout rate is 1 or less (100% or less) or less than 1 (less than 100%).

Advantageous zones include the normal advantageous zone, high probability state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and ending state. In the normal advantageous zone, navigation is not performed in games where the push order role is won, so the net increase in coins that a player can win per game will be 0 or negative, taking into account the number of medals used to set the bet amount. In this embodiment, the payout rate in the normal advantageous zone is set to 40%. Thus, in the normal advantageous zone, the payout rate will be 1 or less (100% or less) or less than 1 (less than 100%).

In this embodiment, the AT1 state ends when a predetermined number of games have been played. That is, as shown in the figure, a transition to the normal interval occurs. The predetermined number of games in the AT1 state can be increased by winning a specific symbol (e.g., watermelon, strong cherry). That is, in this embodiment, winning a specific symbol (watermelon, strong cherry) increases the player's advantage.

In the normal advantageous zone, processing such as lotteries related to control to the high-probability state and AT1 state is carried out. Furthermore, in the normal advantageous zone, the main control unit 161 conducts lotteries to enter the AT1 state through point acquisition lotteries. The points updated through the point acquisition lottery are managed by the main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 has an internal point counter (not shown) for counting points. Furthermore, when the value of the point counter reaches a specified value, the main control unit 161 conducts an AT lottery to determine whether or not to control to the AT1 state. Furthermore, the main control unit 161 may conduct an AT lottery based on the winning of a specific symbol (watermelon, strong cherry) without using points. The high-probability state is a state in which the number of points awarded is greater than in the normal advantageous zone. In other words, the high-probability state is a state in which it is easier to transition to the AT1 state than in the normal advantageous zone.

Control to the AT2 state can be performed when in the normal advantageous zone or high probability state. The AT2 state is a so-called pseudo-bonus that can increase the net increase in coins a player can win by following the navigation. A win that controls the player directly to the AT2 state from the normal advantageous zone or high probability state without going through the AT1 state is also called a "direct pseudo-bonus win." A win that controls the player from the AT1 state to the AT2 state is also called a "pseudo-bonus win." In a pseudo-bonus, navigation is performed in the game that wins the push order role, so the net increase in coins a player can win per game will be positive, even when taking into account the number of medals used to set the bet amount.

In the advantageous zone, control is exercised to the ending state when the number of medals acquired (difference), described below, reaches a predetermined number for transitioning to the ending. The number of medals acquired in the advantageous zone is the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used by the player from the number of medals awarded to the player through winning after control to the advantageous zone has begun. In this embodiment, the number of medals acquired is counted using a difference count value, which will be described in detail later. The ending state is a state in which it is determined that control to the advantageous zone will continue until, for example, the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous zone reaches an upper limit (for example, 2,400 medals).

The ending transition number is set when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone. The ending transition number may be determined by lottery or may be set in advance. The ending transition number is managed by the main control unit 161. That is, the RAM 161c of the main control unit 161 stores the ending transition number. The ending transition number is, for example, 2,300. That is, the main control unit 161 cumulatively counts the difference count value, and when the difference count value reaches the ending transition number in the counting process, the advantageous zone ends.

When the limiter condition is met in a favorable zone, control is transferred from that favorable zone to the normal zone. More specifically, when the number of medals acquired during the favorable zone reaches 2,400, the favorable zone ends and control is transferred to the normal zone. The number of medals acquired during the favorable zone is counted by a counter stored in RAM 161c. When the number of medals acquired during the favorable zone reaches the upper limit, this is referred to as the "limiter condition" being met.

In this way, the advantageous zone includes an ending state that is advantageous to the player, and the main control unit 161 controls the ending state when it determines that the number of medals acquired is greater than 2,300. This makes it easier to continue the advantageous zone when the number of medals acquired exceeds 2,300.

When control is shifted from the advantageous zone to the normal zone, the number of medals earned during the advantageous zone that was counted in the advantageous zone, as well as the points that can be earned during play, are also initialized. The number of medals earned during the advantageous zone is updated not only during the advantageous zone but also during BB, but is not updated in the normal zone.

The slot machine 2 of this embodiment changes the medal payout rate according to a setting value. More specifically, the medal payout rate changes by varying the probability of winning a predetermined lottery, such as a point acquisition lottery, according to the setting value (e.g., 1, 2, 4, 5, 6). Gaming store staff can change this setting value by modifying the setting.

In this way, the conditions for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone include limiter conditions and optional ending conditions that are met based on the progress of the game, as well as a condition where a setting change is made.

In addition, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, an upper limit on the number of games played in the normal advantageous zone is set. When the predetermined upper limit on the number of games played in the normal advantageous zone is reached, an AT right is granted to forcibly transition to the AT1 state regardless of the point reached. The upper limit on the number of games played in the normal advantageous zone is, for example, 1,280 games. This upper limit on the number of games played is referred to as the "ceiling." The main control unit 161 has a lottery counter in RAM 161c to determine whether the ceiling has been reached. That is, the main control unit 161 stores the number of games played in the normal advantageous zone in the lottery counter in RAM 161c. The main control unit 161 increments the value of the lottery counter each time a game is played in the normal advantageous zone. For example, if the upper limit on the number of games played in the normal advantageous zone is set to 700 games, the main control unit 161 grants an AT right when the value of the lottery counter reaches 700. The upper limit on the number of games played in the normal advantageous zone is not limited to 700 games and may be, for example, 1,280 games.

[Winning Role]
5 to 8 are diagrams for explaining the types of winning roles, the symbol combinations of winning roles, and the awarding of prizes when a prize is won. The name column in Fig. 5 to 8 shows the name of the winning role, and the symbol combination column shows the symbol combination that will result in the winning role. In addition, the award column shows the value awarded when a prize is won (number of medals paid out, award of replay, etc.).

As shown in Figure 5, Lip 1 to Lip 6 are provided as replay roles. As shown in Figure 6, BB is provided as a special role. As shown in Figures 6 to 8, Plums 1 to 6, Watermelon, and 1-coin roles 1 to 33 are provided as minor roles. Plums 1 to 6 are main roles that can be won when the push-order role is won, and when won, eight medals are paid out, which is more than the number of medals used in the bet (3 medals). Plums 1 to 6 are collectively referred to as "Plum roles." 1-coin roles 1 to 21 are secondary roles that can be won when the push-order role is won, and when won, one medal is paid out, which is less than the number of medals used in the bet (3 medals). 1-coin roles 1 to 33 are collectively referred to as "1-coin roles."

As shown in Figure 5, when "Character - Black 7 - Black 7" stops on payline L, which is one of the symbol combinations that results in a win for Lip 5, three 7 symbols are lined up on the reels. Specifically, 7 symbols are drawn on the top row of the left reel 2L, the middle row of the middle reel 2C, and the bottom row of the right reel 2R, resulting in a line of 7 symbols lined up downward to the right. Note that the line of 7 symbols is also referred to as a "7-line."

As shown in Figure 5, when "Replay-Black 7-Black 7," one of the symbol combinations that results in a Replay 4 win, stops on payline L, three character symbols are lined up on the reels. Specifically, character symbols are drawn on the top row of the left reel 2L, the top row of the middle reel 2C, and the top row of the right reel 2R, and character symbols are lined up on the top row. Note that the lined-up character symbols are also referred to as "character alignment."

[Role to be selected]
9 is a diagram for explaining the combinations of winning roles read out as lottery target roles for each game state. The role number column in FIG. 9 shows the role number determined for each lottery target role, the flag category column shows the flag category assigned to each type of lottery target role, the lottery target role column shows its name, the game state column shows with a circle that the lottery target role is a lottery target role for each game state, and the advantageous zone win column shows whether or not there is an advantageous zone win. Also, the winning role combination column in FIG. 9 shows the combinations of winning roles included in each lottery target role.

As shown in Figure 9, BB is provided as a special role that can be drawn. Roles that can be drawn for replay roles include normal lip, 7-match lip, 7-mismatch lip, character-match lip, and character-mismatch lip. Roles that can be drawn for minor roles include common plum, 213-choice roles A-D, 231-choice roles A-D, 312-choice roles A-D, 321-choice roles A-D, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, and chance eye A and B. Minor roles within BB include BB medium-small roles and BB medium 1. Note that 213-choice roles A-D, 231-choice roles A-D, 312-choice roles A-D, and 321-choice roles A-D are roles that can execute navigation when won, and are therefore types of push order roles. The 213-choice roles A-D, 231-choice roles A-D, 312-choice roles A-D, and 321-choice roles A-D are collectively referred to as "push order bells."

When not inside the reel, all possible winning combinations are BB small/medium and 1 BB medium. However, when inside the reel, the BB win has already been carried over, so BB, BB small/medium, and 1 BB medium cannot be won.

A common flag category is assigned to each role in non-internal, internal, and BB. Furthermore, while role numbers are determined for each role to be drawn, flag categories are assigned for each type of role to be drawn. Therefore, the number of flag categories is fewer than the number of role numbers. Furthermore, the point acquisition lottery in the normal advantageous zone and the bonus lottery in the advantageous zone (hereinafter collectively referred to as "lotteries related to AT control") are both conducted based on flag categories. Therefore, the processing burden can be reduced compared to conducting lotteries related to the control of these AT states based on role numbers.

In this embodiment, flag categories are also assigned to misses and BBs, with BBs being assigned FC1, the same as other roles such as regular replies. Furthermore, common plums are assigned FC4, the same as watermelons.

[Reel control of push order role]
10 is a diagram illustrating reel control when a push-order combination is won. As described above, in this embodiment, in a game in which a push-order combination is won in a favorable zone, navigation is executed and the player is notified of the correct procedure. The player can win a winning combination (main combination) advantageous to the player by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the correct procedure according to the navigation.

For example, as shown in Figure 10, in a game where one of the 213-choice roles A-D, 231-choice roles A-D, 312-choice roles A-D, and 321-choice roles A-D is won, the main role of the plum will be won if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the correct sequence, while the secondary role of one coin will be won if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the incorrect sequence. Note that if the secondary role of one coin is not won when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the incorrect sequence, no win may occur.

The "normal procedure (the procedure in which the left reel stops first)" is not set as the "correct procedure," while the "irregular procedure" can be set as the "correct procedure." In other words, in a game in which a player wins any of the 213-choice combinations A-D, 231-choice combinations A-D, 312-choice combinations A-D, and 321-choice combinations A-D, as long as the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the normal procedure, the player will not be able to win the main plum combination. This could encourage players to operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the irregular procedure, but in this embodiment, operating the stop switches in the irregular procedure in a game in which navigation is not implemented imposes a disadvantageous penalty on the player. Therefore, players are encouraged to operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the normal procedure in games in which navigation is not implemented.

Figure 11 shows the game start commands that the main control unit 161 sends to the presentation control unit 151 when the start switch 7 is operated. When the start switch 7 is operated (start operation), the main control unit 161 executes an internal lottery process and, depending on the results of the internal lottery process, sends a group of commands containing predetermined information to the presentation control unit 151. Hereinafter, the group of commands No. 1 to No. 13 shown in Figure 11 will be referred to simply as "game start commands." The main control unit 161 sends each command in the order of No. 1 to No. 13 as a game start command. Each command is assigned a serial number, the same as the number, as a "setting serial number." Each command stores various information managed by the main control unit 161.

For example, command No. 2 "Instruction Number" stores information related to navigation. That is, command No. 2 stores information that can identify the order in which to press buttons in a game in which the start switch 7 is operated. Specifically, command "Instruction Number" stores information indicating the order in which to press stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. When command No. 2 "Instruction Number" is received, the performance control unit 151 executes a navigation performance on the LCD display 51 based on the operating procedure that can be identified from the command "Instruction Number." Furthermore, based on the operating procedure that can be identified from the command "Instruction Number," the performance control unit 151 causes the speaker 53 to output a sound that notifies the player of the operating procedure.

For example, the No. 3 command "Small Role Type" stores information that can identify whether the role won by the internal lottery is a small role, a replay role, or a special role. Furthermore, the No. 6 command "Interval Status" stores information that can identify which of the internal states shown in FIG. 4 the game in which the start switch 7 was operated is in. Specifically, the No. 6 command "Interval Status" stores information indicating whether the currently controlled state is a normal interval or an advantageous interval, and further, within the advantageous interval, whether it is a normal advantageous interval, a high probability state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, or an ending state. Based on receiving the No. 6 command "Interval Status," the performance control unit 151 can identify which interval state the game in which the start switch 7 was operated is in. Furthermore, the No. 4 command "Ball Out Status" can also store information that can identify the game state of the game in which the start switch 7 was operated. Command No. 9, "ART Premonition G Count," stores the number of games in the AT continuous effect. Command No. 10, "Points," in the game start commands, stores the number of points earned in the previous game. Additionally, command No. 11, "Winning Number," stores information that can identify the winning combination number of the winning combination selected by internal lottery.

In addition, when the main control unit 161 sends a game start command, it stores information indicating that medals have been bet in command No. 12, "Insert medals." If information indicating that medals have been bet is stored in command No. 12, "Insert medals," the performance control unit 151 can determine that a game start command has been received.

Figure 12 shows the game end commands sent by the main control unit 161 to the presentation control unit 151 at the third stop. The main control unit 161 sends commands No. 1 to No. 13 to the presentation control unit 151 in the order of No. 1 to No. 13 not only when the start switch 7 is operated, but also at the third stop of the stop switch. Hereinafter, the command group No. 1 to No. 13 shown in Figure 12 will be simply referred to as the "game end commands." Note that, among the commands sent at the third stop, command No. 11 differs from command No. 11 sent when the start switch 7 is operated. No. 11 is a command that stores information related to winning. In other words, at the third stop, the main control unit 161 sends information related to winning, not information related to the winning number.

Command No. 10 "Points" in the end-of-game command stores the number of points earned in the point-earning lottery process at the third stop, which will be described later. Furthermore, when the main control unit 161 sends an end-of-game command, it stores information indicating that the reels have stopped in command No. 13 "Stop Reels." If information indicating that the reels have stopped is stored in command No. 13 "Stop Reels," the presentation control unit 151 can determine that an end-of-game command has been received. That is, the presentation control unit 151 determines whether the received command group is a start-of-game command or an end-of-game command based on command No. 12 "Insert Medal" and command No. 13 "Stop Reels." When sending a start-of-game command, the main control unit 161 does not need to send command No. 13 "Stop Reels," and when sending an end-of-game command, it does not need to send command No. 12 "Insert Medal."

[Transmission and reception between the main control board and the medal count control board]
The following describes the manner of transmission and reception between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. In this embodiment, communication is performed by commands between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. The main control board 16 transmits a predetermined command to the medal count control board 17 every time an event occurs. Events include when the start switch 7 is pressed, when the 1 BET switch 20 or the MAX BET switch 6 is pressed, when all reels have stopped, etc.

If the specified command sent from the main control board 16 is a command that requires a predetermined response, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command to the main control board 16. For example, when the slot machine 2 is installed in an amusement facility and electrically connected, and the power is turned on, the main control board 16 sends a gaming machine installation information command including the main chip ID (main control chip ID) to the medal count control board 17. When the power is turned on thereafter, the main control board 16 also sends gaming machine installation information including the main chip ID (main control chip ID) to the medal count control board 17. In other words, when the slot machine 2 is powered on, the main control board 16 sends a gaming machine installation information command to the medal count control board 17 that can identify the main chip ID, which is unique information held by the main control board 16.

Both the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 assign a "serial number" to the command before transmitting it. Furthermore, both the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 store the received "serial number." By assigning a "serial number" to the command, the slot machine 2 prevents a person attempting to fraudulently obtain medals (hereinafter referred to as a fraudulent person) from tampering with the slot machine 2. An tampering operation refers, for example, to an operation in which the commands sent and received between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 are altered, or an operation in which a fraudulent person controls the main control board 16 or the medal count control board 17. A fraudulent person performs tampering, for example, by connecting a device that performs tampering (hereinafter referred to as a fraudulent device) to the main control board 16 or the medal count control board 17.

The initial value and additional value for the "serial number" are determined by the medal count control board 17 and the main control board 16, respectively. The medal count control board 17 determines the initial value and additional value for the "serial number" based on the gaming machine installation information command received from the main control board 16. The main chip ID included in the gaming machine installation information command includes a 4-byte chip-specific number register. Each byte of the main chip ID stores a hexadecimal value specific to the chip. The medal count control board 17 calculates the total value by adding the hexadecimal values stored in each byte of the main chip ID. The medal count control board 17 converts the value indicated by the lowest 2 bytes of the calculated total value into a decimal number and determines this value as the initial value for the "serial number."

For example, if the total value is "189h" (the "h" indicates that "189" is a hexadecimal number), the initial value for the serial number will be the decimal equivalent of "89h". In other words, the initial value for the "serial number" will be "137".

Furthermore, the medal count control board 17 divides the initial value by a predetermined number. If the predetermined number is, for example, "5," the remainder calculated as a result of the division will be one of four types: "0," "1," "2," "3," and "4." The medal count control board 17 predetermines and stores additional values corresponding to the four remainders. For example, the medal count control board 17 stores "7" corresponding to "0," "11" corresponding to "1," "13" corresponding to "2," "19" corresponding to "3," and "23" corresponding to "4." After dividing the initial value by the predetermined number, the medal count control board 17 sets the value stored corresponding to the remainder resulting from the division as the additional value.

As an example, when the initial value "137" is divided by 5, the remainder is "2." As described above, the medal count control board 17 stores "13" in correspondence with the remainder "2" of the division. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 determines the additional value for the serial number as "13." In this way, based on the main chip ID identified from the gaming machine installation information command, the medal count control board 17 generates the initial value and additional value for the serial number used to determine whether the command sent from the main control board 16 is normal. The main control board 16 also performs similar calculations to generate the initial value and additional value. As a result, the same initial value and additional value are stored in both the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17.

As described above, in this embodiment, the occurrence of an event causes the main control board 16 to send a specified command to the medal count control board 17. The main control board 16 assigns a serial number to the specified command. For example, we will explain an example in which a gaming machine installation information command is sent to the medal count control board 17, and after both the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 have determined the initial value and additional value for the serial number, a specified event A occurs.

When a predetermined event A occurs, the main control board 16 sends command A to the medal count control board 17. At this time, the main control board 16 assigns an initial serial number to command A, which is sent for the first time after sending the gaming machine installation command. In other words, the main control board 16 assigns the serial number "137" to command A and sends it.

The medal count control board 17 stores "137" as its initial value, and since the serial number assigned to Command A, which is received for the first time after receiving the gaming machine installation command, is "137," it determines that communication is normal.

Next, when a new event B occurs, the main control board 16 sends command B to the medal count control board 17. At this time, the main control board 16 sends command B with a value obtained by adding an additional value to the previously sent serial number. In other words, the main control board 16 sends command B with the value "150", which is the previously sent value "137" plus the additional value "13". Before receiving command B, the medal count control board 17 calculates in advance that the serial number to be assigned to the next command to be sent will be "150". The medal count control board 17 determines that communication with the main control board 16 is normal because the serial number assigned to the received command B is "150", which matches the previously calculated serial number.

In other words, each time the main control board 16 sends a command, it assigns a serial number equal to the value of the previously sent serial number plus an additional value. The medal count control board 17 also stores the initial value and the additional value, so it can calculate in advance the value of the serial number to be assigned to the next command it receives, and can determine whether the serial number is normal each time it receives a command. If the serial number assigned to the received command does not match the calculated serial number value, the medal count control board 17 determines that a communication abnormality has occurred between the main control board 16 and medal count control board 17.

If the value obtained by adding the additional value to the previously transmitted serial number exceeds 255, the main control board 16 will subtract 255 and transmit the resulting serial number. If the main control board 16 receives a response command from the medal count control board 17 indicating that an error has occurred, it will not add the additional value to the serial number of the command to be transmitted after the response command, but will instead assign the same serial number again and transmit it.

[Commands sent from the main control board to the medal count control board]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the types of commands that the main control board 16 transmits to the medal count control board 17. In this embodiment, as shown in the command name column in FIG. 13, the main control board 16 transmits to the medal count control board 17 a gaming machine installation information command, a role information command, a favorable zone information command, a deposit command, a settlement command, an end command, a start command, a payout pulse command, a jackpot command, a gaming machine fraud 1 command, a gaming machine fraud 2 command, a gaming machine fraud 3 command, a main control status command, a main control board error command, and a gaming machine performance information (spare) command. The number column also shows the command number preset for each command. The message length column also shows the message length, i.e., the byte length, of each command.

The Bidirectional column indicates whether or not the medal count control board 17 needs to send a response command after the main control board 16 sends a command. For example, when the medal count control board 17 receives a start command from the main control board 16, it does not send a response command in response to that start command. In other words, the main control board 16 controls the reel drums, etc., without waiting to receive a response command from the medal count control board 17.

On the other hand, when the medal count control board 17 receives a deposit command, settlement command, or end command from the main control board 16, it transmits a response command to the main control board 16 in response to receiving these commands. The deposit command, settlement command, and end command are commands that directly affect the number of credits managed by the medal count control board 17. Therefore, after transmitting the deposit command, settlement command, or end command, the main control board 16 performs the next control operation on the condition that it has received a response command from the medal count control board 17. Below, we will explain the commands transmitted from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 using Figures 14 to 35.

Figure 14 is a diagram explaining the gaming machine installation information command. As shown in Figure 14, the gaming machine installation information command is a 22-byte command. The first byte stores the message length of the gaming machine installation information command. The second byte transmits the serial number. Since the gaming machine installation information command is transmitted after power-on and before the medal count control board 17 determines the initial value and additional value of the serial number, the serial number is fixed to the value "0." Bytes 3 to 6 store values indicating the command number, gaming machine characteristics, gaming machine type, and identification code, respectively. Bytes 7 to 10 store the values of bytes 1 to 4 of the unique number register of the main chip ID. The medal count control board 17 determines the initial value and additional value of the serial number using the main chip ID values in bytes 7 to 10.

Bytes 11 to 13 store the manufacturer code. Bytes 14 to 21 store the product code. Byte 22 stores a checksum to determine whether there was an error in the information sent in bytes 1 to 21.

Figure 15 shows details of the gaming machine characteristics. Below, we will explain the details of the gaming machine characteristics indicated in the fourth byte of the gaming installation information command. The gaming machine characteristics are one byte of data from bit 0 to bit 7. Bit 0 indicates whether the slot machine 2 is equipped with an RB (regular bonus). If the slot machine 2 is equipped with an RB, bit 0 will be "1", and if the slot machine 2 is not equipped with an RB, bit 0 will be "0".

The first bit indicates whether the slot machine 2 is equipped with a BB (Big Bonus). If the slot machine 2 is equipped with a BB, the first bit is "1", and if the slot machine 2 is not equipped with a BB, the first bit is "0". The second bit indicates whether the slot machine 2 is equipped with a CT (Challenge Time). If the slot machine 2 is equipped with a CT, the second bit is "1", and if the slot machine 2 is not equipped with a CT, the second bit is "0". The third bit indicates whether the slot machine 2 is equipped with a CB (Challenge Bonus). If the slot machine 2 is equipped with a CB, the third bit is "1", and if the slot machine 2 is not equipped with a CB, the third bit is "0".

The fourth bit indicates whether the slot machine 2 is equipped with an SB (single bonus). If the slot machine 2 is equipped with an SB, the fourth bit is "1", and if the slot machine 2 is not equipped with an SB, the fourth bit is "0". The fifth bit indicates whether the slot machine 2 is equipped with an instruction function. If the slot machine 2 is equipped with an instruction function, the fifth bit is "1", and if the slot machine 2 is not equipped with an instruction function, the fifth bit is "0". The sixth bit indicates the instruction type of the slot machine 2. If the instruction type of the slot machine 2 is a 7P type, the sixth bit is "1", and if the instruction type of the slot machine 2 is a 7U type, the sixth bit is "0". The seventh bit is unused and stores "0".

Figure 16 shows the structure of a reel information command. The reel information command is a command that the medal count control board 17 uses to update gaming machine performance information and reel ratio monitor information. The reel information command is sent to the medal count control board 17 after the end command has been sent.

The reel information command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the reel information command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number for the reel information command is "1".

Byte 4 stores reel operation information. This information stores information indicating whether or not a bonus has currently been won. Byte 5 stores a checksum used to determine whether or not there was an error in the information sent in bytes 1 through 4.

Figure 17 shows details of the reel operation information. The reel operation information is data stored in the fourth byte of the reel information command. The reel operation information consists of one byte of data from bit 0 to bit 7. Bit 0 stores "Type 1" information, which indicates whether RB is in operation. Bit 1 stores "Type 1 consecutive" information, which indicates whether BB is in operation. Bit 2 stores "Type 2" information, which indicates whether CT is in operation. Bit 3 stores "Type 2 consecutive" information, which indicates whether CB is in operation. Bit 5 stores "Normal reel" information, which indicates whether SB is in operation. Bits 4, 6, and 7 are unused and store "0."

Figure 18 shows the structure of the advantageous zone information command. The advantageous zone information command is a command that the medal count control board 17 uses to update gaming machine performance information and role ratio monitor information. The advantageous zone information command is sent after the end command is sent.

The advantageous zone information command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the reel information command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number for the advantageous zone information command is "2".

Byte 4 stores advantageous zone information. This advantageous zone information is used to transmit data regarding replays and instruction information within the advantageous zone. Byte 5 stores a checksum to determine whether there was an error in the information transmitted in bytes 1 through 4.

Figure 19 shows details of advantageous zone information. Advantageous zone information is data stored in the fourth byte of the advantageous zone information command, and is data that indicates information about the game that was played before the advantageous zone information command was sent.

The advantageous zone information consists of one byte of data from bit 0 to bit 7. Bit 0 stores information indicating whether the game played before the advantageous zone information command was sent was in an advantageous zone. If it was in an advantageous zone, bit 0 stores "1". Bit 1 stores information indicating whether instruction information was present in the game played before the advantageous zone information command was sent. If instruction information was present, bit 1 stores "1". Bit 4 stores information indicating whether a replay symbol combination was displayed in the game played before the advantageous zone information command was sent. If a replay symbol combination was displayed, bit 4 stores "1". Bits 2, 3, 5, 6, and 7 are not used and store "0".

Figure 20 is a diagram showing the structure of a deposit command. The deposit command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when the 1 bet switch 20 is pressed or the max bet switch 6 is pressed. That is, the main control board 16 sends the deposit command to the medal count control board 17 when it receives a bet number setting operation to set the bet number for starting a game. Also, referring to Figure 13, since the deposit command is a bidirectional command, when the medal count control board 17 receives the deposit command, it sends a response command in response to the deposit command to the main control board 16. The deposit command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the deposit command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number of the deposit command is "3".

The fourth byte stores the number of inserted medals. If the 1BET switch 20 is pressed when the bet number is 0, 1, or 2, the number of inserted medals will be 1. If the MAXBET switch 6 is pressed when the bet number is 0, the number of inserted medals will be 3. If the MAXBET switch 6 is pressed when the bet number is 1, the number of inserted medals will be 2. If the MAXBET switch 6 is pressed when the bet number is 2, the number of inserted medals will be 1. When the 1BET switch 20 or the MAXBET switch 6 is pressed and an insertion command is sent during the replay activation state, no data is stored in the number of inserted medals. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether an error occurred in the information sent in bytes 1 through 4. The "replay activation state" refers to the state after a replay winning combination has been achieved.

Figure 21 shows the structure of a settlement command. The settlement command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when the bet clear switch 21 is pressed. That is, the main control board 16 sends the settlement command to the medal count control board 17 when it receives a settlement operation to cancel the bet for starting a game. Also, referring to Figure 13, since the settlement command is a bidirectional command, when the medal count control board 17 receives the settlement command, it sends a response command in response to the settlement command to the main control board 16. The settlement command consists of five bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the settlement command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number of the settlement command is "4".

The fourth byte stores the number of medals to be paid. If the bet clear switch 21 is pressed when the number of medals bet is one, the number of medals to be paid will be one; if the bet clear switch 21 is pressed when the number of medals bet is two, the number of medals to be paid will be two; and if the bet clear switch 21 is pressed when the number of medals bet is three, the number of medals to be paid will be three. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether there was an error in the information sent in bytes 1 through 4.

Figure 22 shows the structure of a start command. The start command is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when the start switch 7 is pressed. That is, the main control board 16 transmits the start command to the medal count control board 17 when starting a game. The start command is transmitted even when the start switch 7 is pressed during replay operation. The start command is a command that does not directly affect the number of credits managed by the medal count control board 17. Therefore, when the medal count control board 17 receives a start command, it does not transmit a response command to the main control board 16 in response to the start command, but instead performs control in accordance with the start command. Examples of control in accordance with the start command include control processing to wait for the game to end and preparation processing for receiving an end command. After transmitting the start command, the main control board 16 performs the next control without waiting for a response from the medal count control board 17. The next control processing may include control for driving the reels.

The start command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the start command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number of the start command is "6".

Byte 4 stores the number of input pulses (1-3) to be sent to the hall computer. Even when replay is active, the specified number of input pulses is sent. Byte 5 stores a checksum to determine whether there was an error in the information sent in bytes 1-4.

Figure 23 shows the structure of an end command. The end command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when all reels have stopped, i.e., when the third stop occurs. In other words, the main control board 16 sends an end command to the medal count control board 17 when a game ends. The end command includes the number of medals to be paid out, which is determined according to the combination of symbols derived. When medals are paid out to a player, the number of credits increases. Therefore, the end command is a command that directly affects the number of credits managed by the medal count control board 17. Therefore, when the medal count control board 17 receives an end command, it sends a response command to the main control board 16. Furthermore, after sending the end command, the main control board 16 performs the next control operation, provided that it has received the response command. The next control operation corresponds to, for example, updating the data displayed on the game assist display device 12.

In other words, when the medal count control board 17 receives an end command, it sends a response command in response to the end command to the main control board 16 and performs control in accordance with the end command. Control in accordance with the end command is, for example, control to add the number of medals paid out to the number of credits.

The termination command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the termination command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number of the termination command is "5".

The fourth byte stores the number of medals paid out. The maximum number of medals paid out is 15. If a replay symbol combination is derived, or if there are no medals paid out, a "0" is stored in the fourth byte. In other words, the end command is a command that can specify the game value awarded to a player based on the outcome of a game when that game ends. The fifth byte stores a checksum used to determine whether or not there was an error in the information sent in bytes 1 through 4.

Figure 24 shows the structure of a payout pulse command. The payout pulse command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when all reels have stopped, i.e., when the third stop occurs. The payout pulse command is a pulse signal used to transmit the number of medals awarded to a player in response to a win to a hall computer (not shown) connected to the medal count control board 17. After receiving the payout pulse command, the medal count control board 17 sends a payout pulse signal to the hall computer (not shown). This allows the hall computer to store the number of medals paid out in the slot machine 2. The payout pulse command is sent to the medal count control board 17 even when the slot machine is in a replay operation state. After sending the payout pulse command, the main control board 16 performs the next control operation without waiting for a response from the medal count control board 17.

The dispensing pulse command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the dispensing pulse command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number for the dispensing pulse command is "7".

The fourth byte stores the number of payout pulses to be sent to the hall computer. The maximum number of payout pulses is 15. If a replay symbol combination is derived, or if there are no payout medals, a "0" is stored in the fourth byte. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether there was an error in the information sent in bytes 1 through 4.

Figure 25 shows the configuration of a jackpot command. The jackpot command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 at the start and end of a jackpot. The jackpot command is also sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when the power is turned on during a hot start. This allows the slot machine 2 to restore the hall computer signal without having to back it up.

The jackpot command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the jackpot command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number for the jackpot command is "8."

The fourth byte stores the hall computer signal. The hall computer signal is a signal used to notify the hall computer of jackpot information for the slot machine 2. The jackpot type, such as RB, BB, or AT, is stored. The fifth byte stores a checksum used to determine whether there was an error in the information sent in bytes 1 through 4.

Figure 26 shows details of the hall computer signal. The hall computer signal is data stored in the fourth byte of the jackpot command. The hall computer signal consists of one byte of data from bit 0 to bit 7. Bit 0 stores information indicating that the jackpot type is RB. Bit 1 stores information indicating that the jackpot type is BB. Bit 2 stores information indicating that the jackpot type is AT. Bits 3 to 7 are unused and store "0".

Figure 27 shows the structure of the gaming machine fraud 1 command. The gaming machine fraud 1 command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 at the start and end of setting changes and setting confirmations.

The gaming machine fraud 1 command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the gaming machine fraud 1 command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number for the gaming machine fraud 1 command is "9."

The fourth byte contains setting information. This setting information includes information on when settings are changed or confirmed, and information indicating whether any fraud was detected during that process. The fifth byte contains a checksum used to determine whether any errors were present in the information sent in bytes 1 through 4.

Figure 28 shows details of the setting information. The setting information is data stored in the fourth byte of the gaming machine fraud 1 command. The setting information consists of one byte of data from bits 0 to 7. Bit 0 stores data indicating whether a setting change is in progress. Bit 1 stores data indicating whether a setting check is in progress. Bits 2 to 4 store data indicating whether a manufacturer-defined fraud has been detected. Bits 6 and 7 are unused and store "0".

Figure 29 shows the structure of the Gaming Machine Illegal Action 2 command. The Gaming Machine Illegal Action 2 command is an unused command in the slot machine 2. In the slot machine 2, the door open detection switch 25 is connected to the medal count control board 17. Therefore, the main control board 16 does not need to send door information to the medal count control board 17. Therefore, a "0" is stored in the fourth byte.

Figure 30 shows details of the door information. Because the medal count control board 17 detects whether the door is open or closed, all bits contained in the door information are unused and "0" is stored.

Figure 31 shows the structure of the Gaming Machine Illegal 3 command. The Gaming Machine Illegal 3 command is an unused command in the slot machine 2. The Gaming Machine Illegal 3 command is an expansion command that will be used in the future if a new command needs to be sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17.

Figure 32 shows the structure of a main control status command. A main control status command is a command that indicates the status of the main control board 16. The main control status command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 at a predetermined timing. By receiving the main control status command, the medal count control board 17 can obtain the status of the main control board 16 or the slot machine 2.

The main control status command consists of five bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the main control status command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number for the main control status command is "12". The fourth byte stores the gaming machine status signal. The fifth byte stores a checksum used to determine whether there was an error in the information sent in bytes 1 through 4.

Figure 33 shows the structure of the main control board error command. The main control board error command is a command that indicates the type of error that has occurred on the main control board 16. The main control board error command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when an error occurs on the main control board 16 and when the error that has occurred is resolved.

The main control board error command consists of five bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the main control status command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number for the main control board error command is "13". The fourth byte stores the error number. The error number is a number that indicates the type of error that has occurred on the main control board 16. The fifth byte stores a checksum used to determine whether or not an error has occurred in the information sent in bytes 1 through 4.

Figure 34 shows a list of main control board errors. The error numbers shown in Figure 34 are stored in the fourth byte of the main control board error command. E6 is an error number indicating a reel rotation error. The main control board 16 determines that a reel rotation error has occurred if it is unable to detect input from the origin sensor three times in a row. When a reel rotation error occurs, the main control board 16 sends the fourth byte of the main control board error command with the value "E6". The main control board 16 determines that the error has been resolved when an error release switch (not shown) is pressed. Even when the error has been resolved, the main control board 16 sends a main control board error command.

E7 is an error number indicating a medal count overflow error. The main control board 16 determines that a medal count overflow error has occurred when the medal count exceeds 16,383. When a medal count overflow error occurs, the main control board 16 sends the fourth byte of the main control board error command with "E7" as the value. The main control board 16 determines that the error has been resolved when an error release switch (not shown) is pressed. Even when the error has been resolved, the main control board 16 sends the main control board error command.

E8 is an error number indicating a backup error. When the main control board 16 checks the RAM after power is turned on and finds that the value does not match the RAM value backed up before the power was cut off, it determines that a backup error has occurred. When a backup error occurs, the main control board 16 sends the fourth byte of the main control board error command with "E8" as the value. The main control board 16 determines that the error has been resolved when the slot machine 2 is powered off and the settings are changed again. Even when the error has been resolved, the main control board 16 sends the main control board error command.

E9 is an error number indicating a communication abnormality error. If the main control board 16 does not receive a response command before 40 ms has elapsed since sending a command requiring a response command to the medal count control board 17, it determines that a communication abnormality error has occurred. When a communication abnormality error occurs, the main control board 16 sends the fourth byte of the main control board error command with the value "E9". When the error release switch (not shown) is pressed, the main control board 16 determines that the error has been resolved. Even when the error has been resolved, the main control board 16 sends a main control board error command.

Figure 35 shows the structure of the gaming machine performance information (preliminary) command. Gaming machine performance information is information intended to aggregate performance information. Gaming machine performance information outputs results calculated based on gameplay.

The gaming machine performance information (preliminary) command consists of 28 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the gaming machine performance information (preliminary) command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in FIG. 13, the command number for the gaming machine performance information (preliminary) command is "14." Gaming machine performance information may be stored in bytes 4 through 27. In this embodiment, "0" is stored in this preliminary area. The 28th byte stores a checksum used to determine whether an error occurred in the information sent in bytes 1 through 27.

Figure 36 shows a list of commands sent from the medal count control board 17 to the main control board 16. The medal count control board 17 sends two types of commands to the main control board 16.

A response command is a command used to respond to a command received from the main control board 16. For example, when the medal count control board 17 receives an end command, it sends a response command because that end command affects the number of credits. In other words, a response command is a bidirectional command, responding in response to its reception. A command number between 3 and 5 can be set for the response command. The message length of a response command is 4 bytes.

The frame side information command is a command that transmits system information, including connection information between the medal count control board 17 and CU3. The medal count control board 17 transmits a frame side information command to the main control board 16 every 0.3 seconds. The specified period for transmitting the frame side information command does not have to be 0.3 seconds, and may be another period. The main control board 16 does not respond even when it receives a frame side information command. Therefore, the frame side information command is a command that is continuously transmitted unidirectionally from the medal count control board 17 to the main control board 16, and is not bidirectional. The command number for the frame side information command is "81h", and the message length is 4 bytes.

Figure 37 is a diagram showing the structure of a response command. A response command consists of 4 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the response command. The second byte stores a value indicating the command number. The command number in the response command stores the command number of the received command to which the response is made. When sending a response command in response to an input command, the medal count control board 17 stores "3" as the command number. When sending a response command in response to a settlement command, the medal count control board 17 stores "4" as the command number. When sending a response command in response to an end command, the medal count control board 17 stores "5" as the command number.

The third byte contains information indicating the result of the response command reception. The third byte contains a data area of one to four bits. If the zeroth bit in the data area of the third byte is "1," the response command indicates "reception OK." "Reception OK" indicates that the received command received by the medal count control board 17 was normal. Below, a response command in which the zeroth bit in the data area of the third byte is "1" may be referred to as a "response command indicating reception OK." In other words, a response command is a command that notifies the main control board 16 that the received command was normal. A received command is a command sent from the main control board 16 that is the target of the response command. If the first bit in the data area of the third byte is "1," the response command indicates "serial number mismatch." "Serial number mismatch" indicates that the received command received by the medal count control board 17 is abnormal. Below, a response command in which the first bit in the data area of the third byte is "1" may be referred to as a "response command indicating serial number mismatch." In other words, the response command indicates that the serial number of the received command that was the subject of the response did not match the serial number calculated by the medal count control board 17.

If the second bit in the third byte data area is "1", the response command indicates "insufficient number of gaming medals". If the medal count control board 17 receives an insertion command as a received command and is requested to subtract credits, but the number of credits is insufficient, a response command with "1" stored in the second bit is sent.

If the third bit in the data area of the third byte is "1", the response command indicates a "game medal count overflow". If the medal count control board 17 receives a settlement command as a received command and the number of credits (game medal count) is at the upper limit, a response command with a "1" stored in the third bit is sent. The fourth byte stores a checksum to determine whether there was an error in the information sent in bytes 1 through 3.

Figure 38 shows the structure of a frame-side information command. As mentioned above, the frame-side information command is sent from the medal count control board 17 to the main control board 16 every 0.3 seconds.

The frame side information command consists of four bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the frame side information command. The second byte stores the command number. The command number for the frame side information command is "81h". The third byte stores information indicating the system status of the medal count control board 17. The system status of the medal count control board 17 includes information on whether the count button has been pressed and whether the CU3 and medal count control board 17 are connected properly. The fourth byte stores a checksum used to determine whether there was an error in the information sent in bytes 1 to 3.

[Communication between the main control board and the medal count control board]
Figure 39 is a diagram showing an example of communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. Serial communication is used for communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. As shown in Figure 39, the main control board 16 transmits an input command when a bet number setting operation is performed. The bet number setting operation includes pressing the 1BET switch 20 or the MAXBET switch 6.

When the medal count control board 17 receives a command from the main control board 16, it uses a counter to measure the elapsed time. If reception of the command is not completed within 10 ms from the time the command is received from the main control board 16, the medal count control board 17 determines that a timeout error has occurred in communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. In the example of Figure 39, the medal count control board 17 completes reception of the insertion command before 10 ms has elapsed since its reception, so no timeout error occurs.

In response to receiving the insertion command, the medal count control board 17 transmits a response command. When the main control board 16 receives a command from the medal count control board 17, it measures the elapsed time using a counter. If reception of the command is not completed within 2.24 ms from the time the command is received from the medal count control board 17, the main control board 16 determines that a timeout error has occurred in communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. In the example of Figure 39, reception of the response command is completed before 2.24 ms has elapsed since reception by the main control board 16, so a timeout error does not occur.

In addition, when the main control board 16 transmits a command that requires a response command from the medal count control board 17, such as a deposit command, it uses a counter to measure the elapsed time from the bet number setting operation that triggered the transmission of the deposit command.

If the reception of a response command from the medal count control board 17 is not completed within 40 ms from the occurrence of an event such as a bet number setting operation, the main control board 16 determines that a timeout error has occurred in communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. In the example of Figure 39, the reception of the response command is completed before 40 ms has elapsed since the bet number setting operation was performed, so a timeout error does not occur.

After receiving the response command to the input command, the main control board 16 begins control corresponding to the bet amount setting operation.

Next, the start switch 7 of the slot machine 2 is pressed by the player. In response to the start switch 7 being pressed, the main control board 16 sends a start command to the medal count control board 17. As mentioned above, the start command is a command that does not require a response command from the medal count control board 17. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 does not send a response command.

Finally, when the player performs the third stop operation, all reels stop. Based on the fact that all reels have stopped, the main control board 16 sends an end command to the medal count control board 17. In this example, even though the end command requires a response command, the medal count control board 17 does not send the response command. Therefore, the main control board 16 does not receive a response command until 40 ms has elapsed since all reels had stopped, and determines that a timeout error has occurred.

Figure 40 is a diagram explaining the communication of frame side information commands. As shown in Figure 40, the medal count control board 17 sends a frame side information command to the main control board 16 every 300 ms. If more than 2.24 ms elapses between the start of reception of the frame side information command and the completion of reception, the main control board 16 determines that a timeout error has occurred.

Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the processing performed when the main control board 16 receives a command. As shown in Figure 36, the medal count control board 17 sends two types of commands to the main control board 16: a response command or a frame-side information command.

Referring to FIG. 41, the main control board 16 receives a command from the medal count control board 17 (S10). The main control board 16 determines whether the received command is a frame side information command (S11). If the received command is a frame side information command (YES in S11), the main control board 16 checks whether the frame side information command contains error information (S12). This error information indicates whether the CU 3 is properly connected to the slot machine 2. If the frame side information command contains error information (YES in S12), the main control board 16 sends the error information to the performance control board 15 and terminates processing. This enables the performance control board 15 to display on the LCD display 51 that an error has occurred, indicating that the CU 3 is not connected to the slot machine 2. If the frame side information command does not contain error information (NO in S12), processing terminates.

If the received command is not a frame-side information command (NO in S11), that is, if the received command is a response command, the main control board 16 executes processing according to the response command and terminates processing.

Figure 42 shows the flow of communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 from power-on. When the power-on switch 102 is pressed and power is applied to the main control board 16, the main control board 16 transmits a gaming machine installation information command. Thereafter, when the bet number setting operation is performed, the main control board 16 transmits a deposit command. Since the deposit command requires a response command, the medal count control board 17 transmits a response command to the main control board 16 upon receiving the deposit command. For example, if there are sufficient medals in play, the medal count control board 17 sets bit 0 of the third byte of the response command to "1" (received OK); if the serial numbers do not match, the medal count control board 17 sets bit 1 of the third byte of the response command to "1" (serial number mismatch); and if there are insufficient medals, the medal count control board 17 sets bit 2 of the third byte of the response command to "1" (insufficient medals).

Then, the main control board 16 sends a settlement command to the medal count control board 17 based on the settlement operation being performed. The settlement operation is an operation indicating that the bet number clear switch 21 has been pressed. This executes a process to return the bet number to the number of credits. Since the settlement command requires a response command, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command to the main control board 16 based on receiving the settlement command. For example, if there is a surplus of gaming medals, the medal count control board 17 sets bit 0 of the third byte of the response command to "1" (received OK); if the serial numbers do not match, the medal count control board 17 sets bit 1 of the third byte of the response command to "1" (serial number mismatch); and if the number of gaming medals overflows, the medal count control board 17 sets bit 3 of the third byte of the response command to "1" (game medal number overflow).

In Figure 42, the bet number setting operation is performed again, and communication is performed based on this bet number setting operation. Next, when the start switch 7 is pressed, the main control board 16 sends a start command to the medal count control board 17. After sending the start command, the main control board 16 performs control to progress the game, such as controlling the reels, without waiting for a response from the medal count control board 17. When the medal count control board 17 receives the start command from the main control board 16, it controls the game to wait for the end as a response to the start command. Since the start command is a command that does not require a response command, the medal count control board 17 does not send a response command.

When all reels have stopped, the main control board 16 sends an end command to the medal count control board 17. The medal count control board 17 sends a response command to the main control board 16 based on receiving the end command. For example, if the end command is normal, the medal count control board 17 sets bit 0 of the third byte of the response command to "1" (received OK), and if the serial numbers do not match, sets bit 1 of the third byte of the response command to "1" (serial numbers do not match). Next, the main control board 16 sends the role information command, advantageous zone command, and payout pulse command to the medal count control board 17 in that order.

In this way, when starting a game, the main control board 16 sends a start command and executes the next control without waiting for a response from the medal count control board 17, as this does not affect the number of credits. When ending a game, the main control board 16 sends an end command and executes the next control on the condition that it has received a response command sent from the medal count control board 17, as this may affect the number of credits. By improving the communication between the main control board 16 and medal count control board 17, the main control board 16 can progress through the game while checking the status of the medal count control board 17.

[Example of processing for serial numbers]
As described above, the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 communicate using serial numbers. That is, the medal count control board 17 executes a process to check whether the serial numbers match in order to determine whether the command sent from the main control board 16 is normal. Below, an example of processing using serial numbers will be explained using Figures 43 to 45. Figure 43 is a diagram showing an example of communication when the serial number is normal.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 16 sends a gaming machine installation information command to the medal count control board 17. As explained above, the serial number assigned to the gaming machine installation information command is "0". The medal count control board 17 determines the initial value and additional value for the serial number based on the main chip ID included in the gaming machine installation information command. In the example of Figure 43, the medal count control board 17 determines the initial value for the serial number to be "137" and the additional value to be "13". Using a similar calculation method, the main control board 16 determines the initial value for the serial number to be "137" and the additional value to be "13" based on the main chip ID.

After transmitting the gaming machine installation information command, the bet number is set and the main control board 16 transmits a deposit command. This deposit command is the first command transmitted to the medal count control board 17 after the gaming machine installation information command is transmitted. Therefore, the main control board 16 transmits the deposit command with the initial serial number "137". The medal count control board 17 transmits a response command to the deposit command. At this time, the medal count control board 17 transmits a response command to the main control board 16 indicating receipt OK, as communication was successful. In other words, when the medal count control board 17 determines that the deposit command transmitted from the main control board 16 is normal through the process of checking whether the serial numbers match, it transmits a response command to the main control board 16 indicating that the deposit command is normal in response to the deposit command.

Next, when the start switch 7 is pressed, the main control board 16 sends a start command. At this time, the main control board 16 adds an additional value of "13" to the previously sent serial number value of "137" and sends it. In other words, the main control board 16 sends the start command with a serial number of "150".

When the medal count control board 17 receives an input command with the serial number "137", it calculates that the serial number of the next command to be received will be "150" based on the added value. When the medal count control board 17 receives a start command, it executes a process to check whether the serial number value calculated before reception matches the serial number value assigned to the actually received start command. Because the serial numbers match, the medal count control board 17 determines that communication is normal.

Figure 44 shows an example of communication when a serial number mismatch error occurs. The processing up until the main control board 16 receives a response command corresponding to the bet number setting operation is the same as in Figure 42, so the explanation will not be repeated. As mentioned above, when the medal count control board 17 receives the insertion command, it calculates that the serial number assigned to the next command to be received is "150".

In the example of Figure 44, after the bet number setting operation is performed, fraudulent operation is performed. As described above, fraudulent operation refers to, for example, an operation in which commands transmitted and received between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 are altered, or an operation in which a fraudster controls the main control board 16 or the medal count control board 17. In Figure 44, the main control board 16 is controlled by a fraudster, causing the main control board 16 to send an end command even though all reels have not stopped. In other words, in Figure 44, fraudulent operation is performed with the aim of causing the medal count control board 17 to execute a payout process even though no win has occurred. However, because the fraudster cannot obtain the initial value and additional value of the serial number determined based on the main chip ID of the main control board 16, nor the number of times commands have been transmitted and received, he or she is unable to know the value of the serial number to be assigned to the next command. Therefore, in the example of Figure 44, the fraudster sends the end command with the serial number "78." However, because the calculated serial number "150" does not match the actually received serial number "78," the medal count control board 17 determines that a serial number mismatch error has occurred and sends a response command indicating a serial number mismatch to the main control board 16. In other words, when the medal count control board 17 determines that the end command sent from the main control board 16 is incorrect through the process of checking whether the serial numbers match, it responds to the end command by sending a response command to the main control board 16 indicating that the end command is incorrect. Upon receiving the response command indicating a serial number mismatch, the main control board 16 does not execute the payout control that is performed after the end command. This prevents fraudulent operations.

Illegal operations include not only those that cause the main control board 16 to send an end command even though no winning has occurred, as shown in Figure 44, but also the following types of illegal operations.

For example, one possible fraudulent operation would be to have the main control board 16 send a bet cancellation command even though the bet number set in the BET counter of RAM 161c on the main control board 16 is 0. This allows the fraudster to increase the number of credits stored in the medal count control board 17 even though no bet number has been set.

Another possible fraudulent operation is altering the response command sent by the medal count control board 17 in response to the insertion command sent by the main control board 16. For example, a fraudster could have the medal count control board 17 send a response command indicating acceptance to the main control board 16, even though the number of credits is "0". This allows the fraudster to set the bet amount even though the number of credits is "0".

As such, possible types of fraudulent operations include forging commands sent by the main control board 16 and forging commands sent by the medal count control board 17. In the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, the use of "serial numbers" makes it possible to prevent all of the fraudulent operations described above.

Next, a start command with the serial number "150" assigned is sent to the medal count control board 17. The serial number "150" assigned to the start command matches the serial number calculated in advance by the medal count control board 17. Because of this match, the medal count control board 17 determines that the serial number mismatch error has been resolved, and sends a response command indicating receipt OK to the main control board 16. In this way, the slot machine 2 can easily determine that the medal count control board 17 has resolved the serial number mismatch error.

As shown in Figures 43 and 44, when the medal count control board 17 receives a command sent from the main control board 16, it uses the initial value of the serial number and the additional value to determine whether the command sent from the main control board 16 is normal. In other words, when the medal count control board 17 receives a command that requires a response, it sends a response command, and since the response command is accompanied by information indicating whether the communication is normal, the main control board 16 can proceed with the game while checking the status of the medal count control board 17.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 44, if the serial numbers do not match, it is possible to determine that tampering may be occurring, thereby increasing security regarding communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17.

Figure 45 shows an example of communication when an error related to game medals occurs. The processing up until the medal count control board 17 receives the start command is the same as Figure 42, so the explanation will not be repeated. After sending the start command, the main control board 16 sends an end command with the serial number "163" attached based on the fact that all reels have stopped. At this time, the end command includes the number of medals to be paid out, but because the number of credits is at the upper limit, an error related to game medals occurs. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command indicating a game medal count overflow to the main control board 16. As a result, the main control board 16 does not execute any processing related to payout.

Then, based on whether the count button 10 has been operated or not, the number of credits is subtracted, and the medal count control board 17 is ready to accept medals for payment. In other words, the error related to the gaming medals is resolved. The main control board 16 then again sends an end command with the serial number "163" to the medal count control board 17. In response, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command indicating that the medals have been accepted, as no error related to the gaming medals has occurred.

[Communication before sending and receiving gaming machine installation information command]
46 is a diagram showing an example of communication occurring before the transmission and reception of the gaming machine installation information command. As described above, the main control board 16 transmits the gaming machine installation information command to the medal count control board 17 after power-on.

In the example of Figure 46, the main control board 16 sends an end command to the medal count control board 17 after power is turned on and before sending the gaming machine installation information command. If the medal count control board 17 receives a command from the main control board 16 before receiving the gaming machine installation information command, it discards the command regardless of the type of command or the assigned serial number. In other words, the medal count control board 17 will not execute processing in response to commands other than the gaming machine installation information command from the main control board 16 until it receives at least the gaming machine installation information command.

As a result, the medal count control board 17 does not communicate with the main control board 16 when communication with the main control board 16 has not been established based on the gaming machine installation information command, thereby increasing security regarding communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. In other words, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operations that occur before the gaming machine installation information command is received.

In the example of Figure 46, after the termination command is discarded, when the power is turned on, gaming machine installation information command A is sent to the medal count control board 17. Based on receiving gaming machine installation information command A, the medal count control board 17 determines the initial value and additional value for the serial number.

Next, in Figure 46, the medal count control board 17 receives gaming machine installation information command B from the main control board 16. At this time, because the medal count control board 17 has already received gaming machine installation information command A, it does not update the initial value and additional value of the serial number based on gaming machine installation information command B. In other words, even if the main control board 16 sends another gaming machine installation information command after receiving the gaming machine installation information command, the medal count control board 17 does not execute processing according to the gaming machine installation information command.

This allows the medal count control board 17 to prevent the main control board 16 from being spoofed by, for example, an unauthorized board other than the main control board 16 connected to the medal count control board 17. In other words, it is possible to prevent the initial value and additional value of the serial number from being fraudulently rewritten.

[Power-on timeout]
47 is a diagram showing an example of a timeout when the power is turned on. The main control board 16 transmits a gaming machine installation information command when the power is turned on. The main control board 16 measures the elapsed time from when the power is turned on using a counter.

If the main control board 16 does not complete transmission of the gaming machine installation information command within 5000 ms from when the main control board 16 is powered on, the main control board 16 determines that an error has occurred in communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. In other words, if the medal count control board 17 is unable to receive the gaming machine installation information command within 5000 ms after the slot machine 2 is powered on, it enters an abnormal state. In the example of Figure 47, because the gaming machine installation information command has not been transmitted within 5000 ms from when the main control board 16 is powered on, the medal count control board 17 determines that a communication error has occurred. The medal count control board 17 displays the fact that a communication error has occurred on the display 312 of the CU 3.

As a result, if communication cannot be established with the medal count control board 17 based on the gaming machine installation information command after the slot machine 2 is powered on, the medal count control board 17 can notify the outside world that a communication abnormality has occurred.

The medal count control board 17 is connected to the CU control board 32. Even if a communication error occurs on the main control board 16, the medal count control board 17 can communicate with the CU control board 32.

The communication error that occurred on the main control board 16 is resolved by turning the power back on, successfully transmitting the gaming machine installation information command within 5000 ms from when the main control board 16 was powered on, and transmitting a response command indicating receipt OK from the medal count control board 17.

[About bet setting and settlement operations]
48 is a diagram illustrating the bet number setting operation and the settlement operation. As described above, the main control board 16 transmits an insertion command to the medal number control board 17 based on the bet number setting operation in which the 1BET switch 20 or the MAXBET switch 6 is pressed. In addition, the main control board 16 transmits a settlement command to the medal number control board 17 based on the settlement operation in which the bet number clear switch 21 is pressed.

As shown in FIG. 48, the main control board 16 sends a deposit command to the medal count control board 17 based on the bet number setting operation. The deposit command is a command that includes the number of medals inserted. The medal count control board 17 reads the number of medals inserted included in the received deposit command and performs the bet number setting process. Specifically, the medal count control board 17 subtracts the number of medals inserted from the number of credits managed by the medal count control board 17 and adds the number of medals inserted to the bet number. For example, if the number of bets before the bet number setting process is executed is 0 and the MAXBET switch 6 is validly operated to set the bet number, the medal count control board 17 subtracts 3 from the number of credits and adds 3 to the bet number. The medal count control board 17 sends a response command to the main control board 16 based on receiving the deposit command.

Next, the main control board 16 sends a settlement command to the medal count control board 17 based on the settlement operation. The settlement command is a command that includes the number of settled medals. The medal count control board 17 reads the number of settled medals included in the received settlement command and performs bet number cancellation processing. Specifically, it subtracts the number of settled medals from the number of bets managed by the medal count control board 17 and adds the number of settled medals to the number of credits. For example, if the number of bets before the bet number cancellation processing was executed was three and the bet number clear switch 21 was pressed, the medal count control board 17 subtracts three from the number of bets and adds three to the number of credits. Based on receiving the settlement command, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command to the main control board 16.

Here, the medal count control board 17 transmits a common response command in response to the insertion command and the settlement command. That is, the medal count control board 17 transmits a common response command to the main control board 16 when it receives an insertion command and when it receives a settlement command. Specifically, the medal count control board 17 transmits a response command to the main control board 16 both when it receives an insertion command and when it receives a settlement command. Here, when the medal count control board 17 receives an insertion command, it does not execute the process of adding the number of credits (number of game medals), so game medal count overflow cannot occur. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 does not store "1" in the third bit of the third byte of the response command to the insertion command and transmit it.

Furthermore, when the medal count control board 17 receives a settlement command, it does not execute the process of subtracting the number of credits, so a shortage of game medals cannot occur. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 does not store "1" in the second bit of the third byte of the response command to the insertion command and transmit it.

In this way, the medal count control board 17 notifies the main control board 16 of a medal shortage or medal overflow by using different data stored in the third byte when it receives an insertion command and when it receives a settlement command. This allows the medal count control board 17 to use the same response command when a bet number setting operation is performed and when a bet number cancellation operation is performed, thereby reducing the processing load.

Figure 49 shows an example in which a new bet setting operation is performed after a bet setting operation, but before a response command is received. As shown in Figure 49, the main control board 16 sends a deposit command based on bet setting operation A. The main control board 16 controls the deposit command so that it is completed before 40 ms has elapsed since the start of transmission, so as to prevent a timeout error. The medal count control board 17 sends a response command in response to receiving the deposit command.

In the example of Figure 49, after accepting bet number setting operation A, a new bet number setting operation B is performed before receiving a response command to the input command based on bet number setting operation A. The main control board 16 does not accept bet number setting operation B. In other words, after sending an input command to the medal count control board 17, the main control board 16 does not accept a new bet number setting operation until it receives a response command from the medal count control board 17. This makes it possible to prevent a new bet number setting operation B from being accepted in a situation where the processing in response to bet number setting operation A has not been confirmed in the medal count control board 17.

Figure 50 shows an example in which a new settlement operation is performed after a settlement operation and before a response command is received. As shown in Figure 50, the main control board 16 sends a settlement command based on settlement operation A. The main control board 16 controls the transmission of the settlement command so that it is completed before 40 ms has elapsed since the start of transmission, to prevent a timeout error. The medal count control board 17 sends a response command in response to receiving the settlement command.

In the example of Figure 50, after settlement operation A is accepted, a new settlement operation B is performed before a response command to the input command based on settlement operation A is received. The main control board 16 does not accept settlement operation B. In other words, after sending a settlement command to the medal count control board 17, the main control board 16 does not accept a new settlement operation until it receives a response command from the medal count control board 17. This makes it possible to prevent a new settlement operation B from being accepted in a situation where the processing according to settlement operation A has not been confirmed in the medal count control board 17.

Figure 51 shows an example in which a new settlement operation is performed after the bet number setting operation and before the response command is received. As shown in Figure 51, the main control board 16 sends a deposit command based on the bet number setting operation. The medal count control board 17 sends a response command in response to receiving the deposit command.

In the example of Figure 51, a new settlement operation is performed after the bet number setting operation is accepted, but before the response command to the insertion command based on that bet number setting operation is received. The main control board 16 does not accept that settlement operation. In other words, after sending an insertion command to the medal count control board 17, the main control board 16 does not accept a new settlement operation until it receives a response command from the medal count control board 17. This makes it possible to prevent a new settlement operation from being accepted when the medal count control board 17 has not yet confirmed processing in response to the bet number setting operation.

Figure 52 shows an example in which a new bet number setting operation is performed after the settlement operation and before the response command is received. As shown in Figure 52, the main control board 16 sends a coin insertion command based on the settlement operation. The medal count control board 17 sends a response command in response to receiving the coin insertion command.

In the example of Figure 52, after accepting a settlement operation, a new bet number setting operation is performed before receiving a response command to the settlement command based on that settlement operation. The main control board 16 does not accept that bet number setting operation. In other words, after sending a settlement command to the medal count control board 17, the main control board 16 does not accept a new bet number setting operation until it receives a response command from the medal count control board 17. This makes it possible to prevent a new bet number setting operation from being accepted when the medal count control board 17 has not yet confirmed processing in response to the settlement operation.

[Bet setting operation and serial number]
53 is a diagram illustrating a serial number error during the bet number setting operation. As shown in FIG. 53, the medal number control board 17 determines the initial value of the serial number to be "137" based on the reception of the gaming machine installation information command.

Then, a bet number setting operation is performed on the slot machine 2. The main control board 16 sends a deposit command based on the bet number setting operation. The deposit command is assigned the serial number "78." In other words, the serial number assigned to the deposit command does not match the initial serial number value. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command to the main control board 16 indicating a serial number mismatch. Once the main control board 16 receives the response command indicating a serial number mismatch, it will not accept new bet number setting operations. In other words, if the main control board 16 receives a response command indicating an abnormality, it will not resume accepting bet number setting operations.

Figure 54 is a diagram explaining a serial number error during a settlement operation. As shown in Figure 54, the medal count control board 17 determines the initial value of the serial number to be "137" based on receiving the gaming machine installation information command.

Then, a bet number setting operation is performed on the slot machine 2. The main control board 16 sends a deposit command based on the bet number setting operation. The deposit command is assigned the serial number "137." In other words, the serial number assigned to the deposit command matches the initial serial number value. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command indicating receipt OK to the main control board 16. Based on receiving the response command indicating receipt OK, the main control board 16 accepts the bet number setting operation and performs the following control.

Next, in Figure 54, a settlement operation is performed. The main control board 16 sends a settlement command based on the settlement operation. The settlement command is assigned the serial number "78". In other words, the serial number assigned to the settlement command does not match the serial number calculated by the medal count control board 17. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command indicating a serial number mismatch to the main control board 16. Based on receiving the response command indicating a serial number mismatch, the main control board 16 does not accept new settlement operations. In other words, when the main control board 16 receives a response command indicating an abnormality, it does not resume accepting settlement operations.

Referring to Figures 53 and 54, the main control board 16 can prevent a new bet number setting operation or bet number cancellation operation from being accepted when processing corresponding to the bet number setting operation or settlement operation has not been confirmed on the medal number control board 17.

[Frame side information confirmation process]
55 is a diagram illustrating the process of checking the frame-side information. As described above, the medal count control board 17 periodically transmits a frame-side information command to the main control board 16. The system information contained in the frame-side information command includes information indicating the connection status, which indicates whether the medal count control board 17 and the CU control board 32 are connected normally.

In the example of Figure 55, the connection between the medal count control board 17 and the CU control board 32 is disconnected. After the connection is disconnected, the medal count control board 17 sends a frame-side information command indicating a connection abnormality to the main control board 16. After the main control board 16 receives the frame-side information command indicating a connection abnormality, the start switch 7 is pressed. At this time, the main control board 16 does not send a start command.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, even after the main control board 16 receives a frame-side information command indicating a connection abnormality, if a bet number setting operation and a settlement operation are performed, the main control board 16 will send a deposit command and a settlement command. That is, when the main control board 16 receives a bet number setting operation to set the bet number to start a game, it sends a deposit command to the medal count control board 17 regardless of whether the connection between the medal count control board 17 and the CU 3 is normal. Also, when the main control board 16 receives a settlement operation to cancel the bet number to start a game, it sends a settlement command to the medal count control board 17 regardless of whether the connection between the medal count control board 17 and the CU 3 is normal. Furthermore, after the connection between the medal count control board 17 and the CU control board 32 is restored and the main control board 16 receives a frame-side information command indicating a normal connection, it sends a start command. That is, at the start of a game, the main control board 16 checks the connection status between the medal count control board 17 and CU3 based on the frame-side information command, and starts that game if the connection between the medal count control board 17 and CU3 is normal. After sending the start command, the main control board 16 performs the next control without waiting for a response from the medal count control board 17. This next control includes controlling the drive of the reels to start the game.

As a result, the main control board 16 starts a game on the condition that the connection between the medal count control board 17 and CU3 is normal, allowing the game to proceed while checking the status of the medal count control board 17. Furthermore, because the main control board 16 does not affect the game value when starting a game, it can execute the next control after sending the start command without waiting for a response from the medal count control board 17.

In addition, the main control board 16 can send a deposit command in response to the bet number setting operation and a settlement command in response to the settlement operation, regardless of whether the connection between the medal count control board 17 and the CU3 is normal or not.

[Display of payout quantity]
FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating the display control of the number of payout coins. After all reels have stopped, the main control board 16 transmits an end command to the medal count control board 17. The end command shown in FIG. 56 is a command that involves the dispensing of at least one medal. The medal count control board 17 transmits a response command upon receiving the end command. Furthermore, the medal count control board 17 performs operations such as adding credits based on the number of medals dispensing indicated by the end command. After receiving the response command, the main control board 16 displays the number of payout coins on the gaming support display 12. That is, after transmitting the end command, the main control board 16 causes the gaming support display 12 to display the number of payout coins, provided that it receives a response command. This allows the main control board 16 to display the number of payout coins on the gaming support display 12 while checking the status of the medal count control board 17.

After transmitting the response command, the main control board 16 transmits a role information command, a favorable zone command, and a payout pulse command. In other words, after transmitting the end command, the main control board 16, on the condition that it has received the response command, transmits to the medal count control board 17 a role information command and a favorable zone command that can identify whether or not the special role has been controlled to a winning state. This allows the main control board 16 to notify the medal count control board 17 of whether or not it is controlled to a favorable zone, etc., while checking the status of the medal count control board 17, and therefore can have the medal count control board 17 output the proportion of the number of payout medals awarded in favorable zones, etc., while checking the status of the medal count control board 17.

[About the Yakubiki Monitor]
Figure 57 is a diagram showing the role ratio monitor 89. Figure 57 shows the role ratio monitor 89 when it is off. As shown in Figure 57, the role ratio monitor 89 consists of four role ratio information displays 50a, 50b, 50c, and 50d that can turn on/off the first segment A, the second segment B, the third segment C, the fourth segment D, the fifth segment E, the sixth segment F, and the seventh segment G, respectively. The medal count control board 17 is a display that can display various information by turning on or off the first to seventh segments A to G by setting display data for each of the role ratio information displays 50a, 50b, 50c, and 50d.

Figure 58 is a diagram showing an example of the display on the role ratio monitor 89. The medal count control board 17 causes the role ratio monitor 89 to display, in the order of (1) to (6), (1) the instructed role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, (2) the consecutive role payout ratio for the past 6,000 games, (3) the role payout ratio for the past 6,000 games, (4) the consecutive role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, (5) the role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and (6) the role status ratio to the total cumulative payout number. Hereinafter, the information shown in (1) to (6) may be referred to as the display content.

The payout ratio of special features indicates the ratio of the number of payouts when a special feature (BB) is achieved to the number of payouts during a specified period. The consecutive feature ratio indicates the ratio of the number of payouts when a special feature (RB) is achieved to the number of payouts during a specified period. The payout ratio of special features including instructions indicates the ratio of the number of payouts of special features to the number of payouts during a specified period, when the number of payouts when an instruction (navigation) is generated is included in the number of payouts of special features. In other words, it is the ratio of the cumulative number of medals paid out when a navigation notification is issued and the cumulative number of medals paid out for BB or RB to the total cumulative number of medals paid out. The feature status ratio indicates the ratio of the number of games played when a special feature (BB, RB, CB, and SB) is achieved to the number of games played during a specified period. In other words, the feature status monitor 89 outputs the ratio of the number of medals awarded when a special feature is achieved to the total number of medals awarded. The display content displayed on the winning ratio monitor 89 is calculated by the medal count control board 17.

When the medal count control unit 171 switches the display content every predetermined period in the display order (1) to (6) shown in Figure 58 and described above, even if the game progresses and these values can be updated to new values within a period until each display has completed a cycle, it restricts updating to new values and cycles through the display using the original values.

More specifically, if these values can be updated to new values as the game progresses during a period until the display completes one cycle, new values are calculated and stored in RAM 171c. However, the original values are set instead of the new values in the output buffer used to display the display content on the role ratio monitor 89, so that the display on the role ratio monitor 89 is completed using the original values set in the output buffer. Once the display completes, new values are set in the output buffer, and the new values are then displayed. Also, if these values can be updated to new values during a period until the display completes one cycle, calculations to determine new values may be restricted, and the display on the role ratio monitor 89 may be completed. Once the display completes one cycle, calculations to determine new values may be performed, and the new values may then be used to display the display on the role ratio monitor 89. This prevents values calculated at different times from being mixed together during the period until the display content on the role ratio monitor 89 completes one cycle.

Furthermore, if the consecutive feature payout ratio over the past 6,000 games or the consecutive feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number exceeds a specified ratio (e.g., 60%), the medal count control board 17 displays the consecutive feature payout ratio in a different display format than usual (e.g., if the normal display is always on, the top two digits of the feature ratio monitor 89 will flash).Furthermore, if the consecutive feature payout ratio over the past 6,000 games or the consecutive feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number exceeds a specified ratio (e.g., 70%), the medal count control board 17 displays the consecutive feature payout ratio in a different display format than usual (e.g., if the normal display is always on, the top two digits of the feature ratio monitor 89 will flash).

In this way, when the consecutive feature payout ratio or feature payout ratio exceeds a specified percentage, it is displayed in a different way than usual, warning that there is a possibility that the game is being controlled to a highly gambling state.

Furthermore, when the medal count control board 17 displays the consecutive feature payout ratio and feature payout ratio for the past 6,000 games on the role ratio monitor 89, if the total number of games played since power-on has not reached 6,000, it controls the display mode to an unusual mode, such as by flashing all of the digits on the role ratio monitor 89, so that it is possible to recognize that the total has not reached 6,000 games. That is, in the process of calculating the display content to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 89, the medal count control board 17 flashes all of the digits on the role ratio monitor 89 when a period of 6,000 games has not elapsed since the start of accumulation of data used in the process. Note that, in the process of calculating the display content to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 89, the medal count control board 17 may flash some of the digits on the role ratio monitor 89 when a period of 6,000 games has not elapsed since the start of accumulation of data used in the process. This makes it possible to recognize the possibility of bias in the displayed ratios and rates, and the medal count control board 17 can notify the outside world that there may be a lack of data when displaying the consecutive feature payout ratio and feature payout ratio on the feature ratio monitor 89.

The medal count control board 17 may display "00" in the lowest two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 when 6,000 games have not been played, and may display the percentage or ratio that should be displayed in the lowest two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 after 6,000 games have been played. In other words, it is preferable to configure the display mode of the lowest two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 to be different from the display mode after 6,000 games when 6,000 games have not been played. By configuring it in this way, when 6,000 games have not been played, it is possible to recognize that the tally of the consecutive role payout ratio, etc., specified by the display of the highest two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 (e.g., "1C") has not reached 6,000 games, and it is possible that there is a bias in the displayed percentage or ratio. Furthermore, by configuring the lowest two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 to display "00" when 6000 games have not been played, data will always be displayed in the lowest two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 when 6000 games have not been played. For example, if no data is displayed in one of the lowest two digits of the role ratio monitor 89, an abnormality in the role ratio monitor 89 can be recognized.

In addition, when the medal count control board 17 displays the consecutive feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number on the feature ratio monitor 89, if the number of past games has not reached the specified number of games (e.g., 175,000 games) at which the consecutive feature payout ratio generally converges to the slot machine's design value, the medal count control board 17 controls the display mode to be different from normal, for example by flashing the top two digits on the feature ratio monitor 89, so that it is possible to recognize that the specified number of games at which the consecutive feature payout ratio generally converges to the slot machine's design value has not yet been reached, and it is possible to recognize that there may be a bias in the displayed ratios and proportions.

In addition, when the medal count control board 17 displays the payout ratio of the reel to the total cumulative payout number on the reel ratio monitor 89, if the number of past games has not reached the specified number of games (e.g., 175,000 games) at which the payout ratio of the reel converges roughly to the design value of the slot machine, the medal count control board 17 controls the display mode to be different from normal, for example by flashing the top two digits of the reel ratio monitor 89, so that it is possible to recognize that the specified number of games at which the payout ratio of the reel has converged roughly to the design value of the slot machine has not been reached, and it is possible to recognize that there may be a bias in the displayed ratios and proportions.

In addition, when the medal count control board 17 displays the instruction-based feature payout ratio relative to the total cumulative payout number on the role ratio monitor 89, if the number of past games has not reached the specified number of games (e.g., 175,000 games) at which the instruction-based feature payout ratio generally converges to the slot machine's design value, the medal count control board 17 controls the display mode to be different from normal, for example by flashing the top two digits on the role ratio monitor 89, so that it is possible to recognize that the specified number of games at which the instruction-based feature payout ratio generally converges to the slot machine's design value has not yet been reached, and it is possible to recognize that there may be a bias in the displayed ratios and rates.

The medal count control board 17 also determines whether the data used to calculate the consecutive feature payout ratio and feature payout ratio over the past 6,000 games is normal, and if it is determined to be abnormal (for example, if the stored value is in a certain data format (such as repeated 01)), it initializes the data determined to be abnormal and any data related to that data, and causes the feature ratio monitor 89 to display (for example, "FFFF") that an abnormality has been detected, thereby alerting the player to the fact that the calculation of this data is not being performed correctly.

When initializing data determined to be abnormal and data related to that data, for example, if either the consecutive feature payout ratio or feature payout ratio over the past 6,000 games is determined to be abnormal, all of the data related to this may be initialized, or only some of the data may be initialized.

In addition, the system determines whether the data used to calculate the continuous feature payout ratio, feature payout ratio, and command-included feature payout ratio for the past 6,000 games or total cumulative payout coins is normal, and if an abnormality is determined, a notification to that effect is issued, and then the data can be initialized by performing a predetermined operation (for example, operating switches such as start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and setting key switch 37 in a predetermined sequence).

Furthermore, when an abnormality has been detected, the notification may be given by having the winning ratio monitor 89 display a message (for example, "FFFF") indicating that an abnormality has been detected, as described above, or, when an abnormality is detected, a command that can identify this may be sent to the performance control unit 151, and the performance control unit 151 may then notify the user by using the LCD display 51 or the like to notify the user that an abnormality has been detected.

In this embodiment, during the period from when the power is turned on until the power supply is cut off, the following are displayed: the instructed feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout coins, the consecutive feature payout ratio for the past 6,000 games, the feature payout ratio for the past 6,000 games, the consecutive feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout coins, the feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout coins, and the feature status ratio to the total cumulative payout coins. However, they may be displayed only when the front door 1b is detected to be open, only when operation of a specified operation switch (e.g., reset/setting switch 38) is detected, when a game is not being played, when settings are being changed or confirmed, or only for a specified period after the power is turned on. Furthermore, rather than automatically switching at specified intervals, the displayed content may be switched each time a specified operation is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the role ratio monitor 89 is configured to notify when an abnormality has been detected in the data used to calculate the display content of the role ratio monitor 89, or when there is a period of time in which there is insufficient data to calculate the display content, but a command that can identify this may be sent to the performance control unit 151, so that it can be confirmed on the LCD display 51 or performance device controlled by the performance control unit 151.

In addition, in this embodiment, the role ratio monitor 89 is configured to display the instructed role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout coins, the consecutive role payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the role payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the consecutive role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout coins, the role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout coins, and the role status ratio to the total cumulative payout coins. In addition to these displays, the role ratio monitor 89 may also display information that makes it possible to recognize when RAM 171c has been initialized due to a setting change, or when a break has been detected in wiring (such as wiring for a backup power supply) installed in the slot machine 2.

In particular, if a setting change is made during a bonus, during a favorable zone, or while a bonus is being carried over, forcing the bonus or favorable zone to end, or if a carried-over bonus is cleared, if more than the specified number of games are played while a bonus is being carried over, or if an operation is performed intentionally to end an advantageous zone, i.e., if the player is intentionally shifted from a relatively favorable gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state, or if it is detected that the role ratio monitor 89 may not be properly connected due to a wire break or the like, a notification of this will be issued in an identifiable manner. This makes it possible to recognize the possibility of fraudulent manipulation that prevents the correct information from being displayed, such as the role payout ratio, consecutive role payout ratio, and role payout ratio with instructions.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the total cumulative data, etc., is initialized to avoid overflow of the total cumulative number of games played or the total cumulative number of payouts, it is preferable to notify this in an identifiable manner, different from when there is a possibility of fraudulent operation to prevent the display of correct information such as the aforementioned feature payout ratio, consecutive feature payout ratio, and instructed feature payout ratio. In this way, it is possible to recognize that the total cumulative number of games played or the total cumulative number of payouts has been initialized by the process to avoid overflow, separately from initialization due to fraudulent operation to prevent the display of correct information such as feature payout ratios.

As mentioned above, if there is a possibility of fraudulent manipulation so that correct information such as the payout ratio for consecutive games, or the payout ratio for games with instructions is not displayed, this is detected and the history of the detection is recorded on the medal count control board 17 side, and instead of issuing an alert at the time of detection, a predetermined operation is then performed, allowing these histories to be confirmed on a display provided on the medal count control board 17 side (for example, the role ratio monitor 89), a display provided on the performance control unit 151 side (for example, the LCD display 51), or a display external to the slot machine 2 (for example, the display 312).

It may also be possible to make it possible to check on a display or presentation device controlled by the presentation control unit 151 whether settings have been changed, whether a disconnection has been detected, whether a connection problem has occurred in the role ratio monitor 89 that may prevent correct information from being displayed such as the role payout ratio, consecutive role payout ratio, and role payout ratio with instructions, or whether, as mentioned above, incorrect information has been manipulated so that correct information such as the role payout ratio, consecutive role payout ratio, and role payout ratio with instructions is not displayed. The presentation control unit 151 may also record a history of detections of possible incorrect information such as the role payout ratio, consecutive role payout ratio, and role payout ratio with instructions being not displayed such that correct information such as the role payout ratio, consecutive role payout ratio, and role payout ratio with instructions is not displayed, such as when settings are changed during a bonus, advantageous period, or while a bonus is being carried over, forcing the bonus or advantageous period to end, or clearing a carried-over bonus, and this history may then be checked by a specified operation.

[Initialization process of role ratio information]
59 is a diagram for explaining the initialization process of the role ratio information. As shown in Fig. 59, after power is turned on, the main control board 16 transmits a gaming machine installation information command A to the medal count control board 17. After that, the game is repeated, and the main control board 16 transmits an advantageous zone command and a payout pulse command to the medal count control board 17.

Upon receiving a payout pulse command, the medal count control board 17 executes a backup process to store the role ratio information in the backup memory 294. Role ratio information is data used to calculate the data to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 89, and is included in the role information command, advantageous zone command, and payout pulse command. The medal count control board 17 may store the role ratio information in the backup memory 294 each time it receives a command including role ratio information.

In the example of FIG. 59, after the backup process is executed, an unauthorized operation is performed on the main control board 16. As described above, "unauthorized operation" refers to an operation that alters the commands exchanged between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17, or an operation that unauthorizedly controls the main control board 16 or the medal count control board 17. In the example of FIG. 44, as a result of the unauthorized operation, the main control board 16 is controlled by an unauthorized connected device, and the main control board 16 sends gaming machine installation information command B to the medal count control board 17. At this time, the medal count control board 17 again performs backup initialization, which initializes the role ratio information stored in the backup memory 294, based on the reception of the gaming machine installation information command. In other words, if the main chip ID identified from the gaming machine installation information command differs from the main chip ID identified from the previously received gaming machine installation information command, the medal count control board 17 initializes the data used to display the role ratio monitor 89.

As a result, the medal count control board 17 initializes the data used to display the role ratio information if the main control board 16 is not legitimate, based on the main chip ID possessed by the main control board 16, thereby ensuring that the correct role ratio corresponding to each slot machine is output.

[Regarding in-memory and out-of-memory programs]
The main control unit 161 of the slot machine 2 of this embodiment executes a program within the capacity and a program outside the capacity. The program within the capacity is a program that contains instructions related to the progress of the game, such as an internal lottery process. The program outside the capacity is a program that contains instructions not directly related to the progress of the game, such as outputting data to a winning combination monitor. Malfunctions can occur when data is unintentionally mixed between the program within the capacity and the program outside the capacity. For example, if an instruction from the program within the capacity should rewrite data in the internal RAM area, but data in the external RAM area is instead rewritten, this can result in a program malfunction. To prevent such malfunctions, the main control unit 161 distinguishes between the program within the capacity and the program outside the capacity and executes the program to progress the game.

The following describes the areas where off-capacity programs and on-capacity programs are stored, using Figure 60. Figure 60 is an address map of the memory area used by the main control unit 161. As shown in Figure 60, the memory area used by the main control unit 161 includes the memory area allocated to ROM 161b (0000H to EFFFH) and the memory area allocated to RAM 161c (F000H to FFFFH).

The memory area of ROM 161b consists of a program/data area where programs and fixed data are stored, an unused area where access is prohibited, and other areas. The other areas include a ROM comment area where arbitrary data such as the program title and version can be set, a vector table area where the upper addresses of the CALLV instruction subroutine and the starting address of the timer interrupt process (main) are set, a HW parameter area where parameters for setting the internal functions of the main control unit 161 via hardware are set, and an unused area where access is prohibited.

The memory area of RAM 161c consists of a usable area (F000H-F400H) that can be used as a work area, and other areas (F401H-FFFFH). The other areas include an internal function register area (FE00H-FEACH) that stores registers for controlling the various functions implemented in the main control unit 161. The various functions implemented in the main control unit 161 include, for example, the functions of the serial communication circuit, which will be described later. In other words, the internal function register area of RAM 161c includes a storage area for setting the functions of the serial communication circuit.

The program/data areas in ROM 161b include an internal program area where internal programs directly related to the progress of the game are stored, an internal data area where internal data used by internal programs is stored, an external program area where external programs not directly related to the progress of the game are stored, an external data area where external data used by external programs is stored, and an unused area.

The progression of a game refers to the progression of a series of processes that make up a game. In the case of a slot machine, this would mean progressing through the stages of setting the number of bets and allowing the game to begin, starting the game and spinning the reels, stopping the reels and deriving the display results, and awarding value such as medals based on the display results.

Note that in the above, "before" or "after" a storage area refers to the relative size of the address values assigned to the storage area, with a smaller address being the front and a larger address being the back. Therefore, a storage area allocated after a certain storage area is one with a larger address value than that storage area, and a storage area allocated before that storage area is one with a smaller address value than that storage area.

RAM 161c includes an internal RAM area used as a work area by internal programs, an external RAM area used as a work area by external programs, and an unused area where control data is never stored and is always filled with 0s. The internal RAM area also includes an internal stack area where internal programs save data, and the external RAM area includes an external stack area where external programs save data. A temporary stack area (described below) is allocated to a 4-byte area from the last address (F1FFH) of the internal RAM area toward the top address, and a payout management temporary stack area (described below) is allocated to a further 4-byte area toward the top address. The internal stack area is allocated further toward the top address of the payout management stack area, and data is saved toward that address toward the top address. Data is saved to the external stack area from the last address (F1FFH) of the internal RAM area toward the top address.

As shown in Figure 61, the internal RAM area is composed of areas A through F, an unused area, an internal stack area, and a payout management temporary stack area and temporary stack area used only in the initial setting process described below. Area A is allocated as a storage area for setting values and the status of the setting key switch 37. Area B is allocated as a storage area for output buffers for reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, etc., door commands, signal buffers during advantageous periods, AT status, external signal flags, etc. Area C is allocated as a storage area for timer counters, LED output buffers, control data for reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, external signal data, etc. Area D is allocated as a storage area for game status, RT status, replay medal counter, counter during BB, etc. Area E is allocated as a storage area for stopped reel information (stop order, etc.), winning flags, instruction numbers, advantageous period end flags, reel effects, reel motor status, number of inserted medals, random numbers, reel status, reel control data, etc. Area F is assigned as a payout-related area in which data related to control with the medal count control board 17 is stored.

Here, as shown in Figure 61, the area from area A to the payout management temporary stack area is called the "all initialization target area," the area from area B to the unused area just before the stack area is called the "area to be initialized at the start of a setting change," the area from area C to area E is called the "area to be initialized at the end of a setting change," areas D and E are called the "area to be initialized at the end of a BB," and area E is called the "area to be initialized at the end of each game." The all initialization target area is an area that is initialized when a RAM abnormality error occurs. The area to be initialized at the start of a setting change is an area that is initialized when a setting change begins. The area to be initialized at the end of a setting change is an area that is initialized when a setting change is completed. The area to be initialized at the end of a BB is an area that is initialized at the end of a BB. The area to be initialized at the end of each game is an area that is initialized every time a game is completed.

In the following, the internal program area, internal data area, and internal RAM area may be collectively referred to as the internal area, and the external program area, external data area, and external RAM area may be collectively referred to as the external area.

[Instructions used by the program]
The programs executed by the main control unit 161 include a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program, and subroutines that are called during the execution of other programs.

The main control unit 161 includes an LD instruction as an instruction to read data stored in ROM 161b and RAM 161c, and an instruction to write data to RAM 161c. The LD instruction is an instruction to read one byte of data stored at a specified address in a main routine or subroutine into a specified register, or an instruction to write one byte of data stored in a specified register in a main routine or subroutine to a specified address.

LD instructions include the normal LD instruction and the special LD instruction, the LDQ instruction. A normal LD instruction specifies a register and both an upper address and a lower address, and is an instruction to read data from ROM 161b or RAM 161c stored at the specified upper and lower addresses, or specifies both an upper and lower address and a register, and writes the data in the specified register to the specified upper and lower addresses in RAM 161c. In contrast, the LDQ instruction specifies only a register and a lower address, identifies an address using a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (Q register) in the internal function register area of the aforementioned RAM 161c, and reads data from ROM 161b or RAM 161c stored at the specified address into the specified register; or specifies only a lower address and a register, identifies an address using a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (Q register), and writes the data in the specified register to a specified address in RAM 161c. This makes it possible to store specified data in a specified register using a smaller amount of data than a normal LD instruction.

In addition, the LDQ instruction can read two bytes of data stored in an address specified by a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (Q register) and the address following that by specifying two registers such as the HL register or DE register as the transfer destination; and can write two bytes of data to an address specified by a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (Q register) and the address following that by specifying two registers such as the HL register or DE register as the transfer source.

When reading data stored in a specific area of ROM 161b or RAM 161c in a main routine or subroutine, the LDQ instruction, a special LD instruction, can be used to read or write data from a specific area by specifying only the lower part of the address, rather than specifying the entire address (upper and lower parts) that indicates the specific area. Using the LDQ instruction makes it possible to read or write data using a smaller amount of data than with a normal LD instruction, which specifies both the upper and lower addresses, reducing the amount of program waste required to specify addresses when reading or writing data.

Furthermore, among the intra-capacity data stored in the intra-capacity RAM area of RAM 161c, particularly frequently used intra-capacity data is stored in an area of the intra-capacity RAM area whose starting address is a specific value, and this specific value is set as the upper address of the intra-capacity data in a special register (Q register).When the main control unit 161 reads this intra-capacity data, by specifying only the lower address using the LDQ instruction, reading or writing intra-capacity data can be performed with a smaller amount of data than with a normal LD instruction which specifies both the upper and lower addresses, thereby reducing the amount of program waste required to specify addresses when reading or writing this intra-capacity data.

The main control unit 161 can also change the value set in the special register (Q register) in the main routine or subroutine. As described below, during the initialization process performed at startup to set the internal registers, the special register (Q register) is initially set to a specific value indicating the starting address of in-memory data frequently used by in-memory programs. In this embodiment, the special register (Q register) includes two registers, the first Q register and the second Q register. Below, the first Q register and the second Q register are collectively referred to simply as the "special register (Q register)." For example, the special register (Q register) stores "F0" as its initial value. As a result, when an in-memory program is being executed, the special register (Q register) is set to a specific value indicating the starting address of in-memory data frequently used by in-memory programs, allowing the in-memory program to read or write frequently used in-memory data using the LDQ instruction.

The upper address used when reading with the LDQ instruction as a special LD instruction may be set in a specified memory area other than a special register (e.g., the Q register), such as a vector table area. This special LD instruction allows a data storage address to be determined by specifying part of the address using a value stored in a specified memory area such as the vector table area and specifying the remaining part of the address through the program, thereby reducing the amount of program waste required to specify addresses when reading or writing data. Furthermore, even if a special LD instruction is used, for example, it is possible to reduce the amount of program waste required to specify addresses when reading or writing data by assigning an identification value with a data volume smaller than the address to each of multiple areas that make up the vector table area, setting data storage addresses in each of these multiple areas, and specifying an identification value to specify the storage address of the data stored in the area corresponding to the identification value.

The main control unit 161 also includes a CALL instruction (call instruction) as an instruction to cause the main control unit 161 to execute a program stored in the program/data area. The CALL instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at a specified address in a main routine or subroutine. When the main control unit 161 calls a subroutine with a CALL instruction, it stores the caller's address in the stack area and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specified address. Then, when the subroutine ends, a RET instruction (return instruction) is used to return to the caller's address stored in the stack area, i.e., the main routine or subroutine program that executed the CALL instruction.

Furthermore, the main control unit 161 includes a CALLEX instruction as an instruction that causes the main control unit 161 to execute a program stored in the program/data area. The CALLEX instruction not only calls a subroutine stored at an address specified in the main routine or subroutine, but also switches register banks. Figure 62 is a diagram explaining the register banks included in the CPU 161a of the main control unit 161. As shown in Figure 62, the CPU 161a has a first register bank R1 and a second register bank R2.

The first register bank R1 includes ten registers: the first Q register, the first U register, the first A register, the first B register, the first C register, the first D register, the first E register, the first F register, the first H register, and the first L register. Similarly, the second register bank R2 includes ten registers: the second Q register, the second U register, the second A register, the second B register, the second C register, the second D register, the second E register, the second F register, the second H register, and the second L register.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 161 uses the first register bank R1 when executing instructions according to a program written in the internal program area, and uses the second register bank R2 when executing instructions according to a program written in the external program area. In other words, the main control unit 161 does not use the second register bank R2 when executing instructions according to a program written in the internal program area, and does not use the first register bank R1 when executing instructions according to a program written in the external program area. This prevents the slot machine 2 in this embodiment from unintentionally mixing data between internal and external programs, which could cause malfunctions. Note that, hereinafter, programs written in the internal program area will be referred to simply as "internal program," and programs written in the external program area will be referred to simply as "external program."

In other words, the main control unit 161 uses the first register bank R1 when executing an internal program as a main routine, but switches from the first register bank R1 to the second register bank R2 when an external program is called as a subroutine using a CALLEX instruction. More specifically, when the main control unit 161 calls an external program area as a subroutine using a CALLEX instruction, it stores the caller's address in the stack area and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specified address. When the subroutine ends, the main control unit 161 issues a RETEX instruction (return instruction) to return to the caller's address stored in the stack area, i.e., the internal program that executed the CALLEX instruction, and switches from the second register bank R2 to the first register bank R1. This allows the slot machine 2 of this embodiment to use different register banks when executing an internal program and an external program, preventing the contents of the internal program area and the external program area from being mixed together on the registers.

Each register contained in the first register bank and second register bank is assigned a role and function. The first A register and second A register are general-purpose registers called accumulators and have a variety of functions. The first B register, second B register, first C register, and second C register are also general-purpose registers, but have fewer specific functions than the A register.

The first F register and the second F register are called flag registers. The flag registers are configured to change depending on the result of an operation. Each of the first F register and the second F register consists of 8 bits, and a flag for determining whether an overflow has occurred is stored in the second bit. If an overflow occurs as a result of an operation in the first register bank R1 or the second register bank R2, a "1" is stored in the second bit of the flag register. Hereinafter, the storage of a "1" in the second bit of the flag register due to an overflow will be referred to as "the flag register being in the on state."

Overflow (overflow) includes both overflow due to addition and overflow due to subtraction. In other words, overflow refers to an operation that exceeds the capacity of a predetermined storage area. Overflow includes both exceeding the upper limit of storage capacity and falling below the lower limit of storage capacity. More specifically, overflow includes adding "1" to an 8-byte storage area that stores "1111 1111 1111 1111." Overflow includes subtracting "1" from an 8-byte storage area that stores "0000 0000 0000 0000." Subtraction overflow is sometimes also called underflow. This allows the main control unit 161 to use a flag register to detect whether an overflow has occurred in the operation result. Because overflow detection can be performed using register functions, it is faster and requires less processing load than programmatic detection.

[Q register setting]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the startup process of the main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 is realized as a control computer such as a microcomputer. Before a user program is executed, the main control unit 161 executes a startup process to set up the hardware functions of the microcomputer, for example. The user program is a program for controlling the progress of a game, is stored in the ROM 161b, and is designed by a gaming machine manufacturer or the like. On the other hand, the startup process is a process provided in the main control unit 161 itself, and is executed automatically when the main control unit 161 is started up.

The main control unit 161 executes the startup process of the main control unit 161 shown in FIG. 63, also based on the supply of power to the main control unit 161. In FIG. 63, as an example of a setting process related to the hardware functions of the main control unit 161, initial values are set in the first Q register and the second Q register (Sj1). After executing Sj1, although not shown, the main control unit 161 may perform setting processes related to the hardware functions of the main control unit 161. The setting process related to the hardware functions may, for example, set the functions of the serial communication circuit.

In Sj1 of this embodiment, the initial value of the first Q register is, for example, "F0," and the initial value of the second Q register is, for example, "F3." This allows the main control unit 161 to reduce the amount of program waste required to specify an address when calling an internal RAM area that is frequently referenced and written to when executing an internal program. Similarly, the main control unit 161 can reduce the amount of program waste required to specify an address when calling an external RAM area that is frequently referenced and written to when executing an external program. This allows the main control unit 161 of this embodiment to reduce the program size required when executing instructions in both internal and external programs.

The main control unit 161 sets initial values in the first Q register and the second Q register in Sj1, and then executes the user program (Sj2). The user program includes the initial setting process described later in FIG. 64 and the main process described later in FIG. 67. In this way, before the user program starts controlling the game, an initial value is set in the first Q register, and an initial value is also set in advance in the second Q register. This allows the main control unit 161 to set initial values in the first Q register and the second Q register before starting control of the game, simplifying processing. Furthermore, this configuration eliminates the need to set values in the first Q register and the second Q register in the user program. In other words, it is possible to reduce the processing performed in the user program. Note that in this embodiment, the initial values in the first Q register and the second Q register are different values, but the same value may be set as the initial value.

[Initial setting process of main control board 16]
64 is a diagram illustrating the initial setting process performed by the main control board 16. The initial setting process is included in the user program and is described in the internal program area of the ROM 161b.

When power supply to the slot machine 2 begins, the main control board 16 starts up with timer interrupts disabled due to a reset, and performs various processes according to the programs stored in the ROM 161b of the main control board 16. After starting up, it first initializes all output ports 0 to 9 and performs the initial setting process included in the in-capacity program.

The initial setting process begins with timer interrupts disabled. As shown in FIG. 64, the initial setting process first references a specified area of the input port (Sa1) to determine whether the power interruption detection signal output from the power interruption detection circuit is ON (Sa2). If the power interruption detection signal is ON, the process waits until the power interruption detection signal turns OFF. After that, the power supply voltage of the slot machine 2 returns to normal and the power interruption detection signal turns OFF, after which the internal register setting process is performed (Sa3). In particular, the internal register setting process sets values in the first Q register and the second Q register. "F0" is set in the first Q register, and "F3" is set in the second Q register. In other words, the internal register setting process is similar to Sj1 in FIG. 63. In other words, the same value is reset to the first Q register and the second Q register.

In this way, the main control unit 161 sets a value in the first Q register and a value in the second Q register not only during the startup process but also during the user program. This allows the main control unit 161 to set any value in the first Q register and the second Q register during the user program. Even if an abnormality occurs during the startup process of the main control unit 161 and initial values are not set in the first Q register and the second Q register in Sj1, the user program sets values in the first Q register and the second Q register, preventing an abnormality from occurring in the user program due to values not being set in the first Q register and the second Q register. In the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, values are set in the first Q register and the second Q register during both the Sj1 process in FIG. 62 and the Sa3 process in FIG. 64. However, the slot machine 2 may be configured to perform only one of the Sj1 process in FIG. 63 and the Sa3 process in FIG. 64.

Next, the address of the temporary stack area is set in the stack pointer (Sa4), RAM access permission is set (Sa5), and external RAM area initialization processing is called (Sa6). In other words, processing Sa6 is processing to call an external program from an internal program. For this reason, the processing name of Sa6 ends with the word "(external)." In the initial setting processing shown in FIG. 64 and the main processing shown in FIG. 67, the processing name for calling an external program from an internal program ends with the word "(external)." Hereinafter, processing for calling an external program from an internal program will be simply referred to as "external program call processing." The CALLEX instruction described above is used for external program call processing.

In addition, when the external RAM initialization process is called in Sa6, the registers are saved to the temporary stack area set in the stack pointer in Sa5.

When an out-of-capacity program call process such as the out-of-capacity RAM initialization process of Sa6 is executed, the main control unit 161 executes the process of switching the register bank used by the CPU 161a from the first register bank R1 to the second register bank R2 and the process of setting the value of the second Q register at the beginning of the process corresponding to the out-of-capacity program call process. At this time, "F3" is set in the second Q register. In other words, in the out-of-capacity program call process, the value of the second Q register is reset, similar to Sj1 in Figure 63 and Sa3 in Figure 64.

In this way, the main control unit 161 sets a value in the first Q register at Sj1 in FIG. 6 and Sa3 in FIG. 64 before game control begins, and sets a value in the second Q register each time an out-of-capacity program call process is executed to call an out-of-capacity program from an in-capacity program. As a result, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, even if an unintended value is set in the second Q register of the second register bank R2, the value in the second Q register of the second register bank R2 can be reset each time an out-of-capacity program is called, thereby ensuring prevention of malfunctions. Note that the main control unit 161 does not need to set the value in the second Q register each time an out-of-capacity program is called. That is, as described above, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, values are set in the first Q register and the second Q register in advance at Sj1 in FIG. 63 and Sa3 in FIG. 64 before game progress control is initiated. Therefore, a value is already set in the second Q register, even if the value in the second Q register does not need to be set each time an out-of-capacity program is called.

Furthermore, in the processing of Sj1 in FIG. 63 and the processing of Sa2Q in FIG. 64, the main control unit 161 may set a value only in the first Q register without setting a value in the second Q register, and may set the value of the second Q register when the off-capacity program is called. In this case, the main control unit 161 may set the value of the second Q register only when the off-capacity program is called for the first time after power-on. In other words, as described above, to ensure prevention of malfunctions, the value of the second Q register is not reset every time the off-capacity program is called, but the value of the second Q register is set only when the off-capacity program is called for the first time after power-on, thereby simplifying the processing.

In the extra RAM initialization process of Sa6, as shown in FIG. 65, first, RAM parity, which is the exclusive OR of the data stored in all areas of RAM 161c, is calculated (Sb1), and it is determined whether the RAM parity is 0 (Sb2).

If power outage processing is performed normally during a power outage, parity adjustment data is set so that RAM parity in all areas of RAM 161c is 0. If RAM parity is not 0 in Sb2, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in RAM 161c.

In addition, in Sa6, when the external RAM initialization process is called, the register values are saved to the temporary stack area of RAM 161c. However, after the external RAM initialization process is completed and the registers are restored, the temporary stack area is no longer used and the values in the temporary stack area are maintained as they are. When the external RAM initialization process is called during the initial setting process the next time the power is turned on, the same register values are again stored in the temporary stack area. In other words, the temporary stack area always stores the same data unless there is an abnormality in the data in RAM 161c. Therefore, it is possible to correctly determine whether an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in RAM 161c even when a determination is made based on the RAM parity of the entire area of RAM 161c, including the values in the temporary stack area.

If it is determined in Sb2 that the RAM parity is 0, destructive diagnostic data is acquired (Sb3). The destructive diagnostic data is 1 byte of data that is set in RAM 161c during power outage processing, and is data in which multiple bits are 1.

After acquiring the destructive diagnostic data in Sb3, the destructive diagnostic data set in RAM 161c is cleared (Sb4), and it is determined whether the destructive diagnostic data acquired in Sb3 is 0 (Sb5).

If power outage processing is performed normally during a power outage, destructive diagnostic data in which multiple bits are 1 is set in RAM 161c as described above. If the destructive diagnostic data is 0 in Sb5, it is possible that all data has been initialized even if the RAM parity is 0. In such a case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in RAM 161c.

If the RAM parity is 0 in Sb2 and the destruction diagnostic data is not 0 in Sb5, i.e., if it is determined that the data in RAM 161c is not abnormal, the process returns to the initial setting process in Figure 64.

On the other hand, if the RAM parity is not 0 in Sb2, or if the destruction diagnostic data is 0 in Sb5, i.e., if it is determined that the data in RAM 161c is abnormal, the entire external RAM area of RAM 161c is initialized (Sb6) without returning to the initial setting process, i.e., the internal program, and a RAM destruction diagnostic flag indicating that the data in RAM 161c has been destroyed is set in a specified area of the external RAM area (Sb7), and then the process returns to the initial setting process of Figure 64.

After the external RAM initialization process in Sa6 is completed, it is determined whether the RAM destruction diagnostic flag is set (Sa7). If it is determined that the RAM destruction diagnostic flag is not set, i.e., if it is determined that the data in RAM 161c is not abnormal, the process proceeds to Sa9. If it is determined that the RAM destruction diagnostic flag is set, i.e., if it is determined that the data in RAM 161c is abnormal, the process initializes all initialization areas of the internal RAM area (Sa8) and proceeds to Sa9. The entire initialization area initialized in Sa8 does not include the temporary stack area and the payout management temporary stack area, and the data in the temporary stack area and the payout management temporary stack area is maintained. In particular, by maintaining the data in the temporary stack area, it is possible to ensure that the RAM parity will be 0 after the registers have been saved to the temporary stack area the next time the power is turned on.

In Sa9, the stack pointer is set to the address of the payout management temporary stack area, and the payout management area initialization process is called and executed to initialize the payout management area (Sa10).

In addition, when the payout management area initialization process is called in Sa10, the registers are saved to the payout management temporary stack area set in the stack pointer in Sa9. However, after the payout management area initialization process is completed and the registers are restored, the payout management temporary stack area is no longer used and the values in the payout management temporary stack area are maintained as they are. Therefore, even if a judgment is made based on the RAM parity of the entire area of RAM 161c, including the values in the payout management temporary stack area, it is possible to correctly determine whether an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in RAM 161c.

After the payout management area initialization process in Sa10 is completed, the address of the internal stack area is set to the stack pointer (Sa11), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 37 is ON (Sa12). If it is determined that the setting key switch 37 is ON, i.e., if the power was turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, a gaming machine installation information command is sent to the medal count control board 17 (Sa13), and the process proceeds to the setting change process shown in FIG. 65.

If it is determined in Sa12 that the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is determined whether the RAM destruction diagnostic flag is set (Sa14). If it is determined that the RAM destruction diagnostic flag is not set, that is, if it is determined that the data in RAM 161c is not abnormal, it is determined whether the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state (Sa15). If it is determined that the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, if the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state but the power was turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON state and the data in RAM 161c is not abnormal, it sends a gaming machine installation information command to the medal count control board 17 (Sa13), and proceeds to the setting change processing shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in Figure 66, the setting change process initializes the area of RAM 161c that is initialized at the start of the setting change, i.e., the area of the internal RAM area excluding area A where the buffer for the setting value/setting key switch 37 is stored, the internal stack area, the payout management temporary stack area, and the temporary stack area (Sc1).

Next, the external RAM clearing process is called and executed (Sc2). The external RAM clearing process is the external program calling process described above. The external RAM clearing process initializes the external RAM area excluding the external stack area.

After the extraneous RAM clearing process in Sc2 is completed, a setting change start command indicating that the setting change state has begun is sent to the performance control unit 151 (Sc3), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state (Sc4).

If it is determined in Sc4 that the setting key switch is not ON, i.e., the setting key switch 37 is OFF but the power is turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 ON and the setting change process is initiated, it is determined whether the RAM clear permission flag is set in RAM 161c (Sc5). The RAM clear permission flag is set in RAM 61c first after RAM 161c is initialized in the main process described below, and indicates that the state before the power outage was during main processing, i.e., a state other than initial setting processing, setting change processing, or error processing due to a RAM abnormality.

If it is determined in Sc5 that the RAM clear permission flag is not set, the timer interrupt is enabled (Sc6), a RAM abnormality error code indicating an abnormality in RAM 161c is set in a specified register (Sc7), and error processing begins. Error processing will be described later.

If it is determined in Sc5 that the RAM clear permission flag is set, the process proceeds to Sc20, where a setting change end command indicating the end of the setting change process is sent to the presentation control unit 151, a one-time interrupt wait process is performed to wait for one timer interrupt process (main) (Sc21), the size of the area of RAM 161c to be initialized when the setting change is completed (setting change completion initialization area) is set (Sc22), and the process proceeds to main processing. In this case, that is, the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state, but if the power is turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON state and the process proceeds to the setting change process, if the RAM clear permission flag is set, the internal RAM area excluding area A where the setting value and setting key switch buffer are stored, the internal stack area, the payout management temporary stack area, and the temporary stack area, and the external RAM area excluding the external stack area, are initialized, but no new setting values are set, and the system transitions to a playable state with the setting values before the power outage maintained.

If it is determined in Sc4 that the setting key switch is ON, i.e., the setting key switch 37 is ON when power is turned on and the process proceeds to setting change processing, the setting value is obtained from RAM 161c and stored in the A register (Sc8), and 1 is subtracted from the setting value in the A register (Sc9). At this time, the value obtained from RAM 161c minus 1 is set in the A register. Also, if RAM 161c is cleared due to a RAM abnormality and 0 is stored as the setting value, 0 is set in the A register.

Next, the setting value of register A is incremented by 1 (Sc10), and it is determined whether the setting value after the increment exceeds 6 (Sc11). If the setting value after the increment does not exceed 6, proceed to Sc13; if the setting value after the increment exceeds 6, correct the setting value after the increment to 1 (Sc12), and proceed to Sc13.

In Sc13, the value in the output buffer of the setting value display 24 is updated to the updated setting value (Sc13), and a one-time interrupt wait process is performed (Sc14). As a result, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed once, and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting value display 24.

Then, the program waits until operation of the reset/set switch 38 or start switch 7 is detected (Sc15, Sc16). If operation of the reset/set switch 38 is detected in Sc15, the program returns to Sc10, and steps Sc10 to Sc14 are performed, updating the set value by incrementing it by 1 (if the set value after increment exceeds 6, it is updated to 1), and the program waits again until operation of the reset/set switch 38 or start switch 7 is detected (Sc15, Sc16).

If the start switch 7 is detected in Sc16, the process waits until the setting key switch 37 is detected as OFF (Sc17). When the setting key switch 37 is detected as OFF, the setting value of the A register is confirmed and stored in RAM 161c (Sc18), the value of the output buffer of the setting value display 24 is cleared (Sc19), a setting change end command indicating the end of the setting change process is sent to the performance control unit 151 (Sc20), and a one-time interrupt wait process is performed (Sc21). This executes the timer interrupt process (main) once, clearing the setting value of the setting value display 24. Next, the size of the area in RAM 161c to be initialized when the setting change is completed (the setting change completion initialization area) is set (Sc22), and the process proceeds to main processing. As described below, in the main processing, the area of the specified size up to the final address to be initialized is first initialized. After the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to main processing, where the setting change completion initialization area in the internal RAM area is initialized.

Returning to FIG. 64, if it is determined in Sa15 that the reset/setting switch 38 is not in the ON state, the stack pointer is restored to the state stored in RAM 161c at the time of power outage (Sa16), a gaming machine installation information command is sent to the medal count control board 17 (Sa17), and a restoration command indicating that the main control unit 161 has restored is sent to the performance control unit 151 (Sa18), and the port input process is performed twice in succession (Sa19, Sa20).

Port input processing is a process that updates input status data related to the input status of the detection signals of various switches input to the parallel input port (input data indicating the current input status of the various switches, confirmed data indicating that the current and previous input data are the same, and edge data indicating that the confirmed data has changed from the previous time). Port input buffers 0-2 that store input status data of various switches are provided in a designated area of the RAM area within RAM 161c, and the input status data of various switches updated by port input processing is stored in designated bits of the port input buffers predetermined for each type. In port input processing, the input status data is set to input ports 0-2 of the parallel input port.

The detected states (ON or OFF) of various switches are used as input data and stored in designated bits of the port input buffer. The detected states (ON or OFF) from the previous and current port input processes are compared. If the current and previous input data are the same, the determined data is updated to indicate the detected state of the current input data. If the current and previous input data are different, the previous determined data is maintained. The current and previous determined data are compared. If the determined data changes from OFF to ON, ON edge data indicating that the determined data has changed from OFF to ON is stored in designated bits of port input buffers 0-2. If the determined data changes from ON to OFF, OFF edge data indicating that the determined data has changed from ON to OFF is stored in designated bits of port input buffers 0-2. The input data, determined data, and edge data of various switches stored in the port input buffers can be referenced by both internal and external programs.

Furthermore, by performing the port input process twice consecutively during the initial setting process, input status data relating to the input status of the detection signals of the various switches is created based on the input status of the various switches after the initial setting process, i.e., the input status of the various switches after power supply to the slot machine 2 is resumed, when the port input process is subsequently performed. This prevents unintended input conditions from being identified. Furthermore, the port input process may be configured to create finalized data based on input data acquired through three or more port input processes (e.g., input data from the current, previous, and previous-previous times). In such a configuration, by performing the port input process consecutively in the initial setting process one less time than the number of port input processes required to create finalized data, input status data can be created when the port input process is performed after the initial setting process based on the input status of the various switches after the initial setting process.

After port input processing is performed in Sa19 and Sa20, all registers are restored to the state they were in before power was cut off as stored in RAM 161c (Sa21), timer interrupts are enabled (Sa22), the initial setting process is terminated, and the process transitions to timer interrupt processing (main), after which the process returns to the main processing that was being executed before power supply to the slot machine 2 was cut off.

On the other hand, if it is determined in Sa14 that the RAM destruction diagnostic flag is set, i.e., if it is determined that the data in RAM 161c is abnormal, the process proceeds to Sa23, where a gaming machine installation information command is sent to the medal count control board 17, the timer interrupt is set to enabled (Sa24), a RAM abnormality error code indicating that there is an abnormality in RAM 161c is set in a specified register (Sa25), and error processing begins.

Error processing is a process that controls the system to an error state in which game progress is disabled. An error command that can identify the error code set in a specified register is sent to the presentation control unit 151, and the error code is set in a specified area of RAM 161c as an error flag that can be referenced by other processes (e.g., the sensor monitoring process described below). The system also controls the game support display 12 to display the error code. Thereafter, the system continues to control the error state, disabling game progress, until it is determined that the conditions for clearing the error state corresponding to the error code set in the specified register have been met. If a RAM abnormality error code is set in a specified register and the system transitions to an error state, turning on the power switch with the setting key switch 37 turned on will transition to a setting change state, initialize the data in RAM 161c, and set new settings, thereby disabling the error state. On the other hand, if the power switch is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 37, an abnormality in RAM 161c will be detected again, and the system will again enter an error state.

As such, after power supply to the slot machine 2 is started, the main control board 16 executes the startup process of the main control unit 161 shown in FIG. 62 and then executes a user program including initial setup processing. During the initial setup processing, the main control board 16 transitions to either timer interrupt processing (main), setting change processing, or error processing depending on the state of the main control board 16 when power supply to the slot machine 2 is started. When transitioning to these processes, a command capable of identifying the type of processing to transition to is sent to the presentation control unit 151. When transitioning to timer interrupt processing (main), i.e., when returning to the control state before power supply to the slot machine 2 was stopped, a return command is sent to the presentation control unit 151. When starting setting change processing and transitioning to the setting change state, a setting command (start) is sent to the presentation control unit 151. When starting error processing and transitioning to the error state due to an abnormality in RAM 161c, an error command is sent to the presentation control unit 151.

Furthermore, after transitioning from the initial setting process to the setting change process, the main control board 16 passes through the setting change state and returns to a state in which the game can be played. When returning to the state in which the game can be played, it sends a setting command (end) to the performance control unit 151, which can specify that the setting change state has ended, but it does not send a return command. Furthermore, after transitioning to error processing due to an abnormality in RAM 161c, the main control board 16 is transitioned to the setting change process as described above, the error state is cleared, and the game is returned to a state in which the game can be played. Even when the error processing is terminated and the game is returned to a state in which the game can be played, it does not send a return command to the performance control unit 151.

In this embodiment, when power is turned on, the process of determining whether data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area of RAM 161c has been corrupted is performed in the external RAM initialization process, which is an external program, thereby reducing the size of the internal program. In this embodiment, the external RAM initialization process calculates RAM parity, which is the exclusive OR of the data stored in RAM 161c, and determines whether RAM 161c has been corrupted by determining whether the RAM parity is a normal value. However, other methods of determining whether RAM 161c has been corrupted may also be used, such as calculating checksums for multiple areas and determining whether the checksum before power loss was a normal value.

In addition, in this embodiment, if it is determined that data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area in RAM 161c has been corrupted by an external program, the external RAM area is initialized before returning to the internal program, and the internal RAM area is initialized again after returning to the internal program, thereby reducing the amount of switching between internal and external programs.

In addition, in this embodiment, the internal RAM area includes an internal stack area where data is saved in response to control commands from the internal program. When power is turned on, a process is performed to determine whether data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area has been corrupted. When an external program is called from an internal program, data is saved to a temporary stack area in the internal RAM area, rather than the internal stack area. This prevents data saved to the internal stack area when an external program is called when power is turned on from changing the data in the internal stack area before power was turned off.

In addition, the process for determining whether data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area is corrupted is performed on the area including the temporary stack area, making it possible to determine whether all data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area is corrupted, and the process for making the determination does not become complicated due to the division of the areas.

In addition, when determining whether data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area has been corrupted, the determination can be made for areas that do not include the temporary stack area. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether data at the time of power outage has been corrupted.

In addition, if the external program determines that data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area of RAM 161c has been corrupted, the temporary stack area is not initialized when the internal RAM area is initialized, and the data in the temporary stack area set after power-on is maintained as is. Furthermore, the next time power is turned on, when the external program is called to determine whether data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area has been corrupted, the same data is saved in the temporary stack area. Therefore, the data in the temporary stack area at the time of power loss can be matched with the data used to determine whether data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area has been corrupted the next time power is turned on.

In addition, the diagnostic data (RAM parity) used to determine whether data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area is corrupted is created by the external program, reducing the size of the internal program.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, it is possible to transition to a setting change state in which a setting value is set. In connection with the transition to the setting change state, the main control unit 161 initializes RAM 161c and initializes the control state. Also, when the power is turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON state without turning the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, RAM 161c is initialized and the control state is initialized, so the control state can be initialized without transitioning to the setting change state.

Furthermore, if an error state is entered due to a RAM abnormality, the setting key switch 37 can be turned ON and the power can be turned ON again to enter a setting change state in which new setting values are set, allowing the machine to enter a playable state. However, if an error state is entered due to a RAM abnormality and the setting key switch 37 is not turned ON and the power is turned ON with the reset/setting switch 38 turned ON, the machine will not enter a playable state, ensuring that new setting values are set if a data abnormality occurs.

In addition, if the game enters an error state due to a RAM abnormality, and the setting key switch 37 is not turned ON, but the reset/setting switch 38 is turned ON and the power is turned on, the game will not transition to a playable state, but the control state will be initialized. Even if the game does not transition to a playable state due to a data abnormality, the control state can be initialized by turning the reset/setting switch 38 ON and turning the power on.

The machine also has a RAM clear permission flag that is set when the machine is not controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality and is cleared when the machine is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality. When the power is turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON position rather than the setting key switch 37 in the ON position, it determines whether the RAM clear permission flag is set, and if the RAM clear permission flag is set, it is possible to transition to a playable state. Therefore, even if an abnormality has occurred in the data, turning on the power with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON position will not result in the machine transitioning to a playable state.

In addition, when a play stop condition is met, the machine is controlled to an error state due to a play stop error, which makes it impossible to continue playing. In the case of an error state due to a play stop error, if the power is turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON position rather than the setting key switch 37 in the ON position, the control state can be initialized and the machine can transition to a playable state. By turning on the power with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON position, the control state is initialized, thereby canceling the error state due to a play stop error.

[Main processing]
FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating the control content of the main processing performed by the main control board 16. The main processing is repeatedly executed for each unit of play (one game). One cycle of the main processing corresponds to one unit of play. The main processing is included in the in-capacity program and includes multiple processes. As explained above, in the main processing shown in FIG. 67, the process name corresponding to the out-of-capacity program call process ends with the words "(out-of-capacity)."

As shown in FIG. 67, the main processing first initializes an area of the specified size up to the final address to be initialized in the internal RAM area (Sd1). The final address to be initialized is the final address of area E in the internal RAM area, and an area of the specified size up to the final address of area E will be initialized. When transitioning from setting change processing, the size of the area to be initialized at the end of setting change is specified, so the area of the internal RAM area at the end of setting change will be initialized. Furthermore, at the end of BB, the size of the area to be initialized at the end of BB is specified, so the area of the internal area to be initialized at the end of BB is initialized. Furthermore, at the end of one game, the size of the area to be initialized at the end of one game is specified, so the area of the internal area to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized.

Next, the RAM clear permission flag is set to ON (Sd2), and a game end command transmission process is performed to send a game end command to the presentation control unit 151 that can identify the end of one game (Sd3). The main control unit 161 notifies the presentation control unit 151 of the end of the game by sending a game end command based on the fact that the game has ended due to the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the previous game.

Next, the RT information output process included in the out-of-capacity program is performed (Sb4). In the RT information output process, a test signal is sent so that RT information indicating the RT status of the slot machine 2 can be confirmed by a test device installed outside the slot machine. Then, multiple interrupt wait process is performed (Sd5). The multiple interrupt wait process is performed to ensure the output time of the information output in the RT information output process. In other words, the main control unit 161 performs the multiple interrupt wait process to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time. The multiple interrupt wait process is also referred to as delay process. As a result, the main control unit 161 generates a test signal when the previous game ends, and then waits for a predetermined period of time. This ensures that external devices, such as test boards, reliably receive the test signal, preventing information discrepancies from occurring between the external device and the main control unit 161.

Then, the game start waiting process, which will be explained later (Sd6), is performed, and processing is carried out from the end of control of the previous game until the start of the next game. In the game start waiting process, acceptance of bet setting begins, processing is carried out to set the bet according to the bet setting operation, and processing is carried out to start the next game when operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the specified number of bets set.

Then, an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a win is permitted (internal lottery) (Sd7). In the internal lottery process, an internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not a win is permitted (i.e., whether or not a display result is permitted to be derived) based on a preset setting value (1-6) in the slot machine 2 and a random number value for the internal lottery obtained simultaneously with the start of play upon detection of the start switch 7.

Next, the main control unit 161 performs ball payout control pre-processing, which controls ball payout at the start of play (Sd8). The ball payout control pre-processing is pre-processing for controlling ball payout within the advantageous zone.

After that, after the AT lottery and other processes are executed, the following processes are performed in sequence: performance control processing (Sd9), test signal generation processing (Sd10), control status command group transmission processing (Sd11), and freeze control execution processing (Sd12).

The performance control process sets performance flags that the main control board 16 references when controlling performance. The test signal generation process corresponds to the out-of-capacity program call process. In the test signal generation process, a test signal is sent so that information indicating the control status of the slot machine 2 can be checked by a test device installed outside the slot machine. The information indicating the control status of the slot machine 2 includes the lottery results of the internal lottery process in Sd7.

In the control state command group transmission process, a control state command group containing multiple commands that can identify various control states at the start of a game is transmitted to the performance control unit 151. In other words, the main control unit 161 outputs information regarding the results of the internal lottery and information regarding the game state to the performance control unit 151.

The freeze control execution process checks whether there is a request to perform freeze control, which delays game progress until a specified termination condition is met, and if there is a request, sets the type of freeze control and the timing to perform that freeze control in a specified area of RAM 161c, and executes freeze control based on the type of freeze control and execution timing of freeze control set in RAM 161c. In more detail, if freeze control is set to be performed, freeze control is executed to delay game control for a specified period of time.

Furthermore, when the freeze control type is set to one that involves an effect using reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter referred to as reel effect), an acceleration pattern for effect (for example, an acceleration pattern that rotates the reels in a direction different from the rotation of the reels in game, an acceleration pattern that starts rotation in the same direction as the rotation of the reels in game at a speed slower than the rotation of the reels in game, an acceleration pattern that vibrates the reels, etc.) is set in a specified area of RAM 161c as the excitation pattern for exciting reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and control is performed so that the reel effect is performed during the period in which freeze control is being performed.

Then, multiple interrupt wait processing is executed (Sd13). This multiple interrupt wait processing is executed to ensure the output time of the information output by the test signal generation processing. In other words, the main control unit 161 executes the multiple interrupt wait processing to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time. The multiple interrupt wait processing in Sd13 and the multiple interrupt wait processing in Sd5 are common processes. That is, the main control unit 161 executes the same multiple interrupt wait processing when the start switch 7 is operated to start the reels spinning, and when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated to end the game. This standardizes the delay processing performed at the start and end of the game, thereby reducing storage capacity. In this embodiment, the execution of the multiple interrupt wait processing in Sd5 causes a delay of approximately 130 milliseconds (0.13 seconds).

Furthermore, in the commonly executed multiple interrupt wait process, the process of determining whether or not to control the state of the slot machine 2 to an error state is not executed. The process of determining whether or not to control the state to an error state is, for example, the error check process shown in Sd29. This allows the main control unit 161 to prevent discrepancies from occurring between the information of the test signal sent to the test board and the information of the slot machine 2 that has entered an error state, which would occur if the slot machine 2 were controlled to an error state during the delay process.

After performing the multiple interrupt wait processing in Sd13, the main control unit 161 references a single game time management timer set in a predetermined area of RAM 161c to measure the elapsed time from the start of reel rotation in the previous game (Sd14), and determines based on the single game time management timer whether the specified time for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of reel rotation in the previous game (Sd15). At this time, the main control unit 161 determines whether the specified time for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, taking into account that the multiple interrupt wait processing is performed in Sd13. Depending on the timing of operation of the start switch 7, the main control unit 161 executes the multiple wait processing at a timing when the multiple interrupt wait processing ends before the specified time for one game (4.1 seconds) has elapsed. More specifically, if the start switch 7 is operated at a timing when the multiple interrupt wait process can be executed before 3.97 seconds have elapsed since the start of reel rotation in the previous game, the main control unit 161 will begin executing the multiple interrupt wait process before at least 3.97 seconds have elapsed.

This makes it possible to properly determine whether 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the reels began spinning in the previous game until the reels can begin spinning in the next game, without including the 0.13 seconds that occur due to the delay processing. In other words, the main control unit 161 executes the reel spin start command transmission process in a predetermined game after 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the start switch 7 was operated in the game prior to the predetermined game. Furthermore, after executing the delay processing, the main control unit 161 executes the process of Sd15, which determines whether the specified time for one game has elapsed. In other words, the main control unit 161 executes the delay processing so that it ends before the specified time for one game ends.

If it is determined that the specified time for one game has not elapsed, the process waits until the specified time for one game has elapsed based on the single game time management timer, and after the specified time for one game has elapsed based on the single game time management timer, the process sets the single game time management timer to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) and newly starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of reel rotation (Sd16), and performs a reel rotation start command transmission process to transmit to the performance control unit 151 a reel rotation start command that can be specified to start rotation control of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (Sd17). On the other hand, if it is determined in Sd15 that the specified time for one game has elapsed, the process immediately proceeds to Sd16 to Sd17. Furthermore, after a predetermined value is set in Sd16, the timer for managing one game's time is decremented every predetermined time, and becomes 0 when the specified time for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of reel rotation in a game. Whether the specified time for one game has elapsed can be determined based on whether the timer for managing one game's time is 0 or not.

In this way, in this embodiment, the main control unit 161 executes the test signal generation process in Sd10, and then executes the multiple interrupt wait process in Sd13, which delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time. The main control unit 161 also executes the reel rotation start process shown in Sd19, which starts the rotation of the reels after the predetermined period of delay caused by the multiple interrupt wait process in Sd13. As a result, the main control unit 161 generates a test signal at the start of game, and then enters a waiting state for a predetermined period of time due to the delay process, thereby ensuring that external devices including, for example, test boards reliably receive the test signal and preventing information discrepancies from occurring between the external devices and the main control unit 161.

Furthermore, the main control unit 161 executes the control state command group transmission process shown in Sd11, which outputs information regarding the internal lottery results and information regarding the game status to the presentation control unit 151, and then executes the reel rotation start process shown in Sd19. As a result, the main control unit 161 generates a test signal when game play starts, outputs information regarding the internal lottery results to the presentation control unit 151, and then enters a waiting state for a predetermined period of time. This ensures, for example, that external devices including test boards reliably receive the test signal and that the presentation control unit 151 reliably receives information regarding the internal lottery results, preventing discrepancies in information between external devices, the main control unit 161, and the presentation control unit 151.

After the reel rotation start command transmission process is performed in Sd17, a normal acceleration pattern that controls the rotation of the reels at a predetermined gaming speed is set in a predetermined area of RAM 161c as the excitation pattern for controlling the excitation of reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (Sd18), and a reel rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of the reels by controlling the excitation of reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R based on the excitation pattern set in RAM 161c (Sd19). Next, external signal processing is performed to send information such as the gaming machine status to an external device such as the hall management computer (hall computer) or a hall server that performs security management (Sd20).

Then, the navigation notification process is performed (Sd21). During the navigation notification process, the automatic transmission (AT) is controlled, and if a role to be notified is won in the internal lottery, the navigation number that can identify a stop pattern that is advantageous to the player according to the role to be notified is controlled to be displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12. However, if the automatic transmission (AT) is not controlled, the navigation number is not displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12.

The reel stop initial setting process (Sd22) is performed, which sets various information necessary for reel stop control according to the RT status and the results of the internal lottery. Then, the freeze control execution control process (Sd23) is performed, and if freeze control is set to be performed at that timing, the set type of freeze control is performed.

After the freeze control process in Sd23 is performed, the reel stop control process (Sd24) is performed to stop the reels. The reel stop control process determines whether the reels under rotation control are rotating at a predetermined constant speed. If any reels are not rotating at a constant speed, a reel error is detected, and an excitation pattern is set for the corresponding reel to accelerate to a constant speed, controlling all reels under rotation control to rotate at a constant speed. On the other hand, if all reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed, the process enables acceptance of stop operations for the reels under rotation control and waits for a stop operation via the stop switch. Then, when a valid stop operation is detected for a reel for which a stop operation is enabled (ON edge data is detected for a stop switch for which a stop operation is enabled), the process performs reel stop control to stop the reel for which a valid stop operation has been performed at a predetermined stop position based on information set in the reel stop initial setting process. This reel stop control is repeatedly performed for the reels under rotation control until all reels have stopped rotating, completing the reel stop process.

After the reel stop process is completed, freeze control process is performed (Sd25), and if freeze control is set to be performed at that timing, the set type of freeze control is performed.

Then, the RT state check process (Sd26) and winning determination process (Sd27) are performed. The RT state check process determines whether a combination of RT transition symbols that will cause a transition to the RT state has stopped on the reels, and if a combination of RT transition symbols has stopped, the current RT state set in a specified area of RAM 161c is updated to the RT state corresponding to the combination of RT transition symbols. The winning determination process determines whether an illegal win has occurred based on the internal lottery results and the symbol combination that has stopped on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

After the winning determination process in Sd27 is performed, the game stop determination process, which corresponds to the out-of-capacity program call process, is performed (Sd28).

The stop-play determination process determines whether the increase in the number of medals awarded to a player has exceeded an upper limit after the number of medals awarded to that player has started to increase. For example, a net increase counter that counts only the + range is provided, i.e., a counter that subtracts the number of medals inserted and adds the number of medals paid out, and corrects the updated value to 0 if it falls below 0, and determines whether the value of the net increase counter has exceeded the upper limit. Then, if it is determined that the increase in the number of medals awarded to a player has exceeded the upper limit after the number of medals awarded to that player has started to increase, a stop-play flag is set in the extra RAM area.

After the stop-play determination process is completed, an error check process is performed (Sd29), and post-ball-out control processing is performed to control the number of balls released at the end of the game (Sd30). Post-ball-out control processing is post-processing to control the number of balls released within the advantageous zone.

Then, the replay LED is controlled to the OFF state (lights off) (Sd31), the replay in progress flag indicating that a replay is in progress is cleared (Sd32), the display of the navigation number on the game support display 12 is cleared (Sd33), an end command is sent to the medal count control board 17 (Sd34), freeze control execution processing is performed (Sd35), and if freeze control is set to be performed at that timing, the set type of freeze control is performed.

Then, a reel information command (Sd36) and a favorable zone command (Sd37) are sent to the medal count control board 17. After that, external signal processing is performed to transmit information such as the gaming machine status to an external device, such as the hall management computer (hall computer) or a hall server responsible for security management (Sd38). Further, game end setting processing is performed (Sd39), which determines whether a replay symbol combination has stopped on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. If a replay symbol combination has stopped, processing is performed to set the number of bets for replay in the next game (in this embodiment, the replay medal counter, set in a designated area of RAM 161c, is set to 3 as the number of replay medals), set a replay in progress flag in a designated area of RAM 161c, and control the replay LED to the ON state (lit state). The game end setting processing determines whether the number of medals acquired during the favorable zone has reached 2,400 (limiter condition). At this time, if the number of medals acquired during the advantageous period reaches 2,400, the advantageous period will end and control will be given to the normal period.

Then, a payout pulse command is sent to the medal count control board 17 (Sd40), and a jackpot command is sent (Sd41). After that, the size of the area in RAM 161c to be initialized at the end of the game is set (Sd42). As a result, the area initialized at the end of one game is initialized in Sd2 of the next game.

Next, it is determined whether a play stop flag is set in the external RAM area (Sd43). If it is determined in Sd43 that the play stop flag is not set, the process returns to Sd1. As a result, the main control unit 161 returns to processing at Sd2 and repeats the process from Sd2 again. Once the main processing has completed one cycle, the processing related to the control of one unit of play is completed, and the main processing is repeatedly executed for each unit of play.

On the other hand, if it is determined in Sd43 that the play stop flag is set, that is, if it is determined in Sd28 that the number of medals awarded to the player has started to increase and that the increase in the number of medals awarded has exceeded the upper limit, a play stop error code is set (Sd46) and error processing is initiated, rendering the game unable to continue. In error processing resulting from the setting of a play stop error code, turning on the power switch with the setting key switch 37 turned ON transitions the game to a setting change state, initializes the data in RAM 161c, and sets new setting values; or turning on the power switch with the reset/setting switch 38 turned ON while the setting key switch 37 is OFF transitions the game to a setting change state, initializes the data in RAM 161c, and clears the error state. On the other hand, turning on the power switch without turning on the setting key switch 37 or reset/setting switch 38 again results in an error state.

As a result, the slot machine 2 in this embodiment can prevent excessive medals from being paid out from the slot machine due to fraudulent operations. Furthermore, if the number of medals awarded increases, it could lead to a situation that is likely to stimulate excessive gambling. Therefore, by setting an upper limit and restricting the number of medals awarded, it is possible to prevent the slot machine 2 from reaching a state that stimulates excessive gambling.

As shown in Figure 67, when the play stop flag is set, the process of transitioning to an error state due to a play stop error is performed at the end of all processes, such as the external output signal process (Sd38) that notifies external devices such as hall computers whether or not the machine is in a favorable zone, and the game end setting process (Sd39) that determines whether or not the number of medals earned in the favorable zone has reached 2,400 (limiter condition). In this way, once the number of medals awarded to the player begins to increase, the process of disabling game progress when the increase in the number of medals awarded exceeds the upper limit is performed at the end of the main process. Therefore, the game end setting process is performed before the machine is controlled to a state where game progress is disabled. Therefore, if the limiter condition is met, the machine is controlled to a normal zone, and then the machine can be controlled to a state where game progress is disabled.

In addition, because Sd38 processes external output signals before controlling the game to a state where game progress is disabled, it is possible to control the game to a state where game progress is disabled after informing the external device whether or not the game is being controlled to a favorable zone. Therefore, even if the number of medals awarded to the player starts to increase and the increase in the number of medals awarded exceeds the upper limit, the main control unit 161 can disable game progress after appropriately processing information related to the favorable zone. This makes it possible to prevent inconsistencies from occurring regarding information related to the favorable zone after the disablement of game progress is lifted.

The main processing performed by the main control board 16 in this embodiment is included in the internal memory program and calls processing included in the external memory program, such as RT information output processing and test signal generation processing. When calling processing included in the external memory program, each time the processing of the corresponding external memory program is called, the calling internal memory program stores and saves the value of the flag register of the main control board 16 in the game stack area, and the called external memory program stores and saves the value of the stack pointer SP used in the internal memory program in the external RAM area, and stores and saves the values of all registers of the main control board 16 in the non-game stack area. Processing is then performed according to the called external memory program.

Furthermore, after processing the off-capacity program, the main control board 16 loads into the appropriate registers all register values that were saved to the non-play stack area at the start of the off-capacity program on the off-capacity program side, restoring the registers to the state they were in at the start of the off-capacity program. It also sets the stack pointer SP value stored in the off-capacity RAM area at the start of the off-capacity program to the stack pointer SP, restoring the stack pointer SP to the state it was in at the start of the off-capacity program. Furthermore, it loads into the appropriate flag register the flag register value that was stored in the play stack area before the off-capacity program was called on the calling on-capacity program side, restoring the registers to the state they were in before the off-capacity program was called.

In addition, when the main control board 16 performs various processes according to an external program, it calls the external program from the internal program using the above-mentioned CALLEX command or the like, performs various processes according to the external program, and returns to the internal program that called it when each process according to the external program is completed.

[Communication between control units]
The following describes communications between the performance control unit 151, main control unit 161, medal count control unit 171, and CU control unit 323. In this embodiment, the main control unit 161 is included in the main control board 16, and the medal count control unit 171 is included in the medal count control board 17. In a slot machine 2 in which the main control unit 161 and medal count control unit 171 are integrated, the following describes a configuration in which the medal count control unit 171 is included in the main control board 16 together with the main control unit 161.

Figure 68 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a card unit and slot machine when the main control unit 161 and medal count control unit 171 are integrated. As shown in Figure 68, the main control unit 161 includes both the medal count control unit 171 and the main control unit 161. In other words, the main control unit 161 and medal count control unit 171 are mounted on the same board. This eliminates the need to connect the main control unit 161 and medal count control unit 171 with a connector or the like, thereby improving security. Furthermore, the reduced number of parts reduces the likelihood of malfunctions occurring.

As shown in FIG. 68, the main control unit 161 is connected to the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the setting key switch 37, the reset/setting switch 38, the setting value display 24, the start switch 7, and the game auxiliary display 12. The main control unit 161 may also be configured to be connected to the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the setting key switch 37, the reset/setting switch 38, the setting value display 24, the start switch 7, and the game auxiliary display 12 via the medal count control unit 171. In other words, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the setting key switch 37, the reset/setting switch 38, the setting value display 24, the start switch 7, and the game auxiliary display 12 may be connected to the medal count control unit 171.

The medal count control unit 171 is also connected to the count button 10, RAM clear switch 293, and role ratio monitor 89. The medal count control unit 171 may be configured to be connected to the count button 10, RAM clear switch 293, and role ratio monitor 89 via the main control unit 161. The count button 10, RAM clear switch 293, and role ratio monitor 89 may also be connected to the main control unit 161.

Figure 69 is a diagram for explaining communication between the performance control unit 151, main control unit 161, medal count control unit 171, and CU control unit 323. As shown in Figure 69, when the main control unit 161 and medal count control unit 171 are integrated, the main control board 16 is equipped with the medal count control unit 171 and main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 comprises a first serial communication circuit SR1, a second serial communication circuit SR2, and a third serial communication circuit SR3. The first serial communication circuit SR1 to the third serial communication circuit SR3 are serial communication circuits equipped in the main control unit 161, which is realized as a control computer such as a microcomputer. The medal count control unit 171 comprises a fourth serial communication circuit SR4, a fifth serial communication circuit SR5, and a sixth serial communication circuit SR6. The fourth serial communication circuit SR4 to the sixth serial communication circuit SR6 are also serial communication circuits mounted on the medal count control unit 171, which is realized as a control computer such as a microcomputer.

The first serial communication circuit SR1 and third serial communication circuit SR3 of the main control unit 161 have transmission and reception functions. As shown in FIG. 69, the first serial communication circuit SR1 has a transmission terminal Tx1 and a reception terminal Rx1 as terminals for connecting to other devices. The first serial communication circuit SR1 also has a transmission buffer Tb1, which is a buffer for transmission, and a reception buffer Rb1, which is a buffer for reception. The third serial communication circuit SR3 also has a transmission terminal Tx3, a reception terminal Rx3, a transmission buffer Tb3, and a reception buffer Rb3.

On the other hand, the second serial communication circuit SR2 of the main control unit 161 has only the transmission function of both the transmission and reception functions. In other words, the second serial communication circuit SR2 is a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission. As shown in FIG. 69, the second serial communication circuit SR2 has only a transmission terminal Tx2 and a transmission buffer Tb2 as terminals for connecting to other devices. For this reason, the second serial communication circuit SR2 is configured so that it cannot receive signals (commands) from other devices. This makes it ideal for unidirectional signal transmission. In other words, the second serial communication circuit SR2 can be ideally used for communication between the main control unit 161 and the performance control unit 151, where unidirectional signal transmission is required.

The fifth serial communication circuit SR5 and sixth serial communication circuit SR6 of the medal count control unit 171 have both transmission and reception functions, similar to the first serial communication circuit SR1 and third serial communication circuit SR3. Specifically, the fifth serial communication circuit SR5 has a transmission terminal Tx5, a reception terminal Rx5, a transmission buffer Tb5, and a reception buffer Rb5. Furthermore, the sixth serial communication circuit SR6 has a transmission terminal Tx6, a reception terminal Rx6, a transmission buffer Tb6, and a reception buffer Rb6. Furthermore, the fourth serial communication circuit SR4 of the medal count control unit 171 has only a transmission function, similar to the second serial communication circuit of the main control unit 161. Specifically, the fourth serial communication circuit SR4 has a transmission terminal Tx4 and a transmission buffer Tb4.

As shown in FIG. 69, the main control unit 161 and medal count control unit 171 communicate signals using the first serial communication circuit SR1 and the fifth serial communication circuit SR5. As described above, bidirectional commands such as insertion commands and settlement commands are transmitted between the medal count control unit 171 and the main control unit 161. In other words, communication between the medal count control unit 171 and the main control unit 161 includes bidirectional communication. In this way, bidirectional communication is achieved by using the first serial communication circuit SR1 and the fifth serial communication circuit SR5, which have both transmission and reception functions.

In addition, because communication between the medal count control unit 171 and the CU control unit 323 is bidirectional, the medal count control unit 171 uses a sixth serial communication circuit SR6, which has both transmission and reception functions, to communicate with the connection terminal board 1000. The medal count control unit 171 is connected to the CU control unit 323 via the connection terminal board 1000. In addition, the frame side information command is a command that is continuously sent in one direction from the medal count control board 17 to the main control board 16, and does not have bidirectionality. The medal count control unit 171 sends the frame side information command to the third serial communication circuit SR3 of the main control unit 161 using the fourth serial communication circuit SR4, which has only a transmission function. The third serial communication circuit SR3 sends a test signal to the test board 300. In this way, in a slot machine 2 where the main control unit 161 and medal count control unit 171 are integrated, one-way communication is performed using a serial communication circuit that has only a transmission function, and two-way communication is performed using a serial communication circuit that has both a transmission and a reception function. This makes it possible to use separate serial communication circuits for one-way command transmission and two-way command transmission, allowing for optimal data communication.

The test board 300 is configured to convert various types of test signals into specific signals and output them to the test device. As a result, by using the test board 300, the slot machine does not need to generate specific signals tailored to the test device, and via the test board 300, the test device can receive test signals from various types of slot machines. This eliminates the need to generate test signals tailored to a specified test device for each slot machine.

In addition, the main control unit 161 receives bidirectional commands, such as input commands, from the medal count control unit 171 using the receiving terminal Rx1 of the first serial communication circuit SR1, and transmits response commands using the transmitting terminal Tx1 of the first serial communication circuit SR1. This allows the sending and receiving of bidirectional commands between the main control unit 161 and the medal count control unit 171 to be completed using only the first serial communication circuit SR1, thereby improving security.

Furthermore, as explained in FIG. 41, when the main control unit 161 receives a bidirectional command that is sent irregularly, such as an insertion command, it sends a response command to the medal count control unit 171 indicating that the command has been received. This allows the medal count control unit 171 to determine that the insertion command, etc., has been successfully received by the main control unit 161.

Furthermore, the main control unit 161 receives frame side information commands from the medal count control unit 171 using the receiving terminal Rx3 of the third serial communication circuit SR3, which is different from the first serial communication circuit SR1. This allows the main control unit 161 to receive commands from the medal count control unit 171 using the third serial communication circuit SR3 even if an abnormality occurs in the first serial communication circuit SR1.

Furthermore, communication of frame side information commands that are sent periodically is carried out using the fourth serial communication circuit SR4 of the medal count control unit 171 and the third serial communication circuit SR3 of the main control unit 161. On the other hand, communication of input commands and the like that does not take place periodically uses the fifth serial communication circuit SR5 rather than the fourth serial communication circuit SR4 in the medal count control unit 171, and the first serial communication circuit SR1 rather than the third serial communication circuit SR3 in the main control unit 161. This prevents the frame side information commands that are sent periodically from overlapping with input commands and the like that are sent based on player operation, causing an overflow.

Next, we will explain the capacity of the transmit buffers. The transmit buffers Tb2, Tb4 of the second serial communication circuit SR2 and the fourth serial communication circuit SR4, which are used for one-way communication, are 128 bytes. On the other hand, the transmit buffers Tb1, Tb3, Tb5, and Tb6 of the first serial communication circuit SR1, the third serial communication circuit SR3, the fifth serial communication circuit SR5, and the sixth serial communication circuit SR6, which are used for two-way communication, are 64 bytes. This makes it less likely for the serial communication circuits for one-way communication to overflow, even when many commands are transmitted.

Next, we will explain the memory areas included in the internal function register area for setting the functions of each serial communication circuit. The internal function register area of RAM 161c includes an area for setting the functions of the first serial communication circuit SR1 to the third serial communication circuit SR3, which are installed as functions of the main control unit 161, which is a control computer such as a microcomputer. Similarly, the internal function register area (not shown) of RAM 171c includes an area for setting the functions of the fourth serial communication circuit SR4 to the sixth serial communication circuit SR6, which are installed as functions of the medal count control unit 171, which is a control computer such as a microcomputer.

The capacity of the function setting area of a serial communication circuit used for one-way communication is smaller than the capacity of the function setting area of a serial communication circuit used for two-way communication. This eliminates the need for complex settings in the serial communication circuit for one-way communication, simplifying the settings. In other words, the capacity of the function setting area of the second serial communication circuit SR2 in RAM 161c is smaller than the capacity of the function setting area of the first serial communication circuit SR1 in RAM 161c.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 69, the main control unit 161, medal count control unit 171, performance control unit 151, and connection terminal board 1000 are connected via a serial communication circuit. This makes it easier to handle the wiring pattern. In other words, compared to parallel communication, the number of wires can be reduced, making it easier to arrange the wiring pattern.

[Storage area and data reading and writing]
Next, we will explain technical matters related to reading data from the ROM 161b and RAM 161c of the main control unit 161 and writing data to the RAM 161c. Note that in this embodiment, we will explain using the ROM 161b and RAM 161c of the main control unit 161 as an example, but the technical matters explained below can also be applied to the ROM 171b and RAM 171c of the medal count control unit 171 and the ROM 151b and RAM 151c of the performance control unit 151.

The memory area used by the main control unit 161 is assigned a 2-byte address for each 1-byte area. In particular, as shown in Figure 70, the working area (so-called work area) of the memory area of RAM 161c used by the main control unit 161 for user programs is composed of a first area (F000H-F0FFH) with a higher address of F0H, a second area (F100H-F1FFH) with a higher address of F1H, a third area (F200H-F2FFH) with a higher address of F2H, and a fourth area (F300H-F3FFH) with a higher address of F3H. As shown in Figure 60, the first and second areas are internal RAM areas, the third area is an unused area, and the fourth area is an external RAM area.

In this embodiment, the area starting from the first area of the first to fourth areas with consecutive addresses in RAM 161c is assigned as the work area (work) of the main control unit 161, making it easier to manage the work area.

Furthermore, the initial value of the special register (Q register) used in the aforementioned LDQ instruction is set to F0H, the upper address of the first area, when the main control unit 161 is started and when the main control unit 161 starts a user program. This makes it easier to access the top area of the main control unit 161's working area in RAM 161c when reading data from RAM 161c or writing data to RAM 161c using the LDQ instruction.

In addition, since an unused area is allocated to the third area with an upper address of F2H, it is easy to identify the unused area of RAM 161c from the upper address value.

In addition, when initializing data in RAM 161c, instructions such as LDQ, which specify an address using a pre-set upper address in a special register (Q register), are not used, and the address to be initialized in RAM 161c can be identified from the code.

In addition, when calculating data (such as the RAM parity mentioned above) to determine whether RAM 161c is corrupted, instructions such as LDQ that specify an address are not used, using a higher address that is preset in a special register (Q register). This makes it possible to identify the address of the data used to calculate data to diagnose corruption of RAM 161c from the code.

In addition, a stack area for saving data is allocated to RAM 161c, and in this extra-capacity stack area, data is saved from the final address of the fourth area, whose upper address is F3, toward the first address. This means that the upper addresses of the data saved in the extra-capacity stack area do not change.

In addition, although the internal stack area is not the final address of the second area whose upper address is F1, data is saved from an address close to the final address towards the first address. This prevents the upper addresses of the data saved in the internal stack area from changing. In addition, data may also be saved in the internal stack area from the final address towards the first address of an area whose upper address is a predetermined value (for example, the second area whose upper address is F1H), and even in this configuration, the upper addresses of the data saved in the internal stack area do not change.

In addition, all payout management data used when communicating with the medal count control unit 171 is assigned to the second area with the upper address F1H, making it easy to manage payout management data related to control of communication with the medal count control unit 171.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 161 can execute a continuous area transfer process that, by specifying the start address of the source in ROM 161b or RAM 161c, the start address of the destination in RAM 161c, and the number of transfers, reads data stored in a continuous source memory area that is equal to the number of transfers from the start address of the source, and writes the read data from the continuous source memory area to a continuous destination memory area that is equal to the number of transfers from the start address of the destination.

By calling the continuous area transfer process with different source start addresses and transfer counts changed, it is possible to read data from different ranges of continuous memory areas from the source using a common process. In this embodiment, a common continuous area transfer process is used when reading data from different ranges of continuous memory areas from the source.

In addition, by changing the specified destination start address and the number of transfers and calling the continuous area transfer process, it is possible to write data to different ranges of destination continuous memory areas using a common process.In this embodiment, a common continuous area transfer process is used when writing data to different ranges of destination continuous memory areas.

Continuous area transfer processing includes continuous transfer processing A, which reads and writes data using an LD command that specifies both a high-order address and a low-order address, and continuous transfer processing B, which reads and writes data using an LDQ command that specifies only a low-order address.

Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the control details of continuous area transfer process A performed by the main control unit 161. Continuous transfer process A is a process called from the main routine or subroutine, and first sets the number of transfers in the B register (Se1), sets the upper and lower addresses of the transfer source in the HL register (Se2), and sets the upper and lower addresses of the transfer destination in the DE register (Se3).

Next, the LD instruction (LD A, (HL)) reads the data from the source address set in the HL register into the A register (Se4), and the LD instruction (LD (DE), A) writes the data from the A register to the destination address area set in the DE register (Se5).

Then, the source address in the HL register is incremented by 1 (Se6), the destination address in the DE register is incremented by 1 (Se7), the number of transfers in the B register is decremented by 1 (Se8), and it is determined whether the number of transfers in the B register is 0 (Se9).

If it is determined in Se9 that the number of transfers in the B register is not 0, the process returns to Se4 and steps Se4 through Se9 are performed again, repeating steps Se4 through Se9 until it is determined in Se9 that the number of transfers in the B register is 0.

If it is determined in Se9 that the transfer count in register B is 0, continuous area transfer process A ends and the process returns to the calling process.

In this way, in continuous area transfer process A, by specifying the source start address in ROM 161b or RAM 161c, the destination start address in RAM 161c, and the number of transfers, data is read from the source address and stored in register A, the read data from register A is written to the destination address area, and then the source address and destination address are each incremented by 1, this process is repeated for the number of transfers, thereby reading data stored in continuous source memory areas equal to the number of transfers from the source start address, and writing the read data from the continuous source memory areas to continuous destination memory areas equal to the number of transfers from the destination start address.

Figure 72 is a flowchart showing the control details of continuous area transfer process B performed by the main control unit 161. Continuous transfer process B is a process called from the main routine or subroutine, and first sets the number of transfers in the B register (Sf1), sets the lower address of the transfer source start address in the C register (Sf2), and sets the lower address of the transfer destination start address in the D register (Sf3).

Next, the LDQ instruction (LDQ A, (C)) reads the source address data, consisting of the upper address set in the Q register and the lower address of the source set in the C register, into the A register (Sf4), and the LDQ instruction (LDQ (D), A) writes the data in the A register to the destination address area, consisting of the upper address set in the Q register and the lower address of the destination set in the D register (Sf5).

Then, the lower address of the transfer source in the C register is incremented by 1 (Sf6), the lower address of the transfer destination in the D register is incremented by 1 (Sf7), the number of transfers in the B register is decremented by 1 (Sf8), and it is determined whether the number of transfers in the B register is 0 (Sf9).

If it is determined in Sf9 that the number of transfers in the B register is not 0, the process returns to Sf4 and repeats steps Sf4 through Sf9 again, repeating steps Sf4 through Sf9 until it is determined in Sf9 that the number of transfers in the B register is 0.

If it is determined in step Sf9 that the transfer count in the B register is 0, the continuous area transfer process B ends and the process returns to the calling process.

In this way, in continuous area transfer process B, by specifying the lower address of the source start address in ROM 161b or RAM 161c, the lower address of the destination start address in RAM 161c, and the number of transfers, data is read from the source address consisting of the upper address of the Q register and the lower address of the source, read into the A register, and written to the destination address area consisting of the upper address of the Q register and the lower address of the destination.The source lower address and destination lower address are then each incremented by 1, and this process is repeated for the number of transfers.This read process reads data stored in continuous source memory areas that are equal to the number of transfers from the source start address, and writes the read data from the continuous source memory areas to continuous destination memory areas that are equal to the number of transfers from the destination start address.

By specifying two registers, such as the HL register or DE register, as the transfer destination using the LDQ command, the main control unit 161 can read two bytes of data stored in a special register (Q register) at an address specified by a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address, and at the address following that. By specifying two registers, such as the HL register or DE register, as the transfer source using the LDQ command, the main control unit 161 can write two bytes of data to an address specified by a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address, and at the address following that.

For example, as shown in FIG. 73, by specifying the HL register as the transfer destination with the LDQ instruction (LDQ HL, (k)) and specifying the lower address: k of the transfer source, data at an address consisting of the upper address set in the Q register and the specified lower address: k is read into the L register, and data at that address + 1 is read into the H register. In other words, 2 bytes of data are read from a 2-byte area of consecutive addresses into the HL register. Also, by specifying the HL register as the transfer source with the LDQ instruction (LDQ (k), HL) and specifying the lower address: k of the transfer destination, the data in the L register is written to the address area consisting of the upper address set in the Q register and the specified lower address: k, and the value of the H register is written to the address + 1 area. In other words, 2 bytes of data from the HL register are written to a 2-byte area of consecutive addresses.

In this way, in this embodiment, data in consecutive address areas can be read and written by using the consecutive area transfer process and LDQ command. However, the memory area used by the main control unit 161 consists of multiple areas with different upper addresses. When consecutive address areas are accessed across areas with different upper addresses, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult to determine the accessed address.

For this reason, in this embodiment, the source continuous memory area in which data to be read by continuous area transfer process B, which reads data using an LDQ command that specifies only a lower address, is stored is allocated to an area of RAM 161c that does not straddle the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address does not change.When data is read from the source continuous memory area by continuous area transfer process B, which is executed without specifying an upper address, the data is read from an area with the same upper address in both cases, preventing it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data will be obtained from during the continuous area transfer process.

In addition, even when data is read from consecutive addresses in ROM 161b, the source consecutive memory area in which the data to be read is stored by consecutive area transfer process B, which reads data using an LDQ command that specifies only the lower address, is allocated to an area in ROM 161b where the upper address does not change.When data is read from the source consecutive memory area by consecutive area transfer process B, which is executed without specifying the upper address, the data is read from an area with the same upper address in both cases, preventing it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data will be obtained from during the consecutive area transfer process.

In addition, when a source continuous memory area is assigned to an area of RAM 161c that straddles the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address changes midway, data from the source continuous memory area is read using continuous area transfer process A, which reads data using an LD command that specifies both the upper and lower addresses.When reading data from a source continuous memory area where the upper address changes midway, it is necessary to specify both the upper and lower addresses of the source continuous memory area, which prevents it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data will be obtained from during the continuous area transfer process.

Furthermore, when reading data from consecutive addresses in ROM 161b, if the source consecutive memory area is assigned to an area in ROM 161b where the upper address changes midway, the data from the source consecutive memory area is read using consecutive area transfer process A, which reads data using an LD command that specifies both the upper and lower addresses.When reading data from a source consecutive memory area where the upper address changes midway, it is necessary to specify both the upper and lower addresses of the source consecutive memory area, which prevents it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data will be obtained from during the consecutive area transfer process.

In this embodiment, by using contiguous area transfer process A, which reads data using an LD command that specifies both an upper and lower address, it is possible to assign the source contiguous memory area to an area of RAM 161c that straddles the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address changes along the way. However, whether using contiguous area transfer process A or contiguous area transfer process B, the source contiguous memory area may be assigned to an area of RAM 161c that does not straddle the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address does not change. With this configuration, when data is read from the source contiguous memory area by the contiguous area transfer process, the data is read from an area with the same upper address in both cases, preventing it from being difficult to determine which address the data is being obtained from during the contiguous area transfer process.

Furthermore, by using continuous area transfer process A, which reads data using an LD command that specifies both an upper address and a lower address, it is possible to assign the source continuous memory area to an area in ROM 161b where the upper address changes midway. However, whether using continuous area transfer process A or continuous area transfer process B, the source continuous memory area can also be assigned to an area in ROM 161b where the upper address does not change. With this configuration, when data is read from the source continuous memory area by the continuous area transfer process, the data is read from an area with the same upper address, preventing it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data is being obtained from during the continuous area transfer process.

In addition, in this embodiment, the destination continuous memory area to which data is written by continuous area transfer process B, which writes data using an LDQ command that specifies only a lower address, is allocated to an area of RAM 161c that does not straddle the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address does not change.When data is written to the destination continuous memory area by continuous area transfer process B, which is executed without specifying an upper address, the data is written to an area with the same upper address in both cases, preventing it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data will be written to during the continuous area transfer process.

In addition, when a destination consecutive memory area is assigned to an area of RAM 161c that straddles the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address changes midway, data is written to the destination consecutive memory area by consecutive area transfer process A, which writes data using an LD command that specifies both the upper and lower addresses.When writing data to a destination consecutive memory area where the upper address changes midway, it is necessary to specify both the upper and lower addresses of the destination consecutive memory area, which prevents it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data will be written to during the consecutive area transfer process.

In this embodiment, by using contiguous area transfer process A, which writes data using an LD command that specifies both an upper and lower address, it is possible to assign the destination contiguous memory area to an area of RAM 161c that straddles the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address changes along the way. However, whether using contiguous area transfer process A or contiguous area transfer process B, the destination contiguous memory area may be assigned to an area of RAM 161c that does not straddle the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address does not change. This configuration prevents the confusion of which address the data will be written to during the contiguous area transfer process, since the data is written to the same upper address when data is written to the source contiguous memory area using the contiguous area transfer process.

In addition, in this embodiment, by specifying two registers, such as the HL register or DE register, as the transfer destination using the LDQ instruction, it is possible to read two bytes of data stored at an address specified by a preset upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (the Q register) and at the address following that. However, when reading two bytes of data using the LDQ instruction, an address other than the final address of the first storage area of RAM 161c, the final address of the second storage area, the final address of the third storage area, or the final address of the fourth storage area is specified as the source address, i.e., an address other than the address of the last area of an area assigned a specific upper address. When reading two bytes of data using an LDQ instruction that specifies only a lower address as the source address, the two-byte area in which the source data is stored does not straddle areas with different upper addresses, and the two bytes of data are read from areas with the same upper address in both cases. This prevents the address from which the data will be obtained from being unclear when reading two bytes of data using the LDQ instruction.

In addition, when reading two bytes of data using the LDQ command, the source address is specified as an address other than the address of the last area of the area in ROM 161b assigned a specific upper address.When reading two bytes of data using an LDQ command that specifies only a lower address as the source address, the two-byte area in which the source data is stored does not straddle areas with different upper addresses, and the two bytes of data are read from areas with the same upper address in both cases.This prevents the address from which the data is obtained from becoming unclear when reading two bytes of data using the LDQ command.

In addition, in this embodiment, by specifying two registers, such as the HL register or DE register, as the transfer source using the LDQ instruction, it is possible to write two bytes of data to an address specified by a preset upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (the Q register) and to the address following that. However, when writing two bytes of data using the LDQ instruction, an address other than the final address of the first storage area of RAM 161c, the final address of the second storage area, the final address of the third storage area, or the final address of the fourth storage area is specified as the transfer destination address; that is, an address other than the address of the last area of an area assigned a specific upper address. When writing two bytes of data using an LDQ instruction that specifies only a lower address as the transfer destination address, the two-byte area in which the destination data is stored does not straddle areas with different upper addresses, and the two bytes of data are written to areas with the same upper address in both cases. This prevents confusion about which address the data will be written to when writing two bytes of data using the LDQ instruction.

Furthermore, for areas of RAM 161c that span the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., areas where the upper addresses change along the way, and where a source continuous memory area from which data is read by continuous area transfer process A is not assigned, the final address of the relevant area and the start address of the area following the relevant area (for example, if a source continuous memory area from which data is read by continuous area transfer process A is assigned to the first and second areas, the final address of the second area and the start address of the third area, and the final address of the third area and the start address of the fourth area) may be configured as unused areas, i.e., areas where no data used for control is stored and where 0 is always stored. By configuring in this way, when data is read by continuous area transfer process B, which reads data using an LDQ command that specifies only a lower address, and when two bytes of data are read using the LDQ command, the data will be read from an area where the upper addresses do not change, preventing it from being difficult to determine which address the data is obtained from. Furthermore, when writing data using continuous area transfer process B, which reads data using an LDQ command that specifies only the lower address, and writing two bytes of data using the LDQ command, the data is written to an area where the upper address does not change, preventing confusion about which address the data is being written to.

Furthermore, for any area of RAM 161c spanning the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., any area where the upper address changes midway, the final address of the relevant area and the starting address of the area following the relevant area may be set to an unused area, i.e., an area where no data used for control is stored and where 0 is always stored. This configuration prevents confusion as to which address the data is being obtained from when reading data using a continuous area transfer process or when reading two bytes of data using an LDQ command, as the data is read from an area where the upper address does not change. Furthermore, when writing data using a continuous area transfer process or when writing two bytes of data using an LDQ command, the data is written to an area where the upper address does not change, as this prevents confusion as to which address the data is being written to.

Furthermore, among the areas of RAM 161c where the upper addresses change midway, even in areas where a source continuous memory area from which data is read by continuous area transfer process A is not assigned, areas that are distinguished as a whole, such as in-capacity RAM areas, may not be treated as unused areas, and for other areas, the final address of the relevant area and the start address of the area following the relevant area (for example, if the distinguished areas are the first and second areas, the final address of the second area and the start address of the third area, and the final address of the third area and the start address of the fourth area) may be treated as unused areas.By configuring in this way, when data is read by continuous area transfer process or when 2 bytes of data are read by the LDQ command, data is read from an area where the upper addresses do not change, which prevents it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data is obtained from, and allows efficient use of the areas of RAM 161c. Furthermore, when writing data using a continuous area transfer process, or when writing two bytes of data using an LDQ command, the data is written to an area where the upper address does not change, which prevents confusion about which address the data is being written to and allows for efficient use of RAM area.

[Game Information Display Section]
In the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, a game information display unit 90 is provided on the upper surface 96 of the protrusion 95. The game information display unit 90 notifies players of advantageous states such as the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the high probability state. Figure 74 is a diagram showing the appearance of the game information display unit 90.

The game information display unit 90 includes a 1BET LED 14, a 2BET LED 15, a 3BET LED 16, a game auxiliary display 12, a replay lamp 91, an outer end signal lamp 92, a slot ready lamp 93, and a start valid lamp 94.

The gaming support display 12 displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs, operation information (navigation notification) corresponding to the operation mode, etc. Hereinafter, the number of medals paid out displayed by the gaming support display 12 may be referred to as the "number of medals paid out." In other words, the gaming support display 12 displays the gaming value awarded to the player according to the outcome of a single game. The gaming support display 12 is composed of a 7-segment LED display and is controlled by the main control unit 161.

The 1BET LED 14 lights up to indicate that a bet of 1 has been set. The 2BET LED 15 lights up to indicate that a bet of 2 has been set. The 3BET LED 16 lights up to indicate that a bet of 3 has been set. The replay lamp 91 lights up to indicate that a replay win has occurred. The outer end signal lamp 92 lights up to indicate that the slot machine 2 will transition to the AT1 state or the AT2 state. The insertion possible lamp 93 lights up to indicate that a bet can be set. The start valid lamp 94 indicates that operation of the start switch 7 is valid.

As described above, the slot machine 2 in this embodiment can be controlled to the normal advantageous zone, high probability state, AT1 state, and AT2 state. The normal advantageous zone is a state in which navigation is not executed. The high probability state is a state in which the number of points awarded is greater than the normal advantageous zone, and is a state in which it is easy to transition to the AT1 state. The AT1 state is a state in which navigation is displayed and ends when a predetermined number of games have been played. The AT2 state is a so-called pseudo-bonus state in which the player can increase the net increase in coins they can earn by following the navigation.

As shown in Figure 4, the AT2 state can be controlled from the AT1 state. For example, if the AT2 state is entered when the number of games remaining in the AT1 state is not 0, the AT2 state is entered while maintaining the AT1 state. For example, if the AT2 state is entered when the number of games remaining in the AT1 state is 30, after play in the AT2 state ends, the game will resume in the AT1 state with 30 games remaining.

In this embodiment, the slot machine 2 is provided with an external output terminal for communicating with a hall management computer, a hall server that performs security management, an external display device, etc. As explained in the main processing flowchart, the main control unit 161 transmits the gaming machine status information received from the slot machine 2 via the external output terminal to an external device such as a hall management computer (hall computer) or a hall server that performs security management. In other words, the main control unit 161 notifies whether the status of the slot machine 2 is controlled to a normal advantageous zone, high probability state, AT1 state, or AT2 state by lighting up the outer end signal lamp 92.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing external signal processing. During the external signal processing of the main processing (Sd20, Sd38), the main control unit 161 executes the flowchart shown in Figure 75. The main control unit 161 acquires the advantageous state in which the slot machine 2 is being controlled and determines whether the advantageous state is controlled to the AT1 state (St1). As described above, in St1, if the gaming state is controlled to the AT2 state while the remaining number of games remains in the AT1 state, the main control unit 161 determines that the slot machine 2 is being controlled to the AT1 state. Even if the slot machine 2 is simply being controlled to the AT1 state, the main control unit 161 determines that the slot machine 2 is being controlled to the AT1 state. If the main control unit 161 determines that the slot machine 2 is being controlled to the AT1 state (YES in S11), the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to emit light (St2). Thereafter, the main control unit 161 starts outputting external signal 1 (St3). External signal 1 is a signal indicating that the slot machine 2 is being controlled to the AT1 state. If external signal 1 is already being output, the main control unit 161 will maintain the state in which external signal 1 is being output.

The main control unit 161 further acquires the advantageous state in which the slot machine 2 is being controlled and determines whether the advantageous state is the AT2 state (St4). That is, in St4, the main control unit 161 determines whether the slot machine 2 is being controlled to the AT2 state while maintaining the AT1 state. If it determines that the slot machine 2 is being controlled to the AT2 state while maintaining the AT1 state (YES in St4), the main control unit 161 starts outputting the external signal 2 (St5). The external signal 2 is a signal indicating that the slot machine 2 is being controlled to the AT2 state. If the external signal 2 has already been output, the main control unit 161 maintains the state in which the external signal 2 is being output. If it determines that the slot machine 2 is not being controlled to the AT2 state while maintaining the AT1 state (NO in St4), the main control unit 161 stops outputting the external signal 2 (St5). If the external signal 2 has not already been output, the main control unit 161 maintains the state in which the external signal 2 is not being output.

Returning to St1, if it is determined that the state is not controlled to the AT1 state (No in St1), the main control unit 161 then stops outputting external signal 1 (St7). If external signal 1 is no longer being output, the main control unit 161 maintains the state in which external signal 1 is not being output. Then, the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to the normal state (St8). The normal state of the outer end signal lamp 92 means a state in which no light is being emitted.

The main control unit 161 determines whether the advantageous state is controlled to the AT2 state (St9). If it is determined that it is controlled to the AT2 state (YES in St9), the main control unit 161 controls the outer edge signal lamp 92 to emit light (St10). Then, the main control unit 161 starts outputting the external signal 2 (St11). If the external signal 2 is already being output, the main control unit 161 maintains the state in which the external signal 2 is being output. If it is determined that it is not controlled to the AT2 state (NO in St9), the main control unit 161 stops outputting the external signal 2 (St12). If the external signal 2 is not already being output, the main control unit 161 maintains the state in which the external signal 2 is not being output. Then, the main control unit 161 controls the outer edge signal lamp 92 to the normal state (St13). The main control unit 161 controls the outer edge signal lamp 92 to emit light as shown in FIG. 76 by following the flowchart shown in FIG. 75.

Figure 76 is a diagram illustrating the lighting mode of the outer edge signal lamp 92 in this embodiment. As shown in Figure 76, at timing t1, the outer edge signal lamp 92 is controlled to an illuminated state by control from the high-probability state or the normal favorable zone to the AT2 state. At timing t2, the outer edge signal lamp 92 is controlled to a normal state by control from the AT2 state to the high-probability state or the normal favorable zone. Next, at timing t3, the outer edge signal lamp 92 is controlled to an illuminated state by control from the high-probability state or the normal favorable zone to the AT1 state. At timing t4, the outer edge signal lamp 92 is controlled to the AT2 state while maintaining the AT1 state. At this time, the outer edge signal lamp 92 remains illuminated. At timing t5, when control is changed from the AT2 state to the AT1 state, the outer edge signal lamp 92 remains illuminated. Finally, at timing t6, the outer edge signal lamp 92 is controlled to a normal state by control from the AT1 state to the normal zone.

In this way, the slot machine 2 in this embodiment outputs external signal 1 when controlled to the AT1 state and outputs external signal 2 when controlled to the AT2 state, preventing a player from determining whether the slot machine 2 is controlled to the AT1 state or the AT2 state based on the output of the external signal. Furthermore, the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to emit light before outputting either external signal 1 or external signal 2 to the outside. This allows the specific light-emitting means to notify the external device that the slot machine has been controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state before outputting a signal regarding the advantageous state, thereby preventing the external device from announcing the advantageous state before the slot machine does.

Furthermore, the main control unit 161 controls the outer edge signal lamp 92 to the normal mode after stopping the output of external signal 1, as shown at St7 and St8 in FIG. 75 and timing t6 in FIG. 76, and controls the outer edge signal lamp 92 to the normal mode after stopping the output of external signal 2, as shown at St12 and St13 in FIG. 75 and timing t2 in FIG. 76. This controls the outer edge signal lamp 92 to the normal mode after stopping the output of an external signal indicating an advantageous state to an external device, thereby preventing the slot machine 2 from being controlled to an advantageous state other than the AT1 state or the AT2 state even when the external device indicates that it is in the AT1 state or the AT2 state. Furthermore, the main control unit 161 controls the specific light-emitting means to the specific mode during the period when either external signal 1 or external signal 2 is output. This allows the outer edge signal lamp 92 to be controlled to the light-emitting mode, allowing an external device to determine whether the slot machine 2 is in the AT1 state or the AT2 state.

As shown at timings t4 and t5 in Figure 76, the main control unit 161 may start and stop outputting external signal 2 while outputting external signal 1. The main control unit 161 maintains the light emission mode of the outer end signal lamp 92 regardless of whether output of external signal 2 has started or ended. As a result, by controlling the light emission mode of the outer end signal lamp 92, it is possible to externally determine that it is at least controlled to the AT1 state.

Figure 77 is a diagram illustrating a first modified example of the lighting mode of the outer end signal lamp 92. In the first modified example, the lamp is controlled to a high probability state between timing t2 and timing t3. As shown in modified example 1, the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to a light-emitting mode between timing t2 and timing t3. That is, the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to a light-emitting mode during the period when either external signal 1 or external signal 2 is output. In this way, the main control unit 161 can externally determine that the outer end signal lamp 92 may be controlled to an AT1 state or an AT2 state by controlling the outer end signal lamp 92 to a light-emitting mode.

Figure 78 is a diagram illustrating a second modified example of the lighting mode of the outer end signal lamp 92. In the second modified example, the main control unit 161 does not continuously output the external signal 2 during the period when it is controlled to the AT2 state, but instead transmits only one pulse of the external signal 2 to the external device. This reduces the amount of communication required for external signal processing.

[Regarding ball output control processing in advantageous zones]
As explained in the flowchart of the main processing shown in FIG. 67 , the slot machine 2 in this embodiment controls the dispensing of balls in the advantageous zone. Dispensing control in the advantageous zone is a control that ends the advantageous zone when a predetermined condition is met, and is known as limiter control. In this embodiment, the main control unit 161 counts the difference between the total number of medals awarded, which is the sum of the number of medals awarded in the advantageous zone, and the total number of medals used, which is the sum of the number of medals used in the advantageous zone, as a difference count value, and controls the dispensing of balls using this difference count value. In other words, the main control unit 161 counts the number of medals won by the player using the difference count value. The difference count value is held by a difference counter stored in the RAM 161c of the main control unit 161.

More specifically, when the value obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used from the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400, the main control unit 161 ends control of the advantageous zone and begins control of the normal zone. An example of when the value obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used from the total number of medals awarded exceeds +2400 is when, in the advantageous zone, 10,000 medals are awarded to a player and more than 7,600 medals are used by the player.

The main control unit 161 executes ball payout control pre-processing (Sd8) during the main processing of Figure 67. Figure 79 is a flowchart showing the ball payout control pre-processing by the main control unit 161. The ball payout control pre-processing is executed at the start of play. In the ball payout control pre-processing (Sd8), the main control unit 161 determines whether the state of the slot machine 2 is being controlled to a favorable zone (Su1). If it is being controlled to a favorable zone (YES in Su1), the main control unit 161 increments the value of the favorable zone counter (Su2).

The advantageous zone counter is a counter stored in RAM 161c of the main control unit 161, and is a counter used to set an upper limit on the number of games played in an advantageous zone. In the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, two types of limiter control are performed: limiter control that ends an advantageous zone using the difference between the total number of medals awarded and the total number of medals used, and limiter control that ends an advantageous zone using the number of games played in the advantageous zone. In other words, limiter control in an advantageous zone is performed from two perspectives: the number of medals and the number of games played.

In limiter control using the number of games, the main control unit 161 ends control of the advantageous zone and starts control of the normal zone based on the fact that a predetermined number of games have been played since the advantageous zone began. In this embodiment, the predetermined number is 4,000 games. In other words, the main control unit 161 adds 1 to the value of the advantageous zone counter for each game (unit play) to count whether the maximum number of games in the advantageous zone, 4,000 games, has been reached.

Next, the main control unit 161 determines whether the difference count value has reached the ending transition number (Su3). As described above, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, when the difference count value reaches the ending transition number (e.g., 2300), the slot machine 2 is controlled to an ending state in which control to the advantageous zone state is confirmed to continue until the upper limit number of coins (e.g., 2400 coins) is reached.

If the main control unit 161 determines that the difference count value has reached the ending transition number (YES in Su3), it transitions the gaming state of the slot machine 2 to the ending state (Su4). If the main control unit 161 determines that the difference count value has not reached the ending transition number (NO in Su3), it does not transition to the ending state.

The main control unit 161 then determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met as a result of the internal lottery (Su5). In this embodiment, when ending the AT1 state, the main control unit 161 can end the advantageous period based on the results of the internal lottery, regardless of the difference count value, and control the game to the normal period. In other words, when ending the AT1 state, the main control unit 161 ends the advantageous period if a predetermined specific role is won. In Su5, winning a predetermined specific role is the condition for ending the advantageous period. If a predetermined specific role is won in the internal lottery process of the main processing, the main control unit 161 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met (Yes in Su5) and sets the advantageous period end flag to "3" (Su6).

The advantageous zone end flag is a flag stored in RAM 161c, and is used in later processing to determine whether or not the advantageous zone has ended. The advantageous zone end flag is, for example, a counter that can hold a value between 0 and 3. The advantageous zone end flag has an initial value of "0". In Su6, the main control unit 161 updates the value held by the advantageous zone end flag to "3", ends the ball payout control pre-processing, and returns to the main processing. Furthermore, if the main control unit 161 determines, as a result of the internal lottery, that the conditions for the advantageous zone end have not been met (NO in Su5), it ends the ball payout control pre-processing and returns to the main processing.

Furthermore, if it is determined in Su1 that the game is being controlled to the normal zone rather than the advantageous zone (NO in Su1), the main control unit 161 determines whether to transition to the advantageous zone (Su7). More specifically, the main control unit 161 determines whether to transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone depending on the result of the internal lottery processing in the main processing. If it is determined to remain in the normal zone as a result of the internal lottery processing (NO in Su7), the main control unit 161 ends the ball output control pre-processing and returns to the main processing.

If the internal lottery process determines that the game will move from the normal zone to the advantageous zone (YES in Su7), the main control unit 161 initializes the difference counter (Su8). That is, the main control unit 161 returns the difference count value to its initial value. Various values can be set for the initial value of the difference count value depending on the method for calculating the difference between the total number of awarded and the total number of used. More details will be provided below, using several example patterns.

Then, the main control unit 161 initializes the advantageous zone counter (Su9). That is, the main control unit 161 returns the value of the advantageous zone counter to its initial value. In this embodiment, the initial value of the advantageous zone counter is "0". After initializing the difference counter and advantageous zone counter, the main control unit 161 ends the ball payout control pre-processing.

As shown in Figure 67, after the pre-processing for ball payout control is completed in Sd8, internal lottery processing, winning determination processing, etc. are performed, and then the main control unit 161 performs post-processing for ball payout control in Sd30. Figure 80 is a flowchart showing the post-processing for ball payout control by the main control unit 161, which executes the determination of the end of the advantageous zone based on the initial value.

In the post-ball control processing (Sd30), the main control unit 161 determines whether a replay win has occurred in the winning determination processing (Sv1). If it determines that a replay win has not occurred (NO in Sv1), the main control unit 161 reads the difference count value stored in the difference counter in RAM 161c into a register included in the first register bank R1 (Sv2). The main control unit 161 stores the difference count value, for example, by combining the A register of the first register bank R1 with other registers. Hereinafter, the value read into the register of the first register bank R1 will be referred to as the "value corresponding to the difference count value."

The main control unit 161 adds the number of medals awarded in the game (unit game) being executed to the value corresponding to the difference count value read into the first register bank R1 (Sv3). Furthermore, the main control unit 161 subtracts the number of medals used in the game (unit game) being executed from the value corresponding to the difference count value read into the first register bank R1 (Sv4). In other words, the main control unit 161 adds or subtracts the number of medals awarded and the number of medals used in the game being executed to or from the value corresponding to the difference count value in the first register bank R1, and updates the value corresponding to the difference count value.

Finally, the value corresponding to the difference count value stored in the first register bank R1 updated by the processes in Sv3 and Sv4 is written to RAM 161c (Sv5). In Sv2, the read difference count value is subjected to addition and subtraction processes in the first register bank R1, and the value corresponding to the difference count value after the addition and subtraction processes is written back to RAM 161c. This updates the difference counter in RAM 161c to reflect the number of awards and usages for the game being played.

Next, the main control unit 161 determines whether a specific event has occurred in the difference count value (Sv6). Specific events will be explained in detail below. If the main control unit 161 determines that a specific event has occurred in the difference count value (YES in Sv6), it sets the advantageous period end flag to "1" (Su7). In other words, the main control unit 161 updates the value held by the advantageous period end flag to "1". If a specific event has not occurred in the difference count value (NO in Su6), the main control unit 161 does not perform the update process for the advantageous period end flag in Sv7.

Next, the main control unit 161 determines whether the value of the advantageous zone counter is greater than a predetermined number (4000) (Sv8). Specific events will be explained in detail later. If the main control unit 161 determines that a specific event has occurred in the difference count value (YES in Sv8), it sets the advantageous zone end flag to "2" (Sv9). That is, the main control unit 161 updates the value held by the advantageous zone end flag to "1" in Sv9. If the value of the advantageous zone counter is equal to or less than the predetermined number (NO in Sv9), the main control unit 161 does not perform the update process for the advantageous zone end flag.

Furthermore, the main control unit 161 determines whether a value other than "0" is set to the advantageous zone end flag (Sv10). A value other than "0" is set when the advantageous zone end flag is updated in at least one of the processes Su6 in the pre-ball payout control processing, and Sv7 and Sv9 in the post-ball payout control processing. If a value other than "0" is set to the advantageous zone end flag (YES in Sv10), the main control unit 161 transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone (Sv11). In other words, the main control unit 161 ends the advantageous zone and starts the normal zone.

Furthermore, if the main control unit 161 determines in Sv1 that a replay win has occurred (NO in Sv1), it terminates the post-ball payout control processing without executing the update process for the difference count value shown in Sv2 to Sv5. In other words, the main control unit 161 determines whether a replay display result (replay role) has been derived when the unit game ends, and if it determines that a replay display result has been derived, it does not update the difference count value. This makes it possible to omit the update process when a replay display result is derived, thereby reducing the processing burden.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 67 and 80, in the post-ball control processing of the main processing, the main control unit 161 determines in Sv6 and Sv8 whether to end control to the advantageous zone for each unit game based on the difference count value, regardless of whether the difference count value changes between when the unit game starts and when the unit game ends. This makes it possible to reliably determine whether to end control to the advantageous zone for each unit game.

In this way, when a unit game ends, the main control unit 161 stores the difference count value in the first register bank R1, adds a value corresponding to the number of medals awarded to the difference count value stored in the first register bank R1, and then subtracts a value corresponding to the number of medals used. This ensures that addition occurs before subtraction, preventing subtraction alone from occurring and preventing the difference count value from becoming unintentionally small.

Figure 81 is a diagram illustrating the difference counter of RAM 161c. The difference counter is a storage area with a capacity of 2 bytes. The difference counter of RAM 161c can store a 16-bit (2-byte) area in binary. In other words, the difference counter can count and hold values from 0 to 65535. The first register bank R1 also has a similar 16-bit (2-byte) available area for storing values corresponding to the difference count value.

As shown in Figure 81(A), if all bits in the two bytes are "0", the corresponding decimal number is "0". As shown in Figure 81(B), if bits 6 to 8, bits 10 to 12, and bit 14 are "1" and the other bits are "0", i.e., "0010 1110 1110 0000", the corresponding decimal number is "12000". Also, as shown in Figure 81(C), if only bit 15 is "1" and the other bits are "0", i.e., "0100 0000 0000 0000", the corresponding decimal number is "16384". Finally, as shown in Figure 81(D), if all bits are "1", the corresponding decimal number is "65535".

Figure 82 is a diagram showing the flow of communication between the first register bank R1 and RAM 161c via the CPU 161a. After post-ball payout control processing is executed, if there is no replay win, the CPU 161a reads the difference count value of RAM 161c into the first register bank R1. For example, if the difference counter in RAM 161c stores "0010 1110 1110 0000" in Figure 81 (B), the CPU 161a writes "0010 1110 1110 0000" into the first register bank as the value corresponding to the difference count value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82, the number of medals awarded in the currently running game is added to the value corresponding to the difference count value in the first register bank R1. If the CPU 161a determines that, for example, eight medals have been awarded in the currently running game, it adds the value corresponding to eight medals to the "0010 1110 1110 0000" stored in the first register bank R1, resulting in "0010 1110 1110 1000." In other words, it rewrites the fourth bit from "0" to "1."

Furthermore, the number of medals used in the currently running game is subtracted from the value corresponding to the difference count value in the first register bank R1. If the CPU 161a determines that, for example, three medals have been used in the currently running game, it subtracts the value corresponding to three medals from "0010 1110 1110 1000" stored in the first register bank R1 after the number of medals awarded has been added, resulting in "0010 1110 1110 0101." In other words, it rewrites bits 1 through 4 from "1000" to "0101."

Finally, the CPU 161a writes the value "0010 1110 1110 0101" in the first register bank R1 after the addition of the granted number and the subtraction of the used number back to the difference number counter in RAM 161c. As a result, the difference number count value contained in RAM 161c is rewritten from "0010 1110 1110 0000" to "0010 1110 1110 0101", which is the value to which the addition and subtraction of the granted number and used number have been applied. In other words, the difference number count value in RAM 161c is updated.

In this way, the difference count value is stored in RAM 161c, and the main control unit 161 reads the difference count value stored in RAM 161c into the first register bank R1, updates the read value of the first register bank R1 with a value corresponding to the number of medals awarded and a value corresponding to the number of medals used, and determines whether to end control of the advantageous zone based on the updated value of the first register bank R1. This allows the difference count value to be calculated using the first register bank R1, thereby reducing the processing burden on the CPU 161a.

In addition, before determining whether to end control of the favorable zone at Sv10 in Figure 80, the main control unit 161 updates the value of the first register bank R1 updated in Figure 80 with the difference count value stored in RAM 161c. This prevents the difference count value stored in RAM 161c from becoming an unintended value even when the favorable zone is ended.

[Determining the end of the favorable period based on the initial value]
As described above, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, limiter control is executed when the value obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used from the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous zone exceeds 2,400. In other words, the upper limit of the difference obtained by subtracting the number of medals used from the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous zone is 2,400, and when the number of medals paid out exceeds 2,400, the slot machine transitions to the normal zone. This prevents excessive gambling.

There are various possible methods for the main control unit 161 to determine whether the difference count value has exceeded a specific number (+2400). Below, using Figures 83 to 86, we will explain four patterns for determining the end of the advantageous period (limiter control) based on initial value settings.

Figure 83 is a diagram illustrating the first pattern of determining the end of a favorable period based on initial value settings. As explained in Sv6 and Sv10 of Figure 80, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, the main control unit 161 ends the favorable period based on the occurrence of a specific event in the difference count value.

Which event constitutes a specific event can be varied depending on the settings and program, but it must be set so that it occurs when the value obtained by subtracting the total number of uses from the total number of granted exceeds a specific number. In the example of Figure 83, a change in the 15th bit of the difference count value from "0" to "1" is set as a specific event. The main control unit 161 determines that a specific event has occurred when the 15th bit of the difference count value is carried over from "0" to "1".

The initial value of the difference count value in Figure 83 is "0011 0110 1001 1111", which is "13983" in decimal. For simplicity's sake, the following explanation may use the difference count value stored as a binary number converted to a decimal number. In Su8 of Figure 79, when the difference counter is initialized, the difference counter stores "0011 0110 1001 1111".

The initial value of the difference count value is the value set when the advantageous period ends, so this means that the value obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used from the total number of medals awarded is "0". In other words, the difference count value "13983" in Figure 83 corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used from the total number of medals awarded being "0". In the center of Figure 83, a one-dimensional horizontal axis is shown which indicates the capacity of the difference count value explained above. The left end of the horizontal axis indicates a difference count value of "0000 0000 0000 0000"("0" in decimal) as shown in Figure 81(A), and the right end indicates a difference count value of "1111" as shown in Figure 81(D).
1111 1111 1111" (65535 in decimal). For convenience, the upper part of the one-dimensional horizontal axis shows the difference count value expressed as a decimal number. The lower part of the one-dimensional horizontal axis shows the difference between the total number of givens and the total number of useds corresponding to the difference count value.

Adding the specific number "2400" to the initial value "13983" results in "16383." Expressing "16383" in binary gives "0011 1111 1111 1111." When the difference between the number of granted and the number of used exceeds +2400, "1" is added to the difference count value "16383" to become "16384." Expressing "16384" in binary gives "0100 0000 0000 0000." In other words, when the difference between the total number of granted and the total number of used exceeds +2400, a specific event occurs in which the 15th bit changes from "0" to "1." In this way, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous period exceeds +2400, the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event has occurred by the occurrence of a carry-over of the 15th bit of the difference count value. As a result, in the post-distribution control processing, as explained in Figure 80, the advantageous period can be ended by transitioning from Sv10 to Sv11.

In this way, in Figure 83, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that a specific event occurs when the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses exceeds +2,400. As a result, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, without performing any specific calculations on the difference count value to determine whether it has exceeded a specific number, it is possible to determine that the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses has exceeded a specific number simply by setting the initial value to "13,983," thereby making it possible to appropriately determine the end of the advantageous period.

More specifically, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that the 15th bit of the difference count value is carried over when the difference between the total number of awarded coins and the total number of used coins exceeds +2400. The main control unit 161 ends control of the advantageous zone when the 15th bit of the difference count value is carried over. This makes it possible to determine whether to end control of the advantageous zone by referencing a specific bit of the difference count value, without performing any specific calculations on the difference count value.

In the example of Figure 83, a specific event is set as the value of the 15th bit being carried over, but a specific event may also be set as the value of a bit other than the 15th bit being carried over. For example, a specific event may be set as the value of the 14th bit being carried over. In this case, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that the 14th bit is carried over when the difference between the number of coins awarded and the number of coins used exceeds +2400.

Figure 84 is a diagram illustrating a second pattern for determining the end of a favorable period based on initial value settings. As mentioned above, the type of event that constitutes a specific event can be varied by the settings and programs of the main control unit 161. In the example of Figure 84, an overflow caused by an addition of a difference count value is set as the specific event. The main control unit 161 determines whether an overflow has occurred due to an addition of a difference count value using the flag register described in Figure 61. More specifically, the main control unit 161 determines that an overflow has occurred when the value of the second bit of the first F register changes from "0" to "1."

The initial value of the difference count value in Figure 84 is "1111 0110 1001 1111", which is "63135" when expressed as a decimal number. In Figure 84, the initial value of the difference count value, "63135", corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting the total number of used coins from the total number of coins granted being "0 coins".

Adding the specific number "2400" to the initial value "63135" results in "65535." Expressing "65535" in binary form results in "1111 1111 1111 1111." In other words, when the difference count value exceeds "65535," an overflow occurs due to the addition set as a specific event in the difference count value. In other words, when it exceeds "65535," the flag register is turned on. In this way, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400, the second bit of the flag register is carried over, and the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event has occurred. As a result, during post-ball payout control processing, the system transitions from Sv10 to Sv11 as described in Figure 80, ending the advantageous zone.

In this way, in Figure 84, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that a specific event, an overflow due to addition, occurs when the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses exceeds +2,400. As a result, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, by using the flag register that the first register bank R1 has as a function, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to end control over the advantageous zone.

Figure 85 is a diagram illustrating the third pattern of determining the end of a favorable zone based on initial value settings. In Figure 85, the method of adding and subtracting the number of medals awarded and the number of medals used is different from Figures 83 and 84. As shown at the bottom of Figure 85, when medals are used, a value corresponding to the number of medals used is added. Also, when medals are awarded, a value corresponding to the number of medals awarded is subtracted. That is, in the third pattern shown in Figure 85, in Sv3 in Figure 80, the number of medals awarded per unit play is subtracted, and in Sv4 in Figure 80, the number of medals used per unit play is added. In other words, in Figure 85, the relationship between use and award and addition and subtraction is reversed compared to Figures 83 and 92.

In the example of Figure 85, similar to Figure 83, a specific event is set when the 15th bit of the difference count value changes from "1" to "0." The initial value of the difference count value in Figure 85 is "0100 1001 0110 0000," which is "18784" expressed as a decimal number. The difference count value "18784" in Figure 85 corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting the total number of uses from the total number of granted being "0."

Subtracting the specific number "2400" from the initial value "18784" results in "16384." Expressing "16384" as a binary number results in "0100 0000 0000 0000." When the difference between the number of granted and the number of used exceeds +2400, this occurs when "1" is subtracted from the difference count value "16384" to become "16383." Expressed in binary, "16383" becomes "0011 1111 1111 1111," so when the difference between the number of granted and the number of used exceeds +2400, a specific event occurs in which the 15th bit changes from "1" to "0."

In this way, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2,400, the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event has occurred based on the down-signaling of the 15th bit of the difference count value. As a result, in the post-ball payout control processing, the system can transition from Sv10 to Sv11 as described in Figure 80, thereby ending the advantageous zone.

In this way, in Figure 85, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds +2400, a specific event occurs in which the 15th bit of the difference count value is down-digited. This makes it possible to determine that the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used has exceeded +2400 without performing any specific calculations on the difference count value, allowing for an appropriate determination of the end of the advantageous period.

More specifically, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that the 15th bit of the difference count value is downgraded when the difference between the total number of awarded coins and the total number of used coins exceeds +2400. The main control unit 161 terminates control of the advantageous zone in response to the 15th bit of the difference count value being downgraded. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to terminate control of the advantageous zone by referring to the 15th bit of the difference count value, without performing any calculations on the difference count value.

Figure 86 is a diagram illustrating the fourth pattern of determining the end of a favorable zone based on initial value settings. In Figure 86, as in Figure 85, medals are added when used and subtracted when awarded. In other words, in the fourth pattern shown in Figure 86, as in Figure 85, the number of medals awarded in a unit game is subtracted in Sv3 in Figure 80, and the number used in a unit game is added in Sv4 in Figure 80.

In the example of Fig. 86, an overflow due to subtraction of the difference count value is set as a specific event. The initial value of the difference count value in Fig. 86 is "0000
86. The difference count value "2400" in FIG. 86 corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting the total number of used tokens from the total number of granted tokens being "0".

If you subtract the specific number "2400" from the initial value "2400", you get "0" in decimal. If you express "0" in binary, it becomes "0000 0000 0000
0000". In other words, when the difference between the number of coins awarded and the number of coins used exceeds +2400, "1" is subtracted from the difference count value "0", causing it to fall below "0" and an overflow to occur. In other words, the flag register is turned on. In this way, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400, the second bit of the flag register is carried over, and the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event, an overflow due to subtraction, has occurred. As a result, in the post-ball payout control processing, the system transitions from Sv10 to Sv11 as described in Figure 80, and the advantageous zone can be ended.

In this way, in Figure 86, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that a specific event, an overflow due to subtraction, occurs when the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses exceeds +2,400. As a result, the slot machine 2 in Figure 86 can appropriately determine whether or not to end control over the advantageous zone by using the flag register that the first register bank R1 has as a function.

[Determining the end of the advantageous period based on the judgment value]
As described above, in Figures 83 to 86, the advantageous period was ended by setting the initial value of the difference count value so that a specific event occurs when the difference between the number of awarded coins and the number of used coins exceeds a specific number. Below, in Figures 87 to 91, an example will be described in which the advantageous period is ended using a judgment value rather than setting the initial value to a specific value.

Figure 87 is a flowchart showing post-ball payout control processing by the main control unit 161 when determining the end of a favorable zone based on a determination value. In the flowchart shown in Figure 87, Sv5A processing has been added to the flowchart in Figure 80. The other processing is the same as in Figure 80, so the explanation will not be repeated. In Figure 87, Sv5A processing is executed after Sv5 processing is executed. In Sv5A processing, a determination value is added to a value corresponding to the difference count value stored in the first register bank. The determination value is a value used to determine the end of a favorable zone, and is explained in Figure 88.

Figure 88 is a diagram illustrating the first pattern of determining the end of a favorable period based on a judgment value. In Figure 88, as explained in Sv10 and Sv11 of Figure 80, the main control unit 161 ends the favorable period based on the occurrence of a specific event in the difference count value.

In the example of FIG. 88, a change of the 15th bit of the difference count value from "0" to "1" is set as a specific event, as in FIG. 83. The initial value of the difference count value in FIG. 88 is different from that in FIG. 83. The initial value of the difference count value in FIG. 88 is "0010 1110
1110 0000", which is "12000" in decimal. The initial value of the difference count value in Figure 88 is determined based on the upper limit of the advantageous zone counter. As described above, the upper limit of the advantageous zone in terms of the number of games is 4000 games. If no prize is won during 4000 games, the difference between the number of awards and the number of uses will be -12000. Therefore, by setting the initial value of the difference count value in Figure 88 to "12000", no overflow will occur due to subtraction even if the number of uses increases dramatically. Note that the initial value in Figure 88 is not limited to "12000", and may be, for example, a value greater than "12000".

As shown in Sv5A in Figure 87, after updating the difference count value, the main control unit 161 adds a judgment value to the value corresponding to the difference count value. The judgment value in Figure 88 is "1983". Adding the specific number "2400" to the initial value "12000" results in "14400". Furthermore, adding the judgment value "1983" to "14400" results in "16383".

When "16383" is expressed in binary, it becomes "0011 1111 1111 1111." When the difference between the number of grants and the number of uses exceeds +2400 and a judgment value is added, the difference count value changes from "16383" to "16384." When "16384" is expressed in binary, it becomes "0100 0000 0000 0000," so when the difference between the number of grants and the number of uses exceeds +2400 and a judgment value is added, a specific event occurs in which the 15th bit changes from "0" to "1."

As such, in Figure 88, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400, the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event has occurred based on the carry of the 15th bit of the difference count value. In the example of Figure 88, the main control unit 161 determines whether a specific event has occurred for the difference count value after adding the determination value "1983". As a result, in the post-ball payout control processing, the system transitions from Sv10 to Sv11 as described in Figure 80, and the advantageous zone can be ended.

In Figure 88, the judgment value of the difference count value is set so that a specific event occurs when the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses exceeds +2400 coins. As a result, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, by determining that the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses exceeds +2400 coins depending on whether a specific event occurs when the judgment value is added to the difference count value, it is possible to appropriately determine the end of the advantageous period without having to set a specific initial value for the difference counter in advance.

More specifically, the judgment value is set so that the 15th bit of the difference count value is carried over when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds +2,400. The main control unit 161 ends control of the advantageous zone in response to the 15th bit of the difference count value being carried over. This allows the main control unit 161 to determine whether or not to end control of the advantageous zone based on the difference count value to which the judgment value has been added.

Note that the initial value in Figure 88 is set to "12000" in relation to the advantageous zone counter, but it can be a value other than "12000", for example, any value greater than "12000". In this case, the judgment value should be set so that when the difference between the total number of awarded coins and the total number of used coins exceeds +2400, the 15th bit of the difference count value is carried over.

Figure 89 is a diagram illustrating a second pattern for determining the end of a favorable period based on a determination value. In the example of Figure 89, an overflow caused by an addition to the difference count value is set as a specific event. The main control unit 161 uses a flag register to determine whether an overflow has occurred due to an addition to the difference count value.

The initial value in Figure 89 is set to "12000" in relation to the advantageous zone counter, just like in Figure 88. On the other hand, the judgment value in Figure 89 is "51135". If the specific number "2400" is added to the initial value "12000", it becomes "14400". Furthermore, if the judgment value "51135" is added to "14400", it becomes "65535".

In other words, when the difference between the number of coins awarded and the number of coins used exceeds +2400 and the difference count value exceeds "65535", an overflow occurs due to the addition, and the flag register turns on. In this way, in Figure 89 as well, the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event has occurred when the flag register turns on when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400.

In the example of Figure 89, the main control unit 161 determines whether a specific event has occurred with respect to the difference count value after adding the judgment value "51135". As a result, in the post-ball payout control processing, the system transitions from Sv10 to Sv11 as described in Figure 80, and the advantageous zone can be ended. As a result, the slot machine 2 shown in Figure 89 can appropriately determine whether to end control of the advantageous zone based on the value corresponding to the difference count value after adding the judgment value "51135" and by using the flag register that the first register bank R1 has as a function.

Figure 90 is a diagram illustrating a third pattern for determining the end of a favorable zone based on a determination value. In Figure 90, similar to Figures 85 and 94, in Sv3 in Figure 80, the number of awarded points per unit play is subtracted, and in Sv4 in Figure 80, the number of used points per unit play is added. In other words, in Figure 90, the relationship between use and award and addition and subtraction is reversed compared to Figures 88 and 97.

In the example of Fig. 90, a change of the 15th bit of the difference count value from "1" to "0" is set as a specific event. The initial value of the difference count value in Fig. 90 is "1100
The value is "0111 1011 1111", which is expressed as a decimal number, and is "53535". Adding "12000" to the initial value "53535" results in "65535". In other words, the initial value "53535" is determined in relation to the advantageous zone counter, as explained above.

The judgment value in Figure 90 is "34751". Subtracting the specific number "2400" from the initial value "53535" results in "51135". Furthermore, subtracting the judgment value "34751" from "51135" results in "16384". When the difference between the number of granted and the number of used exceeds +2400 and the judgment value is subtracted, this occurs when "1" is subtracted from the difference count value "16384" to become "16383". In other words, when the difference between the number of granted and the number of used exceeds +2400 and the judgment value is subtracted, a specific event occurs in which the 15th bit changes from "1" to "0".

When the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2,400 and the judgment value is subtracted, the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event has occurred based on the down-signal of the 15th bit of the difference count value. As a result, in the post-ball payout control processing, the system can transition from Sv10 to Sv11 as described in Figure 80, ending the advantageous zone.

In this way, the judgment value in Figure 90 is set so that when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds +2400 and the judgment value is subtracted, a specific event occurs in which the 15th bit of the difference count value is downgraded. This makes it possible to appropriately determine the end of the advantageous period by determining that the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used has exceeded a specific number, without having to set a specific initial value for the difference counter in advance.

More specifically, the judgment value in Figure 90 is set so that the 15th bit of the difference count value is downgraded when the difference between the total number of awarded coins and the total number of used coins exceeds a specific number. The main control unit 161 terminates control of the advantageous zone in response to the 15th bit of the difference count value being downgraded. This allows the main control unit 161 to determine whether or not to terminate control of the advantageous zone based on the difference count value from which the judgment value has been subtracted.

Figure 91 is a diagram illustrating the fourth pattern of determining the end of a favorable zone based on a judgment value. In Figure 91, as in Figure 90, a value is added when a medal is used and subtracted when it is awarded.

In the example of Figure 91, an overflow caused by subtraction of the difference count value is a specific event. The initial value of the difference count value in Figure 91 is "53535," as in Figure 90. On the other hand, the judgment value in Figure 91 is "51135." Subtracting the specific number "2400" from the initial value "53535" and then subtracting the judgment value "51135" results in "0." When the difference between the total number of awarded coins and the total number of used coins exceeds +2400 and the judgment value is subtracted, this is when the difference count value "0" is subtracted by "1," falling below "0," and an overflow occurs. In other words, the flag register is turned on. As a result, during post-ball control processing, the system transitions from Sv10 to Sv11, as described in Figure 80, and the advantageous zone ends.

As such, in Figure 91, the judgment value is set so that when the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses exceeds +2,400 and the judgment value is subtracted, a specific event occurs, which is an overflow due to subtraction. As a result, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, by using the flag register that the first register bank R1 has as a function, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to end control over the advantageous zone.

[Counting of the difference count value in the performance control unit 151]
In the above, it has been explained that the main control unit 161 updates the difference count value for each unit game using the RAM 161c and the first register bank R1. The effect control unit 151 also stores a counter similar to the difference counter stored in the main control unit 161, and updates it for each unit game. That is, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, the main control unit 161 and the effect control unit 151 each store a counter for storing the difference count value. Hereinafter, the counter for storing the difference count value stored by the effect control unit 151 will be referred to as the "effect control side difference counter."

Figure 92 is a diagram illustrating command communication between the main control board 16 and the presentation control board 15. As shown in Figure 92, when the start switch 7 is operated (start operation), the main control unit 161 transmits the game start command shown in Figure 11 to the presentation control unit 151. Also, as shown in Figure 92, when the stop switch is stopped for the third time (when all reels stop), the main control unit 161 transmits the game end command shown in Figure 12 to the presentation control unit 151.

As shown in Figure 11, the start-of-game command includes command No. 12, "Insert medal," which stores information indicating that medals have been bet. Furthermore, the end-of-game command includes the command "Winning number," which stores information regarding winning.

Figure 93 is a diagram explaining the control content of the update process for the number of medals used in the difference number counter on the effect control side, performed by the effect control unit 151. The effect control unit 151 determines whether or not a game start command has been received (Sm1). If a game start command has not been received (NO in Sm1), the effect control unit 151 ends the process without updating the difference number counter on the effect control side. If a game start command has been received (YES in Sm1), the effect control unit 151 references the "insert medal" command included in the game start command and obtains the number of medals used in the game in which the start switch 7 was pressed (Sm2). The effect control unit 151 then updates the difference number counter on the effect control side (Sm3).

More specifically, in the pattern examples of Figures 83, 84, 88, and 89, the performance control unit 151 subtracts the value of the difference number counter on the performance control side. On the other hand, in the pattern examples of Figures 85, 86, 90, and 91, the performance control unit 151 adds the value of the difference number counter on the performance control side.

Next, we will explain the update of the awarded number in the difference number counter on the presentation control unit 151 side. Figure 94 is a diagram explaining the control content of the update of the awarded number on the presentation control side performed by the presentation control unit 151. The presentation control unit 151 determines whether or not a game end command has been received (Sn1). If a game end command has not been received (NO in Sn1), the presentation control unit 151 ends processing without updating the awarded number in the difference number counter on the presentation control side. If a game end command has been received (YES in Sn1), the presentation control unit 151 references the "winning number" command included in the game end command to obtain the awarded number of medals used in the game in which the start switch 7 was pressed (Sn2). The presentation control unit 151 then updates the awarded number in the difference number counter on the presentation control side (Sn3).

More specifically, in the pattern examples of Figures 83, 84, 88, and 89, the performance control unit 151 increments the value of the difference counter on the performance control side. On the other hand, in the pattern examples of Figures 85, 86, 90, and 91, the performance control unit 151 decrements the value of the difference counter on the performance control side.

The difference number counter on the presentation control side is a variable contained in RAM 151c of the presentation control unit 151, and corresponds to the difference number counter contained in RAM 161c of the main control unit 161. The presentation control unit 151 updates the number of times the difference number counter on the presentation control side is in use each time it receives a game start command, so the difference number counter on the presentation control unit 151 side and the difference number counter on the main control unit 161 side will be the same at the end of a unit game unless there is any fraud or malfunction.

Returning to Figure 92, after receiving a game start command, the presentation control unit 151 executes presentation control based on the difference count value on the presentation control side. The presentation control unit 151 can obtain the number of coins until limiter control is executed from the difference count value. If the number of coins until limiter control is executed is less than a specific threshold, the presentation control unit 151 will not execute a provocative presentation. For example, it is conceivable that an unnecessary provocative presentation may be executed for the player immediately before limiter control, thereby reducing the player's interest. Therefore, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, the presentation control unit 151 executes presentation control based on the difference count value to prevent the player's interest from being reduced.

In this way, the performance control unit 151 counts the difference count value on the performance control side using values corresponding to the number of balls inserted and the number of winnings sent from the main control unit 161 based on commands received from the main control unit 161, and then executes performance control based on the difference count value on the performance control side after counting. As a result, the performance control unit 151 and the main control unit 161 each count the difference counter, allowing performance control by the performance control unit 151 to execute performance control based on an accurate difference counter.

In the above example, the performance control unit 151 and the main control unit 161 each have a difference counter. However, the performance control unit 151 may not update the difference counter, and the difference count value in RAM 161c in the main control unit 161 may be sent directly to the performance control unit 151. In this case, the main control unit 161 sends the difference count value to the performance control unit 151. The performance control unit 151 executes performance control based on the difference count value sent from the main control unit 161. This allows the performance control unit 151 to execute performance control based on the difference count value of the main control unit 161.

[Example of transmission of difference count value between the performance control unit and the main control unit]
As described above, the performance control unit 151 may receive the difference count value directly from the main control unit 161. Figure 95 is a diagram for explaining commands sent from the main control board 16 to the performance control board 15.

The main control board 16 transmits a set of two-byte commands shown in Figure 95(A) to the performance control board 15. The main control unit 161 includes the difference count value in the two-byte command shown in Figure 95(A) and transmits it to the performance control unit 151. Of the two-byte commands shown in Figure 95(A), the first byte shown at the top of Figure 95(A) is a command indicating the type of information. For example, the first byte shown at the top of Figure 95(A) contains data indicating the type of information in the transmitted command, such as whether it is a command related to an internal lottery or a command indicating the remaining number of times a safety device will be activated in safety device processing.

On the other hand, of the two-byte command shown in Figure 95(A), the second byte command shown at the bottom of Figure 95(A) is a command that indicates the information content. The first byte command shown at the bottom of Figure 95(A) stores data indicating the result of the internal lottery and the number of remaining safety device activations. In both the first byte command and the second byte command, the eighth bit (first bit) stores information that allows the command itself to distinguish between the first byte command and the second byte command. More specifically, the performance control unit 151 receives a two-byte command from the main control unit 161. The performance control unit 151 references the eighth bit (first bit) of one of the received two-byte commands, and if a "1" is stored, it determines that the referenced command is a first-byte command that indicates the information type. On the other hand, the performance control unit 151 references the eighth bit (first bit) of the other of the received two-byte command, and if a "0" is stored, it determines that the referenced command is a first-byte command that indicates the information content.

The difference counter has a capacity of 16 bits (2 bytes). The maximum number that can be stored in a 7-bit area is 127, so the entire capacity of the difference counter cannot be transmitted in a single command transmission.

For this reason, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, when the difference count value is sent from the main control unit 161 to the performance control unit 151, two sets of commands (a total of four bytes) are sent. Figure 95 (B) is an example of a sent command. As shown in Figure 95 (B), the difference counter in RAM 161c of the main control unit 161 stores "0001 0101 1111 1000."

The main control unit 161 stores type information representing "bits 1 to 7 of the difference count value" in the first byte of the command in the first set and transmits it. To indicate to the performance control unit 151 that the first byte of the first set represents type information, the first bit of the first byte of the first set is "1". Furthermore, the main control unit 161 stores information representing bits 1 to 7 of the main control unit 161's difference count value, "000 0000", in the second byte of the command in the first set and transmits it. To indicate to the performance control unit 151 that the second byte of the first set represents information content, the first bit of the second byte of the first set is "0".

The main control unit 161 also stores type information indicating "bits 8 to 14 of the difference count value" in the first byte of the command in the second set and transmits it. Furthermore, the main control unit 161 stores information on bits 8 to 14 of the main control unit 161's difference count value, "11 1111 1," in the second byte of the command in the second set and transmits it. In this way, if the difference count value is a value that can be represented using up to 14 bits, the main control unit 161 transmits two sets of commands (four bytes) to the performance control unit 151. If the difference count value is a value that cannot be represented without using 15 or 16 bits, the main control unit 161 transmits three sets of commands (six bytes) to the performance control unit 151.

In this way, the main control unit 161 sends the difference count value to the performance control unit 151 using multiple commands. As shown in Figure 95 (B), the areas for storing the difference count value in the multiple commands are divided evenly. In other words, the difference count value is divided into an area from bits 1 to 7 in the first byte and an area from bits 1 to 7 in the second byte. This makes it possible to send and receive data of more than one byte, even if the first bit is used to indicate the type of information.

[Mode allocation in AT1 state]
As explained above, the slot machine 2 in this embodiment can be controlled to multiple states, including the AT1 state, in the advantageous zone. When controlled to the AT1 state, the main control unit 161 draws the mode of the AT1 state. The AT1 state includes three modes: the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. Depending on which mode is controlled, the minimum number of games (guaranteed number of games) to be played in the AT1 state differs, and the additional advantageous degree also differs.

Figure 96 shows a lottery table for allocating the AT1 state mode. When controlled to the AT1 state, the main control unit 161 determines the AT1 state mode based on the lottery table shown in Figure 96. As shown in Figure 96, the mode to be allocated is determined based on the number obtained by subtracting the number of uses from the number of granted. In other words, the main control unit 161 draws the AT1 state mode based on the difference count value.

As explained in Figures 83 to 86 and Figures 87 to 91, there are multiple possible patterns for storing difference count value data, but in all patterns, the difference count value indicates the value obtained by subtracting the total number of uses from the total number of awards in the advantageous zone. The main control unit 161 performs a mode lottery based on the difference between the total number of awards indicated by the difference count value and the total number of uses.

As shown in Figure 96, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used is +2000 or more, the probability of selecting the first mode is 90%, the probability of selecting the second mode is 10%, and the probability of selecting the third mode is 0%. Furthermore, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used is less than +2000 and greater than -2000, the probability of selecting the first mode is 5%, the probability of selecting the second mode is 90%, and the probability of selecting the third mode is 5%. Finally, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used is -2000 or less, the probability of selecting the first mode is 33%, the probability of selecting the second mode is 34%, and the probability of selecting the third mode is 33%.

Figure 97 shows the settings for each mode in AT1 state. When controlled in the first mode, the main control unit 161 sets the additional advantage to be lower than in the second and third modes. Examples of additional roles include watermelon and cherry.

The degree of advantage for adding is determined by the number of games added when an additional role is won, or the probability of executing the additional processing. More specifically, the slot machine 2 is configured so that the number of games added when an additional role (e.g., watermelon and cherry) is won varies depending on whether it is controlled in the first mode, second mode, or third mode. For example, when a watermelon is won in the first mode, an average of 5 games are added, when a watermelon is won in the second mode, an average of 10 games are added, and when a watermelon is won in the third mode, an average of 20 games are added. This allows the degree of advantage for adding to vary depending on which mode the slot machine 2 is controlled in.

The slot machine 2 may also be configured so that the probability of executing an add-on process when an add-on role is won varies depending on whether it is controlled in the first mode, second mode, or third mode. For example, when a watermelon is won in the first mode, 10 games are added with a 10% probability; when a watermelon is won in the second mode, 10 games are added with a 33% probability; and when a watermelon is won in the third mode, 10 games are played with an 85% probability. This allows the degree of add-on advantage to vary for each mode depending on whether it is controlled in the mode. The slot machine 2 may also vary both the number of add-on games and the probability of executing the add-on process to vary the degree of add-on advantage for each mode.

When the main control unit 161 is in the AT1 state and controlled to the first mode, it runs at least 30 games while still in the AT1 state. Furthermore, when the main control unit 161 is in the AT1 state and controlled to the second mode, it runs at least 50 games while still in the AT1 state. Furthermore, when the main control unit 161 is controlled to the second mode, it sets the added advantage to be higher than in the first mode and lower than in the third mode. When the main control unit 161 is in the AT1 state and controlled to the third mode, it runs at least 300 games while still in the AT1 state. Furthermore, when the main control unit 161 is controlled to the third mode, it sets the added advantage to be higher than in the first mode and the second mode.

When controlled to the third mode, the AT1 state is most likely to continue, and when controlled to the first mode, the AT1 state is least likely to continue. Furthermore, the main control unit 161 is likely to be controlled to the first mode when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used before limiter control is executed is greater than +2000, i.e., when the player's allowable number of coins to be won before limiter control is less than 400. Furthermore, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used before limiter control is executed is less than -2000, i.e., when the player's allowable number of coins to be won before limiter control is greater than 4400, the main control unit 161 is likely to be controlled to the third mode. In the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, when the allowable number of coins a player can win before limiter control is small, the slot machine is likely to be selected for a mode in which the AT1 state is more likely to continue, and when the allowable number of coins a player can win before limiter control is large, the slot machine is likely to be selected for a mode in which the AT1 state is less likely to continue.

In other words, when the main control unit 161 is controlled to the AT1 state, if the difference between the total number of medals awarded and the total number of medals used indicated by the difference count value is greater than +2000, the main control unit 161 is more likely to continue the AT1 state than when the difference between the total number of medals awarded and the total number of medals used indicated by the difference count value is +2000 or less. This makes it easier for the player to continue the AT1 state when the maximum number of medals that can be awarded to a player in an advantageous zone is large. Furthermore, when the main control unit 161 is controlled to the AT1 state, if the difference between the total number of medals awarded and the total number of medals used indicated by the difference count value is +2000 or more, the main control unit 161 may control the main control unit 161 to continue the AT1 state more likely than when the difference between the total number of medals awarded and the total number of medals used indicated by the difference count value is less than +2000.

As explained in Su5 of Figure 79, when the main control unit 161 ends the AT1 state, it can terminate the advantageous zone and control the normal zone based on the results of the internal lottery, regardless of the value stored in the difference count value. At this time, if the main control unit 161 determines that a predetermined specific role has been won in the internal lottery and the difference between the total number of awarded coins and the total number of used coins is greater than, for example, +2000, it terminates control of the advantageous zone at a first rate. Furthermore, if the main control unit 161 determines that a predetermined specific role has been won in the internal lottery and the difference is less than +2000, it terminates control of the advantageous zone at a second rate. The first rate is higher than the second rate. In other words, when the allowable number of coins a player can acquire before limiter control is triggered is small, the main control unit 161 can increase the allowable number of coins a player can acquire by terminating the advantageous zone and initializing the difference count value. As a result, when the AT1 state ends, if the difference count value indicates that the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses is greater than +2000, the rate at which the advantageous zone ends is higher than when the difference count value indicates that the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses is less than +2000. This makes it easier to continue the AT1 state when the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses is small, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The main control unit 161 may also make it easier to end the advantageous zone if the difference count value between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used falls below -10,000, for example. If the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used falls below -10,000, the number of coins that the player can acquire has increased, which can significantly stimulate gambling, so resetting the difference count value can prevent this from happening.

In the above example, when the AT1 state ends, the difference count value used to determine the percentage at which the advantageous period ends regardless of the difference count value is increased when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used is greater than +2000 or less than -10,000. In other words, +2000 and 10,000 are used as thresholds for determining whether to end the advantageous period when the AT1 state ends. This threshold may be the same value as a specific number. In other words, when the difference count value indicates that the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used is greater than +2400, the advantageous period ends at a rate of 100%, and when the difference count value indicates that the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used is +2400 or less, the advantageous period ends at a rate of 0%.

As shown in Figure 97, the main control unit 161 draws the winning of the additional role in the advantageous zone with a lower degree of advantage in the first mode than in the second and third modes, and with a higher degree of advantage in the third mode than in the first and second modes. The main control unit 161 determines which of the first, second, and third modes to control to the AT1 state in accordance with the difference count value. This allows the lottery process for the additional role in the AT1 state to be executed according to the difference count value.

The main control unit 161 also sets a guaranteed number of games for each mode when controlling to the AT1 state. The guaranteed number of games is the minimum number of unit games that will be executed while maintaining the AT1 state after control to the AT1 state. The main control unit 161 also determines which of the first, second, and third modes to control to the AT1 state in accordance with the difference count value. This allows the player to have a sense of anticipation that corresponds to the difference count value.

In the examples shown in Figures 96 and 97 above, examples were described in which the guaranteed number of games is predetermined for each mode. However, instead of the guaranteed number of games in the AT1 state, it is also possible to uniformly control to the third mode when controlling to the AT1 state, and set the number of transition games for transitioning from the third mode to the first mode according to the difference count value, thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player according to the difference count value. Below, an example of controlling the number of games in the AT1 state using the transition game number is described. In a configuration using the transition game number, the second mode is not used, and only the first mode and the third mode are used.

In a configuration using the number of transition games, the main control unit 161 uniformly controls to the third mode when controlling to the AT1 state. Furthermore, when controlling to the AT1 state, the main control unit 161 determines the number of transition games from the third mode to the first mode based on the difference count value.

For example, if the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses indicated by the difference count value is +2000 or more, the main control unit 161 transitions the state of the slot machine 2 from the third mode to the first mode when 30 games have been played since control was switched to the third mode. That is, the number of transition games is 30. Also, if the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses indicated by the difference count value is less than +2000 and greater than -2000, the main control unit 161 transitions the state of the slot machine 2 from the third mode to the first mode when 50 games have been played since control was switched to the third mode. That is, the number of transition games is 50. Furthermore, if the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses indicated by the difference count value is -2000 or less, the main control unit 161 transitions the state of the slot machine 2 from the third mode to the first mode when 300 games have been played since control was switched to the third mode. That is, the number of transition games is 300.

In a configuration using the number of transition games, the added advantage is set so that the continuation rate of the AT1 state differs between the first mode and the third mode. The continuation rate of the AT1 state is the probability that the AT1 state will be maintained and controlled per a specific number of games. For example, in the third mode, the added advantage is set so that the probability of the AT1 state continuing is, for example, 98% per game. In the first mode, the added advantage is set so that the probability of the AT1 state continuing is, for example, 10% per game.

This allows the length of time spent in the third mode, which has a high probability of remaining in the AT1 state, to vary depending on the value of the difference count value, thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player that corresponds to the difference count value. Furthermore, since the AT1 state can be initiated in the third mode, which has the highest added advantage, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

[Special flags]
The main control unit 161 of this embodiment assigns a flag for each event to each bit constituting one byte of data stored in the RAM 161c, and when any of the conditions occurs, changes the bit corresponding to the established condition from "0" to "1." The main control unit 161 then determines whether the bit to which the flag is assigned is 1, and if it determines that 1 is set, it determines that the corresponding condition is established. At this time, to determine whether the value of a specific bit is 1, it is necessary to perform an operation between the data in which the flag is stored and the determination data.

In addition to the flags mentioned above, the main control unit 161 can also set a special one-byte flag when certain conditions are met.

A special flag consists of one byte of data, and the area where the special flag is stored is 00H when a specific condition is not met, and when a specific condition is met, data is set in which multiple bits corresponding to that condition are set to 1.

For example, as shown in FIG. 98, when the first condition is met, the main control unit 161 sets a one-byte special flag 1 in the first area of RAM 161c. Special flag 1 is data in which the first and fifth least significant bits are 1 and the other bits are 0.

In addition, when a second condition different from the first condition is met, the main control unit 161 sets a one-byte special flag 2 in the second area of RAM 161c. Special flag 2 is data in which the second lowest bit and the fifth lowest bit are 1, and the other bits are 0.

The main control unit 161 then reads the data from the first area of RAM 161c where special flag 1 is stored, determines whether the read data is 0, and if it is determined that the data is not 0, determines that the first condition is met. The main control unit 161 also reads the data from the second area of RAM 161c where special flag 2 is stored, determines whether the read data is 0, and if it is determined that the data is not 0, determines that the second condition is met.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a specific condition is met, a special flag consisting of 1 byte of data can be set. The data in the area in RAM 161c where the special flag is stored is read, and a determination is made as to whether the read data is 0. If it is determined that the data is not 0, it is determined that the specific condition is met. Since there is no need to compare the value of a specific bit with determination data as with normal flags, determining the specific condition is simplified, reducing program size and, since determination data is no longer necessary, data size can also be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when certain conditions are met, a one-byte special flag is set in which multiple bits are set to 1, making it easier to check the flag setting status when debugging, etc., and facilitating data management.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific conditions include a first condition and a second condition, and when the first condition is met and when the second condition is met, different bits among the multiple bits are set to 1, making it easier to distinguish between the first special flag and the second special flag.

In this embodiment, the first special flag and the second special flag are configured so that completely different bits are set to 1, but even if some bits overlap, it will be easier to distinguish between the first special flag and the second special flag if the other bits are configured differently.

Furthermore, while the above describes the special flags used by the main control unit 161, the medal count control unit 171 or the performance control unit 151 may also be configured to use the special flags.

[Commands sent to the production control unit]
The performance control unit 151 controls the performance in accordance with the control state of the main control unit 161 based on commands sent from the main control unit 161 .

Commands sent from the main control unit 161 to the performance control board 151 include bet commands, settlement commands, game start commands, spin start commands, stop commands, game end commands, error commands, setting change commands, and setting confirmation commands.

The BET command is a command sent each time the bet amount is set. The settlement command is a command that specifies the start and end of settlement. The game start command is a command that specifies that the game start operation has been performed, and as shown in Figure 11, it specifies the game information at the start of the game, instruction number, small role type, ball output status, next ball output status, zone status, advantageous zone notification flag, advantageous end flag, ART premonition games, points, winning number, number of medals inserted, and reel stop (reel stop position). The spin start command is a command sent when the reels start spinning. The stop command is a command sent each time the reels stop, and specifies the reel stop operation position and reel stop position. The game end command is a command that specifies that the third stop operation has been released, and as shown in FIG. 12, it also specifies the game information, instruction number, small win type, ball payout status, next ball payout status, zone status, advantageous zone notification flag, advantageous end flag, ART premonition games, points, winning number, number of inserted medals, and reel stop (reel stop position) at the time of game end. The error command is a command that specifies the start of an error state, the type of error, and the end of the error state. The setting change command is a command that specifies the start and end of a setting change state. The setting confirmation command is a command that specifies the start and end of a setting confirmation state.

[About the button sequence navigation]
When a push order role is won, the main control unit 161 can perform navigation to display on the game assistance display 12 an instruction number that can identify the operation mode corresponding to the type of push order role that has been won, i.e., the operation mode that will stop the main role, and the player can make the main role win by performing the stop operation in the operation mode that follows the navigation.

In addition, when navigating when the push order is selected, the main control unit 161 is configured to send a game start command that identifies the instruction number, and the performance control unit 151 can execute push order navigation that can identify the operation mode that will stop the main character according to the instruction number identified from the game start command.

When the game starts and the performance control unit 151 receives a game start command, and when a winning push order role is identified from the game start command and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is identified from the instruction number, the performance control unit 151 displays a navigation image suggesting the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R identified from the instruction number in the navigation area above the see-through window 3W in the display area of the LCD display 51.

As shown in Figure 99(a), for example, if the operation mode of stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification is a center left/right stop order, a navigation image "1" suggesting the first reel to be stopped is displayed in the largest first size in the navigation area at a position corresponding to the center reel for which the first stop operation is to be performed, a navigation image "2" suggesting the second reel to be stopped is displayed in a second size smaller than the first size at a position corresponding to the left reel for which the second stop operation is to be performed, and a navigation image "3" suggesting the third reel to be stopped is displayed in a third size smaller than the second size at a position corresponding to the right reel for which the third stop operation is to be performed. In this case, the navigation images are displayed in the order of "1", "2", and "3". Additionally, the speaker 53, 54 outputs the sound "middle", indicating the middle reel that should stop first, and of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51, the central area corresponding to the middle reel that should stop first lights up yellow, while the left area corresponding to the left reel and the right area corresponding to the right reel are turned off.

As shown in Figure 99(b), after a navigation image suggesting the operation of stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in the navigation area, when a stop command is received and it is determined that the stop operation of the center reel suggested as the first stop operation has been performed, the navigation image "1" disappears and the image is switched to one in which the navigation image "2" is enlarged to the first size and the navigation image "3" is enlarged to the second size. Furthermore, the sound "left" is output from speakers 53 and 54 to indicate the left reel that should be stopped second, and of the effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51, the left area corresponding to the center reel that should be stopped second lights up yellow, while the center area corresponding to the center reel and the right area corresponding to the right reel are turned off.

As shown in Figure 99(c), when a further stop command is received and it is determined that the left reel stop operation suggested as the second stop operation has been performed, the navigation image "2" disappears and the image switches to one in which the navigation image "3" is enlarged to the first size. Furthermore, the sound "Right" is output from speakers 53 and 54 to indicate the right reel that should be stopped third, and the right-side region of the effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51, which corresponds to the right reel that should be stopped third, lights up yellow, while the left-side region corresponding to the left reel and the center region corresponding to the center reel are turned off.

As shown in Figure 99(d), when a further stop command is received and it is determined that the right reel stop operation suggested as the third stop operation has been performed, the image switches to one in which the navigation image "3" disappears. In addition, all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 are turned off, and then, as shown in Figure 99(e), all navigation images are erased.

Furthermore, when a stop command is received and it is determined that a stop operation has been performed on a reel other than the suggested reel, as shown in Figure 99 (f), regardless of whether it is the first stop operation, the second stop operation, or the third stop operation, all navigation images are erased and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 are turned off.

[About 7Navi]
When a 7-matching reel that accompanies a bonus or a 7-missing reel that does not accompany a bonus is won, the main control unit 161 can provide navigation by displaying instruction numbers that identify the operation mode for stopping the 7-matching reel or the ready state of the black 7 symbol (a mode in which the black 7 symbol aligns until the center reel and right reel stop, but does not complete the 7-matching reel when the left reel stops) on the game assist display 12. The player can stop the 7-matching reel or the ready state of the black 7 symbol by performing a stop operation in accordance with the navigation. In particular, the stopping of the 7-matching reel indicates that a bonus has been awarded.

In addition, when navigating when a 7-matching lip or a 7-missing lip is won, the main control unit 161 is configured to send a game start command that identifies an instruction number, and the performance control unit 151 can execute 7-navigation that can identify the operation mode to stop the 7-matching lip or the ready state of the black 7 symbol, according to the instruction number identified from the game start command.

When the game starts and the performance control unit 151 receives a game start command, and when the game start command identifies a winning combination of 7-match or 7-missing matches, and the instruction number identifies the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the performance control unit 151 displays a navigation image suggesting the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R identified from the instruction number in the navigation area above the see-through window 3W in the display area of the LCD display 51.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), a navigation image "7" is displayed in the navigation area in the position corresponding to the right reel where the first stop operation should be performed, and navigation images "left arrow" are displayed in the positions corresponding to the center reel where the second stop operation should be performed and the right reel where the third stop operation should be performed, suggesting that the stop operation should be performed aiming for the black 7 symbol in the order right, center, left. At this time, the audio "Aim" is output from speakers 53 and 54 suggesting that the stop operation should be performed aiming for the black 7 symbol, and the effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 are illuminated in red in a flowing pattern from right to center to left in the right region corresponding to the right reel that should be stopped first, the center region corresponding to the center reel that should be stopped second, and the left region corresponding to the left reel that should be stopped third.

As shown in Figure 100(b), after a navigation image suggesting the operation of stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in the navigation area, a stop command is received, the right reel stop operation suggested as the first stop operation is performed, and when it is determined that a black 7 symbol has stopped on the right reel, the navigation image "7" corresponding to the right reel disappears and the image changes from a "left arrow" navigation image corresponding to the center reel to a navigation image "7." Furthermore, of the effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51, the right area corresponding to the right reel is turned off, and the central area corresponding to the center reel that should be stopped second and the left area corresponding to the left reel that should be stopped third are illuminated in red, flowing from the center to the left.

As shown in Figure 100(c), when a further stop command is received, the suggested second stop operation for the center reel is performed, and it is determined that a black 7 symbol has stopped on the center reel and black 7 symbols have been formed on the right and center reels, the navigation image "7" corresponding to the center reel disappears, and the image changes to one in which the navigation image "left arrow" corresponding to the left reel changes to the navigation image "7." Furthermore, of the effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51, the right area corresponding to the right reel and the center area corresponding to the center reel are turned off, and the left area corresponding to the left reel that is to be stopped third is lit in red, flowing from top to bottom.

As shown in Figure 100(d), when a stop command is further received, the left reel stop operation suggested as the third stop operation is performed, and it is determined that a black 7 symbol has stopped on the left reel and that black 7 symbols have aligned on the right reel, center reel, and left reel, the image switches to one that erases the navigation image "7." In addition, all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 are turned off, and then, as shown in Figure 100(e), all navigation images are erased.

Furthermore, when a stop command is received and it is determined that a stop operation has been performed on a reel other than the suggested reel, as shown in Figure 100 (f), or when it is determined that the suggested reel has been stopped but that the 7 symbol will not stop, all navigation images are erased, regardless of whether it is the first stop operation, second stop operation, or third stop operation, and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 are turned off.

[About Navigation!]
When a win of weak cherry, strong cherry, chance eye A, chance eye B, or watermelon is identified from the command at the start of the game, the performance control unit 151 can execute a navigation that suggests a win of weak cherry, strong cherry, chance eye A, chance eye B, or watermelon!

! Navigation includes a first mode navigation image "! Light Red" (Fig. 101(a)) displayed! A small red navigation and a second mode navigation image "! Big Red" (Fig. 101(f)) displayed! A big red navigation and a third mode navigation image "! Light Purple" (Fig. 101(g)) displayed! A small purple navigation and a fourth mode navigation image "! Big Purple" (Fig. 101(h)) displayed! A big purple navigation and a fifth mode navigation image "! Green" (not shown) displayed! Green navigation.

The navigation image of the first mode is a navigation image of a predetermined size with an exclamation mark placed on a red polygonal base image, as shown in Figure 101(a). The navigation image of the second mode is a navigation image of a larger size than the predetermined size with an exclamation mark placed on a red polygonal base image, as shown in Figure 101(f). The navigation image of the third mode is a navigation image of a predetermined size with an exclamation mark placed on a purple star-shaped base image, as shown in Figure 101(g). The navigation image of the fourth mode is a navigation image of a larger size than the predetermined size with an exclamation mark placed on a purple star-shaped base image, as shown in Figure 101(h). The navigation image of the fifth mode, although not specifically shown, is a navigation image with an exclamation mark placed on a green circular base image. The different navigation image modes make it possible to distinguish between the different navigation image types.

The ! Small Red Navigation and ! Big Red Navigation are ! Navigations that can be executed when a weak or strong cherry is won, and when the ! Small Red Navigation or ! Big Red Navigation is executed, it indicates that a weak or strong cherry will be won.

In addition, when a strong cherry is won, it is more advantageous for the player in terms of awarding bonuses than when a weak cherry is won, and when the percentage of strong cherries won when the ! small red navigation appears is compared to the percentage of strong cherries won when the ! large red navigation appears, the ! small red navigation and ! large red navigation are executed so that x < X, suggesting that when the ! large red navigation is executed, there is a higher chance of the player winning a strong cherry, which is more advantageous for the player in terms of awarding bonuses than when a weak cherry is won, than when the ! small red navigation is executed.

! Small Purple Navigation and ! Big Purple Navigation are ! Navigations that can be executed when Chance Symbol A or Chance Symbol B is won, and when ! Small Purple Navigation or ! Big Purple Navigation is executed, it indicates that Chance Symbol A or Chance Symbol B will be won.

Furthermore, when chance symbol B is won, it is more advantageous for the player in terms of receiving a bonus than when chance symbol A is won, and when the percentage y of chance symbol B being won when ! Small Purple Navigation appears is compared to the percentage Y of chance symbol B being won when ! Large Purple Navigation appears, ! Small Purple Navigation and ! Large Purple Navigation are executed so that y < Y, suggesting that when ! Large Purple Navigation is executed, there is a higher chance of the player winning chance symbol B, which is more advantageous for the player in terms of receiving a bonus than when chance symbol A is won, than when ! Small Purple Navigation is executed.

Also, the ! Green Navigation is a ! Navigation that can be executed when a watermelon is won, and when the ! Green Navigation is executed, it indicates that a watermelon has been won.

When the game starts and the start-of-game command is received, and the start-of-game command identifies a win for a weak cherry, strong cherry, chance symbol A, chance symbol B, or watermelon, and a decision is made to execute a navigation command, the performance control unit 151 displays a navigation image suggesting a win for a weak cherry, strong cherry, chance symbol A, chance symbol B, or watermelon in the navigation area above the see-through window 3W in the display area of the LCD display 51.

As shown in Figure 101(a), for example, if a weak cherry or strong cherry has been identified as a winning combination and the small red navigation is selected, a first-type navigation image suggesting a weak cherry or strong cherry has been won is displayed at the positions corresponding to the left, center, and right reels. Additionally, a cherry A sound is output from speakers 53 and 54, suggesting a weak cherry or strong cherry has been won, and all areas of the effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 are lit red.

As shown in Figure 101 (b), after a navigation image of a first type indicating a weak cherry or strong cherry win is displayed in the navigation area, when a stop command is received and it is determined that a first stop operation has been performed, the image changes to one in which the navigation image corresponding to the reel that will be stopped by the first stop operation disappears. In addition, all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 remain lit in red.

As shown in Figure 101 (c), when a stop command is further received and it is determined that a second stop operation has been performed, the navigation image corresponding to the reel stopped by the second stop operation is switched to an image that disappears. In addition, all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 remain lit in red.

As shown in Figure 101(d), when a stop command is further received and it is determined that a third stop operation has been performed, the image is switched to one that erases the navigation image corresponding to the reel that will be stopped by the third stop operation. In addition, all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 remain lit in red. Then, as shown in Figure 101(e), all navigation images are erased.

As shown in Figure 101 (f), when a weak cherry or strong cherry has been determined to be a win and the big red navigation has been selected, a second type of navigation image suggesting a weak cherry or strong cherry has been won is displayed at the positions corresponding to the left, center, and right reels. Additionally, a cherry B sound indicating a weak cherry or strong cherry has been won is output from speakers 53 and 54, and all areas of the effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 are lit red. After that, whenever a stop command is received and a stop operation is determined to have been performed, the corresponding navigation image is switched to an image that disappears.

As shown in Figure 101 (g), when a win on Chance Symbol A or Chance Symbol B is identified and the small purple navigation is selected, a navigation image of the third type, suggesting a win on Chance Symbol A or Chance Symbol B, is displayed at the positions corresponding to the left, center, and right reels. Also, a Chance Symbol A sound, suggesting a win on Chance Symbol A or Chance Symbol B, is output from speakers 53 and 54, and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 are lit purple. After that, whenever a stop command is received and a stop operation is identified, the corresponding navigation image is switched to an image that disappears.

As shown in Figure 101 (h), when a win on Chance Symbol A or Chance Symbol B is identified and the Big Purple Navigation is selected, a fourth type navigation image suggesting a win on Chance Symbol A or Chance Symbol B is displayed at the positions corresponding to the left, center, and right reels. Also, a Chance Symbol B sound is output from speakers 53 and 54 suggesting a win on Chance Symbol A or Chance Symbol B, and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 are lit purple. After that, whenever a stop command is received and a stop operation is identified, the corresponding navigation image is switched to an image that disappears.

Although not specifically shown, if a watermelon win is identified and the green navigation is selected, a fifth-pattern navigation image suggesting a watermelon win is displayed at the positions corresponding to the left, center, and right reels. Additionally, a watermelon sound is output from speakers 53 and 54, suggesting a watermelon win, and all areas of the effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 are lit green. After that, whenever a stop command is received and a stop operation is identified, the corresponding navigation image is switched to an image that disappears.

[Error notification]
The performance control unit 151 executes an error notification when it receives an error command indicating the start of an error state from the main control unit 161.

When the effect control unit 151 receives an error command indicating the start of an error state in which game progress is disabled, it causes the LCD display 51 to display an error image indicating an error state, as shown in FIG. 102(a). The error image is an image that displays an error code indicating the type of error identified from the error command and the details of the error. It also causes the speakers 53 and 54 to output an error alert sound, and causes all areas of the effect effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 to flash red. Thereafter, when it receives an error command indicating the end of the error state, it returns the display on the LCD display 51, the output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the lighting state of the effect effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 to the state before the error alert was executed.

[About setting change notifications]
The performance control unit 151 executes a setting change notification when it receives a setting change command indicating the start of a setting change state from the main control unit 161.

When the effect control unit 151 receives a setting change command indicating the start of a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed and game progress is disabled, it causes the LCD display 51 to display a setting change in progress image indicating that the setting change state is in progress, as shown in FIG. 102(b). It also causes the speakers 53 and 54 to output an error alert sound, and causes all areas of the effect effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 to flash red. Then, when it receives a setting change command indicating the end of the setting change state, it controls the display on the LCD display 51, the output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the lighting state of the effect effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 to return to their initial state after the setting change.

[About setting confirmation notification]
The performance control unit 151 executes a setting confirmation notification when it receives a setting confirmation command from the main control unit 161 indicating the start of a setting confirmation state.

When the effect control unit 151 receives a setting confirmation command indicating the start of a setting confirmation state in which the setting values can be confirmed and game progress is disabled, it causes the LCD display 51 to display a setting confirmation image indicating that the setting is in the setting confirmation state, as shown in FIG. 102(c). The setting confirmation image is an image that not only indicates that the setting is being confirmed, but also displays management information such as the door opening history. It also outputs an error alert sound from the speakers 53 and 54, and causes all areas of the effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 to flash red. Thereafter, when it receives a setting confirmation command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state, it returns the display on the LCD display 51, the output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the lighting state of the effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 to the state before the setting confirmation alert was executed.

[Startup notification]
The performance control unit 151 executes a startup notification when the device is started up by turning on the power.

When the power is turned on and the device starts up, the performance control unit 151 displays a maintenance image showing maintenance information such as the data loading status and ROM check results, as shown in Figure 102 (d). In addition, there is no output from the speakers 53 and 54, and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 are lit in white.

[Configuration of the performance control board]
As shown in Figure 103, the performance control board 15 is equipped with a performance control unit 151, a display control circuit (VDP) 152 that controls the display of the LCD display 51, a shared memory 153 that can write and read data from both the performance control unit 151 and the display control circuit (VDP) 152, an LED drive circuit 156 that drives the performance effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, and a sound control unit 157 that controls the sound output from the speakers 53 and 54, and these performance control unit 151, display control circuit (VDP) 152, shared memory 153, LED drive circuit 156, and sound control unit 157 are connected via a data bus so that data can be sent and received.

The performance control board 15 is also equipped with a CGROM 154 that stores image data and video data, and a VRAM 155 that expands the image data and video data read from the CGROM 154 by the display control circuit (VDP), and is connected to the display control circuit (VDP) 152 so that data can be sent and received. The performance control board 15 is also equipped with an audio ROM 158 that stores audio data, and is connected to the sound control unit 157 so that data can be sent and received.

[About the main processing for performance control]
Next, we will explain the main operations of the performance control unit 151. When the performance control unit 151 receives a supply of power supply voltage, the CPU 151a starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 104. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 104 starts, the performance control unit 151 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S101), setting various initial values, setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit), etc.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (S102). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 3 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time, the process of S102 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in S102, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (S103), and performance control processing is executed (S104). The performance control processing performs display control, lamp control, sound output control settings, etc. in accordance with commands received from the main control unit 161.

After the effect control process of S104, a display control process (S105) controls the display, a lamp control process (S106) controls the lamp, and a sound control process (S107) controls the sound based on the settings made in the effect control process. Then, an effect random number update process (S108) is executed, and the effect random number is updated by software. Then, by returning to the process of S102, the processes of S103 to S108 are repeatedly executed each time the timer interrupt flag is turned on in S102.

[Regarding performance control processing]
Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the performance control processing executed in the performance control main processing.

The performance control process determines whether a command sent from the main control unit 161 has been received (S151). Whether a command has been received is determined by checking whether the command is stored in the command receiving register.

If no command is received in S151, the process returns to the main performance control process. If a command is received in S151, the first command received from the commands stored in the command receiving register is obtained, and data identified from the obtained command is stored in RAM 151c (S152). Furthermore, when a command is obtained from the command receiving register, the obtained command is cleared.

Next, it is determined whether the received command is a game start command (S153), and if so, it is further determined whether all game start commands have been received (S154).

If there are any unreceived game start commands at S154, the process returns to the main effect control process. If all game start commands have been received, the process performs start fail-safe processing (S155), effect determination processing 1 (S156), and effect setting processing (S157), and then returns to the main effect control process.

The start fail-safe process of S155 executes a process to command the erasure of unnecessary images when game play begins. The effect determination process 1 of S156 determines the effect pattern for that game based on the setting status (win flag, etc.) at the start of the game, and sets a process table that defines the effect content for each timing during a game based on the effect pattern. The effect setting process of S157 executes a process to set the display command, lamp command, and audio command set in the process table in response to the received command. The display command specifies the display control content, the lamp command specifies the LED light emission pattern, and the audio command specifies the sound output control content.

If the received command in S153 is not a game start command, it is determined whether it is a game end command (S158), and if it is a game end command, it is further determined whether all game end commands have been received (S159).

If there are any unreceived end-of-game commands at S159, the process returns to the main effect control process. If all end-of-game commands have been received, the process performs end-of-game fail-safe processing (S160), effect determination processing 2 (S161), and effect setting processing (S157), and then returns to the main effect control process.

The end-of-game fail-safe process at S160 commands the deletion of unnecessary images when the game ends. The effect determination process 2 at S161 sets the process table for the next game according to the setting status at the end of the game (such as the game status of the next game).

If the received command at S158 is not a game end command, it is determined whether it is a disable command indicating the start of a disabled state (S162). Disable commands indicating the start of a disabled state include an error command indicating the start of an error state, a setting change command indicating the start of a setting change state, and a setting confirmation command indicating the start of a setting confirmation state.

If the received command in S162 is a disable command indicating the start of a disabled state, a disable flag is set in RAM 151c (S163). Here, if the disabled state is an error state, an error flag that can identify the type of error state is set; if the disabled state is a setting change state, a setting change in progress flag that indicates a setting change state is set; and if the disabled state is a setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation in progress flag is set.

Next, the disable start setting is performed (S164), and the process returns to the main performance control processing. The disable start setting involves setting the display command, lamp command, and voice command corresponding to the disabled state. For example, if the disabled state is an error state, a display command specifying the display of an error image, a lamp command specifying the light pattern corresponding to the error notification, and a voice command specifying the output of an error notification sound are set.

If the received command in S162 is not a command indicating the start of a disabled state, it is determined whether it is a disable command indicating the end of a disabled state (S165). Disable commands indicating the end of a disabled state include an error command indicating the end of an error state, a setting change command indicating the end of a setting change state, and a setting confirmation command indicating the end of a setting confirmation state.

If the received command at S165 is a disable command indicating the end of the disabled state, the disable flag set in RAM 151c is cleared (S166), the disable end setting is performed (S167), and the process returns to the main performance control processing. The disable end setting involves setting a display command, lamp command, and audio command corresponding to the end of the disabled state. The display command corresponding to the end of the disabled state is a display command that specifies the erasure of the error image, the setting change image, and the setting confirmation image. More specifically, it is a display command that specifies the clearing of the video data specified in Layer 20, described below, in which the error image, the setting change image, and the setting confirmation image are displayed. The lamp command corresponding to the end of the disabled state is a lamp command that specifies the stopping of the light emission pattern corresponding to the error notification. More specifically, it is a lamp command that specifies the clearing of the lamp data specified in Lamp Layer 1, described below, in which the lamp data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the error notification is set. Additionally, the voice command corresponding to ending the disabled state is a voice command that specifies the cessation of output of the error notification sound; more specifically, it is a voice command that specifies the clearing of the audio data specified in track 1, described below, where the audio data for the error notification sound is set.

If the received command at S165 is not a disable command indicating the end of the disabled state, the effect setting process is performed (S157) and then the process returns to the effect control main process.

[Regarding rendering determination process 1]
FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the performance determination process 1 executed in the performance control process.

In effect determination process 1, an effect pattern lottery is performed to determine the effect pattern for the game in accordance with the settings of the game start command sent from the main control unit 161 (S201). In the effect pattern lottery, if a winning flag indicating a push order role has been won and a push order command specifying the correct procedure for the push order role has been received, a decision is made to perform push order navigation. Also, if a winning flag indicating a 7-matching lip or a 7-missing lip has been received and a push order command specifying the operation mode to stop the 7-matching lip or black 7 symbol tenpai state has been received, a decision is made to perform 7 navigation. Also, if a winning flag indicating a weak cherry or strong cherry has been received, a decision may be made to perform ! small red navigation or ! big red navigation. Also, if a winning flag indicating a chance eye A or chance eye B has been received, a decision may be made to perform ! small purple navigation or ! big purple navigation. Also, if a winning flag indicating a watermelon has been received, a decision may be made to perform ! green navigation. Push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! If it is decided to use light purple navigation, large purple navigation, or green navigation, a navigation flag that can identify the type is set in RAM 151c.

Next, a presentation process table corresponding to the presentation pattern determined by the presentation pattern lottery is set (S202). The presentation process table is a table in which display commands, lamp commands, and audio commands corresponding to the presentation pattern are set in accordance with timing according to the progress of the game. As shown in FIG. 107(a), display commands, lamp commands, and audio commands specifying control content according to the corresponding presentation pattern are set in accordance with game start, spin start, first stop, second stop, third stop, third stop release, and next game bet.

Next, an additional effect lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute an additional effect such as a cut-in for the effect pattern determined in the effect pattern lottery (S203), and an additional effect process table is set to execute the additional effect determined in the additional effect lottery (S204). The additional effect process table is a table in which display commands, lamp commands, and audio commands corresponding to the additional effects are set in accordance with the timing at which the additional effects are executed as the game progresses.

Next, the navigation flag is checked to determine whether 7-navigation has been determined (S205). If 7-navigation has been determined in S205, the navigation flag is further checked to determine whether push order navigation has been determined (S206). If push order navigation has not been determined in S206, the winning flag identified from the start-of-game command is further checked to determine whether a predetermined combination (weak cherry, strong cherry, chance eye A, chance eye B, watermelon) has been won (S207). Then, if it is determined in S205 that 7-navigation has been determined, it is determined in S206 that push order navigation has not been determined, and it is determined in S207 that a predetermined combination has not been won, a navigation process table corresponding to 7-navigation is set (S208). The navigation process table is a table in which display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands corresponding to the type of navigation are set in accordance with the timing according to the progress of the game, and navigation is executed by setting the navigation process table. As shown in Figure 107(b), the navigation process table has display commands, lamp commands, and audio commands set in correspondence with the game start, spin start, first stop, second stop, and third stop that specify the control content according to the type of navigation. In addition, for the first stop, second stop, and third stop, display commands, lamp commands, and audio commands are set that specify the control content according to the type of navigation not only for the timing but also for each stopped reel and its stop order.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S206 that the push order navigation has been determined, i.e., if both the 7 navigation and the push order navigation have been determined, the navigation process table is not set and the process proceeds to S209, in which case neither navigation is executed. Also, if it is determined in S206 that the predetermined role has been won, i.e., if the 7 navigation has been determined and the predetermined role has been won, the navigation process table is not set and the process proceeds to S209, in which case neither navigation is executed.

If 7 Navigation has not been determined in S205, it is determined whether other Navigation (push order Navigation, ! small red Navigation, ! big red Navigation, ! small purple Navigation, ! big purple Navigation, green Navigation) has been determined (S210), and if other Navigation has been determined, the Navigation process table corresponding to the determined Navigation is set (S208). If other Navigation has not been determined in S210, proceed to S209.

In S209, the stop process table is set, and then the process returns to the effect control processing. The stop process table is a table that defines the effect content to be executed at the third stop release. As shown in Figure 107 (c), display commands, lamp commands, and audio commands are set to specify the control content when the conditions are met at the third stop release (for example, when a win occurs or when a specific stop pattern is achieved) and when the conditions are not met.

[About the production setting process]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the performance setting process executed in the performance control process.

The effect setting process obtains display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands corresponding to the timing of game progress identified from the command that triggered the execution of the effect setting process from the effect process table, additional process table, navigation process table, and stop-time process table, and sets them in the command area of RAM 151c (S251, S252, S253). In this case, if display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands are obtained from multiple process tables among the effect process table, additional process table, navigation process table, and stop-time process table, all display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands are set in the command area of RAM 151c, and multiple control contents are specified. For example, if display commands are set in multiple process tables at a specific timing, each display command will be set in the designated area of RAM 151c.

[Display control processing]
Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the display control processing executed in the performance control main processing.

During the display control process, it is determined whether an unprocessed display command has been set in the designated area of RAM 151C (S301), and if an unprocessed display command has been set, the video table stored in ROM 151b is referenced, and the video data corresponding to the set display command is added to the video list (S302).

As shown in Figure 110(a), the video table contains the address (CGROM address) of CGROM 154 where video data is stored, the display position, layer, transparency, and brightness corresponding to the display command. In S302, the CGROM address, display position, layer, transparency, and brightness corresponding to the display command set in the specified area of RAM 151C are obtained and added to the video list shown in Figure 110(b).

As shown in Figure 111, a specified layer is set for video data set in the video table according to the video type of the video data. The layer indicates the priority when displaying the video data; the smaller the layer number, the closer the video data is displayed. When images making up the video data overlap, the image of the video data with the smaller layer number will be displayed first. A layer of 0 to 255 can be set for the display control circuit (VDP) 152. Furthermore, all video data is of a single size that matches the display area, and the display position is always set to the same coordinate (0.0); however, if video data of a different size is used, simply set the coordinates that specify the position at which the video data should be displayed.

As shown in Figure 111, layer 10 is set as the video data layer for displaying maintenance images, layer 20 as the video data layer for displaying error images, images during setting changes, and images during setting confirmation, layer 50 as the video data layer for displaying navigation images that make up push order navigation, 7 navigation, and ! navigation, layer 70 as the video data layer for additional effects such as cut-ins, layer 80 as the video data layer for upper layer effects, layer 100 as the video data layer for UI (user interface) numerical values such as bet numbers, layer 110 as the video data layer for UI decorative images, layer 130 as the video data layer for lower layer effects, and layer 150 as the video data layer for background effects.

After S302, the processed display commands are cleared from the specified area (S303), and the process returns to S301, repeating steps S301 to S303 until video data corresponding to unprocessed display commands is added to the video list.

If there are no unprocessed display commands remaining in S301, as shown in FIG. 110(b), "END" is added to the end of the video list, the video list is written to shared memory 153 (S304), and then a command to read the video list is sent to the display control circuit (VDP) 152 (S305), and the process returns to the main performance control processing.

[Display processing]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the control content of the display process executed by the display control circuit (VDP) 152.

The display process is executed when a read command is sent from the performance control unit 151. First, it is determined whether unprocessed video data remains in the video list written to the shared memory 153 (S351). If unprocessed video data remains, the video data specified in the video list is read and set in the playback list (S352).

After S352, the processed video data is cleared from the video list (S353), and the process returns to S351. S351 to S353 are repeated until unprocessed video data is added to the playback list. If there is no unprocessed video data remaining at S351, a completion setting is made (S354), and the display process ends.

As shown in Figure 113, the playlist is an area where the CGROM address, display position, transparency, and brightness of video data are set for layers 0 to 255. One CGROM address, display position, transparency, and brightness can be set for one layer. If video data specifying the same layer is included in the video list, the video data read later overwrites the playlist, and the video data read later is set as the video data for that layer.

Once the completion setting is complete, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 reads the video data stored at the CGROM address set in the playlist, plays the video data based on the settings set in the playlist, and begins processing to display the video data on the LCD display 51. At this time, videos based on the video data are displayed overlapping each other according to the priority based on the layer of the playlist, with videos based on video data set in areas with lower layer numbers being displayed in the foreground.

For example, as shown in Figures 114(a) to (e), if video data for button press sequence navigation is set to layer 50 of the playlist, video data for UI numerical values is set to layer 100, video data for UI images is set to layer 110, video data for lower layer effects is set to layer 130, and video data for background effects is set to layer 150, then a video based on the video data for the lower layer effects will be displayed in front of the video based on the video data for the background effects, a video based on the video data for the UI images will be displayed in front of the video based on the video data for the lower layer effects, a video based on the video data for the UI images will be displayed in front of the video based on the video data for the UI numerical values, and a video based on the button press sequence navigation video data will be displayed in front of the video based on the video data for the UI numerical values, and these videos will be displayed overlapping each other to display a video such as that shown in Figure 114(f).

[Lamp control process]
Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the lamp control processing executed in the performance control main processing.

In the lamp control process, it is determined whether an unprocessed lamp command has been set in a specified area of RAM 151C (S401), and if an unprocessed lamp command has been set, the lamp data table stored in ROM 151b is referenced, and the lamp data corresponding to the set lamp command is set in the lamp layer assigned to RAM 151C (S402).

As shown in Figure 116 (a), the lamp data table contains the address in ROM 151b where lamp data is stored (lamp data address) and lamp layer corresponding to the lamp command. In S402, the lamp data address corresponding to the lamp command set in the specified area of RAM 151C is obtained and set to the corresponding lamp layer.

As shown in Figure 117, lamp layers are assigned lamp data address setting areas for each of lamp layers 1 to 4, with lamp layers with smaller numerical values being set with higher priorities. As a result, when lamp data is set for multiple lamp layers, LED lighting control is performed based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data with the highest priority.

As shown in Figure 116 (b), for lamp data set in the lamp data table, a prescribed lamp layer is set according to the type of light emission of the lamp data. Lamp layer 1 is set for lamp data that defines the light emission pattern for error notifications, lamp layer 2 is set for lamp data that defines the light emission patterns for push order navigation, 7 navigation, and ! navigation, lamp layer 3 is set for lamp data that defines the light emission pattern corresponding to the performance, and lamp layer 4 is set for lamp data that defines the light emission pattern corresponding to the background.

After S402, the processed lamp commands are cleared from the specified area (S403), and the process returns to S401, repeating steps S401 to S403 until lamp data corresponding to unprocessed lamp commands is set.

In addition, only one lamp data can be set for each of lamp layers 1 to 4, and if lamp commands specifying the same lamp layer are set, the lamp data specified by the lamp command read later is overwritten, and the lamp data read later is set as the lamp data for that lamp layer.

If there are no unprocessed lamp commands remaining at S401, LED signal output processing is performed to set the output signal to be output to the LED drive circuit 156 (S405), and the process returns to the main performance control processing.

In the LED signal output process, as shown in FIG. 118, if multiple lamp data are set in lamp layers 1 to 4, the output signal output to the LED drive circuit 156 is set based on the lamp data set in the lamp layer with the highest priority among the set lamp data. For example, if lamp data is set only in lamp layer 4 out of lamp layers 1 to 4, the light emission pattern is controlled based on the lamp data set in lamp layer 4. In this state, if lamp data is set in lamp layer 2, the light emission pattern is controlled based on the lamp data set in lamp layer 2. If the lamp data set in lamp layer 2 is then cleared, the light emission pattern is again controlled based on the lamp data set in lamp layer 4.

In addition, lamp data can specify all groups or only some groups for multiple groups of LEDs. When lamp data specifying all groups is set in a lamp layer with a higher priority, control based on the lamp data set in the lamp layer with a higher priority is applied to the LEDs of all groups. On the other hand, when lamp data specifying only some groups is set in a lamp layer with a higher priority, control based on the lamp data set in the lamp layer with a higher priority is applied to the LEDs of the specified groups, and control based on the lamp data set in the lamp layer with the next highest priority is applied to the LEDs of the remaining groups. Thus, depending on the group of LEDs, the light emission pattern may be controlled based on lamp data set in different lamp layers.

[Sound control processing]
Figure 119 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the sound control processing executed in the performance control main processing.

During the sound control process, it is determined whether an unprocessed voice command has been set in the designated area of RAM 151C (S451), and if an unprocessed voice command has been set, the sound designation command table stored in ROM 151b is referenced, and the sound designation command corresponding to the set voice command is added to the command list (S452).

As shown in Figure 120(a), the sound designation command table stores the address (audio ROM address) of the audio ROM 158 where the audio data is stored, the track, and the volume corresponding to the audio command. In S452, the audio ROM address, track, and volume corresponding to the audio command set in the designated area of RAM 151C are obtained and added to the command list shown in Figure 120(b).

As shown in Figure 121, for each sound designation command set in the sound designation command table, a specified track is set according to the type of sound data specified by the sound designation command. A track is an area for setting sound data, and by setting sound data in multiple tracks, sounds based on the respective sound data are synthesized and output. Tracks 0 to 15 can be set for the sound control unit 157.

As shown in Figure 121, track 1 is set as the audio data track for the error notification sound, track 2 is set as the audio data track for the push order navigation, 7 navigation, and ! navigation, tracks 3-10 are set as audio data tracks for the effects, tracks 11-13 are set as audio data tracks for the game notification sound, and tracks 14-15 are set as audio data tracks for the background music.

After S452, the processed voice command is cleared from the designation area (S453), and the process returns to S451, repeating steps S451 to S453 until a sound designation command corresponding to an unprocessed voice command is added to the command list.

If there are no unprocessed voice commands remaining at S451, "END" is added to the end of the command list as shown in FIG. 120(b), the sound designation commands set in the command list are sent to the sound control unit 157 (S454), and the process returns to the main performance control processing.

[Sound setting processing]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the control content of the sound setting process executed by the sound control unit 157.

The sound setting process is executed when a sound designation command is sent from the performance control unit 151. First, it is determined whether or not there are any unprocessed sound designation commands remaining (S501). If there are any unprocessed sound designation commands remaining, the sound designation commands are read, the specified audio data is read, and the data is set in the playback list (S502).

After S502, the processed sound designation data is cleared (S503), and the process returns to S501. S501 to S503 are repeated until the sound data specified by the unprocessed sound designation commands is set in the playback list. If there are no unprocessed sound designation commands remaining in S501, a completion setting is performed (S504), and the sound setting process ends.

As shown in Figure 123, the playlist is an area where the audio ROM address and volume are set for tracks 1 to 16. One audio ROM address and volume can be set for one track. If sound designation commands specifying the same track are included, the audio data specified by the sound designation command read last is overwritten on the playlist, and the audio data specified by the sound designation command read last is set as the audio data for that track.

When the completion setting is made, as shown in FIG. 123, the sound control unit 157 reads out the audio data stored at the audio ROM address set in the play list, plays the audio data based on the volume set in the play list, and outputs audio based on the audio data from speakers 53 and 54. At this time, if audio data is set on multiple tracks, the audio based on this audio data is synthesized and output from speakers 53 and 54.

[Fail-safe processing at start-up]
Figure 124 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the start-up fail-safe processing executed in the performance control processing.

The startup fail-safe process performs a setting to erase the navigation image (S551) and a setting to erase the maintenance image (S552). In S551, a display command that specifies erasing the navigation image, i.e., a display command that specifies clearing the video data specified for layer 50 on which the navigation image is displayed, is set in a designated area of RAM 151c. In S552, a display command that specifies erasing the maintenance image, i.e., a display command that specifies clearing the video data specified for layer 10 on which the maintenance image is displayed, is set in a designated area of RAM 151c.

Next, it is determined whether a disable flag (error flag, setting change flag, setting confirmation flag) is set (S553), and if a disable flag is set, the process returns to the main performance control processing. On the other hand, if the disable flag is not set in S553, the process sets the disable image (error image, setting change image, setting confirmation image) to be erased (S554), and the process returns to the main performance control processing. In S554, a display command specifying the erasure of the disabled image, i.e., a display command specifying the clearing of the video data specified in layer 20 on which the error image, setting change image, or setting confirmation image is displayed, is set in a specified area of RAM 151c. The display command set in S554 is the same command as the display command set in S167 when a disable command indicating the end of the disable state is received in the performance control processing, and the erase of the disabled image (error image, setting change image, setting confirmation image) is performed using the same control as when a disable command indicating the end of the disable state is received.

[Fail-safe processing at termination]
Figure 125 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the start-up fail-safe processing executed in the performance control processing.

During the termination fail-safe process, the navigation image is set to be erased (S601) and the process returns to the main performance control process. In S601, a display command specifying the erasure of the navigation image, i.e., a display command specifying the clearing of the video data specified for layer 50 on which the navigation image is displayed, is set in a specified area of RAM 151c.

[About controlling the button sequence navigation]
When executing button press order navigation, the performance control unit 151 controls the display of the LCD display 51, the lighting of the LEDs, and the output of audio by setting display commands, lamp commands, and audio commands by referring to the navigation process table shown in Figures 126 to 129.

Specifically, at the start of a game, a display command specifying the video data and layer 50 for displaying navigation images suggesting the stopping order of the reels in the positions in the navigation area corresponding to the reel that should stop first, the reel that should stop second, and the reel that should stop third, a lamp command specifying a lighting pattern for lighting the area of the effect LED 52 corresponding to the reel that should stop first in yellow, and a voice command specifying the output of a navigation voice corresponding to the reel that should stop first are set. For example, as shown in Figure 99(a), a navigation image suggesting the stopping order of the reel that should stop first, the reel that should stop second, and the reel that should stop third is displayed in the navigation area, the area of the effect LED 52 corresponding to the reel that should stop first is lit, and a navigation voice suggesting the reel that should stop first is output.

At the first stop, if the reel that should be stopped first as suggested by the push order navigation is stopped, the navigation image suggesting the stopping order of the first reel disappears, and the navigation image suggesting the stopping order of the second and third reels is enlarged and displayed. A display command specifying the video data and layer 50 is also set, as well as a lamp command specifying a lighting pattern that lights up the area of the effect LED 52 corresponding to the second reel in yellow, and a voice command specifying the output of the navigation voice corresponding to the second reel. For example, as shown in Figure 99(b), the navigation image suggesting the stopping order of the first reel disappears, the navigation image suggesting the stopping order of the second and third reels is enlarged, the area of the effect LED 52 corresponding to the second reel is lit, and the navigation voice suggesting the second reel is output.

During the second stop, if the reel that should be stopped second in the stop order suggested by the push order navigation is stopped, the navigation image suggesting the stop order of the second reel is erased, and the navigation image suggesting the stop order of the third reel is enlarged. By setting a display command specifying the video data and layer 50, a lamp command specifying a lighting pattern that lights up the area of the performance effect LED 52 corresponding to the third reel in yellow, and a voice command specifying the output of the navigation voice corresponding to the third reel, for example, as shown in Figure 99 (c), the navigation image suggesting the stop order of the second reel is erased, the navigation image suggesting the stop order of the third reel is enlarged, the area corresponding to the third reel is lit, and the navigation voice suggesting the third reel is output.

At the third stop, if a stop operation is performed on the reel that should stop third in the stop order suggested by the push order navigation, video data that erases the navigation image suggesting the stop order of the third reel, a display command that specifies the layer 50, and a lamp command that specifies a lighting pattern that turns off the areas of the effect LEDs 52 corresponding to all reels are set. For example, as shown in Figure 99 (d), the navigation image suggesting the stop order of the third reel disappears, and the areas of the effect LEDs 52 corresponding to all reels are turned off.

In addition, when the third stop is released (when the third stop operation is released), the termination fail-safe processing shown in FIG. 125 sets a display command that specifies clearing of the video data specified in layer 50 where the navigation images are displayed, regardless of which stop order operation mode was suggested. As shown in FIG. 99(e), all navigation images displayed on layer 50 are erased, regardless of which stop order operation mode was suggested.

Furthermore, if a stop operation is performed at the first, second, or third stop in an order other than that suggested by the push order navigation, regardless of which stop order operation mode was suggested, by setting a display command that specifies clearing the video data specified in layer 50 where the navigation image is displayed, and a lamp command that specifies a lighting pattern that turns off the areas of effect LED 52 corresponding to all reels, all navigation images displayed on layer 50 are erased and the areas of effect LED 52 corresponding to all reels are turned off, as shown in Figure 99 (f), regardless of which stop order operation mode was suggested.

[About controlling 7Navigation]
When executing 7Navi, the performance control unit 151 controls the display of the LCD display 51, the lighting of the LEDs, and the output of the audio by setting display commands, lamp commands, and audio commands by referring to the navigation process table shown in Figure 130.

Specifically, at the start of a game, a display command specifying video data and layer 50 is set to display a navigation image "7" in the navigation area in a position corresponding to the right reel where the first stop operation should be performed, and a navigation image "left arrow" in the position corresponding to the center reel where the second stop operation should be performed, and a navigation image "left arrow" in the position corresponding to the right reel where the third stop operation should be performed; a lamp command specifying a light pattern that causes the right, center, and left regions of the effect LEDs 52 to light up in red, flowing from right to center to left; and a voice command specifying the output of a navigation voice suggesting that the stop operation should be aimed at the black 7 symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 100(a), the navigation image "7," the navigation image "left arrow," and the navigation image "left arrow" are displayed in the navigation area in positions corresponding to the right reel, center reel, and left reel, respectively; the right, center, and left regions of the effect LEDs 52 light up in red, flowing from right to center to left; and a navigation voice suggesting that the stop operation should be aimed at the black 7 symbol is output.

During the first stop, if the right reel stop operation suggested as the first stop operation is performed and a black 7 symbol stops on the right reel, the navigation image "7" corresponding to the right reel disappears and the navigation image "left arrow" corresponding to the center reel changes to the navigation image "7." By setting video data and display commands specifying the layer 50, and a lamp command specifying an illumination pattern in which the right region of the effect LED 52 is turned off and the central and left regions are lit in red, flowing from right to center to left, for example, as shown in FIG. 100(b), the navigation image "7" corresponding to the right reel disappears, the navigation image "left arrow" corresponding to the center reel changes to the navigation image "7," the right region of the effect LED 52 is turned off, and the central and left regions are lit in red, flowing from right to center to left.

During the second stop, if the center reel stop operation suggested as the second stop operation is performed, and a black 7 symbol stops on the center reel, and black 7 symbols are formed on the right and center reels, the navigation image "7" corresponding to the center reel disappears, and the navigation image "left arrow" corresponding to the left reel changes to the navigation image "7." This can be achieved by setting video data and display commands specifying the layer 50, and a lamp command specifying an illumination pattern in which the right and center regions of the effect LED 52 are turned off and the left region is lit in red, flowing from top to bottom. For example, as shown in FIG. 100(c), the navigation image "7" corresponding to the center reel disappears, the navigation image "left arrow" corresponding to the left reel changes to the navigation image "7," the right and center regions of the effect LED 52 are turned off, and the left region is lit in red, flowing from top to bottom.

At the third stop, if the left reel is stopped and a black 7 symbol stops on the left reel and black 7 symbols line up on the right, center, and left reels, video data is set to erase the navigation image indicating the stopping order of the third reel, a display command specifying the layer 50, and a lamp command specifying a lighting pattern to turn off the areas of the effect LEDs 52 corresponding to all reels. For example, as shown in Figure 99(d), the navigation image "7" corresponding to the left reel disappears and the areas of the effect LEDs 52 corresponding to all reels are turned off.

In addition, when the third stop is released (when the third stop operation is released), the termination fail-safe processing shown in Figure 125 sets a display command that specifies clearing of the video data specified in layer 50 on which the navigation image is displayed, thereby erasing all navigation images displayed on layer 50, as shown in Figure 100 (e).

Furthermore, if the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the right-center-left order suggested by the 7-navigator at the first, second, or third stop, if the black 7 symbol does not stop at the first stop, if the black 7 symbol is not completed at the second stop, or if the black 7 symbols are not aligned at the third stop, in any of these cases, by setting a display command that specifies clearing the video data specified in layer 50 on which the navigation image is displayed, and a lamp command that specifies a lighting pattern that turns off the areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 corresponding to all reels, in any case, as shown in Figure 100(f), all of the navigation images displayed on layer 50 will be erased and the areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 corresponding to all reels will be turned off.

[! About navigation control]
When executing the navigation, the performance control unit 151 refers to the navigation process table shown in FIG. 131 and sets display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands, thereby controlling the display of the liquid crystal display 51, the lighting of the LEDs, and the output of voices.

Specifically, at the start of a game, a display command specifying video data and layer 50 for displaying the determined type of navigation image "!" at positions corresponding to the left, center, and right reels in the navigation area, a lamp command specifying a lighting pattern for lighting up the areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 corresponding to all reels in the color corresponding to the navigation image "!", and a voice command specifying the output of an alert sound corresponding to the navigation image "!" are set. For example, as shown in Figure 101(a), the determined type of navigation image "!" is displayed in the navigation area corresponding to the left, center, and right reels, the areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 corresponding to all reels are lit up in the color corresponding to the navigation image "!", and an alert sound corresponding to the navigation image "!" is output.

At the first and second stops, by setting a display command that specifies video data and layer 50 that causes the navigation image "!" corresponding to the stopped reel to disappear and the navigation image "!" corresponding to the unstopped reel to remain displayed, the navigation image "!" corresponding to the stopped reel will disappear and the navigation image "!" corresponding to the unstopped reel will remain displayed, as shown in Figures 101(b) and 101(c), for example.

At the third stop, by setting video data that causes the navigation image "!" corresponding to the stopped reel to disappear and a display command that specifies layer 50, the navigation image "!" corresponding to the stopped reel will disappear, for example, as shown in Figure 101 (d).

In addition, when the third stop is released (when the third stop operation is released), the termination fail-safe processing shown in Figure 125 sets a display command that specifies clearing of the video data specified in layer 50 on which the navigation image is displayed, thereby erasing all navigation images displayed on layer 50, as shown in Figure 101 (e).

[About stop control and navigation]
When a push order role is won, the performance control unit 151 can perform push order navigation that suggests an operation mode corresponding to the type of push order role, i.e., an operation mode that will stop the main role, and by performing a stop operation in accordance with the operation mode suggested by the push order navigation, it is possible to stop the main role according to the type of push order role.

In this embodiment, when one of multiple types of navigation target roles is won, the main character is stopped by performing stop operations in a stopping order corresponding to the type of navigation target role, and the main character is not stopped by performing stop operations in a stopping order other than the stopping order corresponding to the type of navigation target role. However, the configuration may also be such that when one of multiple types of navigation target roles is won, the main character is stopped by performing stop operations at a timing corresponding to the type of navigation target role, and the main character is not stopped by performing stop operations at a timing other than the timing of the stop operation corresponding to the type of navigation target role; or when one of multiple types of navigation target roles is won, the main character is stopped by performing stop operations in a stopping order and at a timing other than the stopping order corresponding to the type of navigation target role, and the main character is not stopped by performing stop operations in a stopping order other than the stopping order corresponding to the type of navigation target role or at a timing other than the stopping order corresponding to the type of navigation target role.

Furthermore, when a 7-matching lip, which grants a special benefit to the player, is won, the performance control unit 151 can perform a 7-navigation that suggests an operation mode to stop the 7-matching lip to form a 7-matching, and the 7-matching lip can be stopped by performing a stop operation according to the operation mode suggested by the 7-navigation, and when the 7-matching lip stops to form a 7-matching, it can suggest that a special benefit has been awarded.Furthermore, the performance control unit 151 can perform a 7-navigation not only when a 7-matching lip is won, but also when a non-matching 7 lip is won.Furthermore, when a non-matching 7 lip is won, the performance control unit 151 can perform a 7-navigation, which suggests an operation mode to stop the black 7 symbol in the ready state by performing a stop operation according to the operation mode suggested by the 7-navigation. This means that 7 Navi can be executed when a 7-matching reel, in which black 7 symbols line up, is won, or when a 7-matching reel, in which black 7 symbols are ready but ultimately do not line up, is won, thereby increasing the opportunities for 7 Navi and, by executing 7 Navi, players can look forward to winning a 7-matching reel, which will grant them a beneficial bonus.

In this embodiment, when a 7-matched lip or a 7-mismatched lip is won, the system controls the system to stop the 7-matched lip or the black 7 symbol in the ready state by performing a stop operation in a predetermined stop order (right-center-left stop order) and at a predetermined stop operation timing (a stop operation timing within the range of the black 7 symbol being drawn into the top row of the left reel, the middle row of the middle reel, and the bottom row of the right reel (5 symbols including the stop operation position)), and controls the system not to stop the 7-matched lip or the black 7 symbol in the ready state by performing a stop operation in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order (right-center-left stop order) or at a stop operation timing other than the predetermined stop operation timing. However, when a 7-matched lip or a 7-missing lip is won, the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stopping order to stop the ready state of the 7-matched lip or black 7 symbol, and the stop operation is performed in a stopping order other than the predetermined stopping order to prevent the ready state of the 7-matched lip or black 7 symbol from being stopped; or the stop operation is performed at a predetermined stop operation timing to prevent the ready state of the 7-matched lip or black 7 symbol from being stopped, and the stop operation is performed at a stop operation timing other than the predetermined stop operation timing to prevent the ready state of the 7-matched lip or black 7 symbol from being stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a 7-match replay or a 7-missing replay is won, control is exercised to prevent the 7-match replay or the black 7 symbol from being stopped by performing a stop operation in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order or at a stop operation timing other than the predetermined stop operation timing. However, even in this case, control is exercised to stop the winning state of either replay, so the player will not be disadvantaged even if 7 Navi is not executed when a 7-match replay or a 7-missing replay is won.

In addition, the performance control unit 151 can execute ! Small Red Navigation and ! Big Red Navigation, which suggest a win for a weak cherry or a strong cherry, when a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won. Furthermore, when a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won, the left reel is set to the first stop and the left reel is stopped within the range of the No. 5 cherry symbol drawn into the lower row, resulting in different stop patterns when a weak cherry is won and when a strong cherry is won. On the other hand, when a reel other than the left reel is set to the first stop, or when the left reel is stopped outside the range of the No. 5 cherry symbol drawn into the lower row, the same stop pattern is achieved when a weak cherry is won and when a strong cherry is won. When ! Small Red Navigation and ! Big Red Navigation are executed, the left reel is set to the first stop and the left reel is stopped using the No. 6 BAR symbol as a guide, making it possible to determine whether a weak cherry or a strong cherry has been won.

In addition, since the execution of the ! Big Red Navigation indicates a higher probability of winning a strong cherry than the execution of the ! Small Red Navigation, the execution of the ! Big Red Navigation can give players hope of winning a strong cherry, which is more advantageous for the player in terms of awarding bonuses than winning a weak cherry.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 151 can execute "! Small Purple Navigation" and "! Big Purple Navigation," which suggest a win for Chance Eye A or Chance Eye B, when Chance Eye A or Chance Eye B is won. Furthermore, when Chance Eye A or Chance Eye B is won, by setting the left reel to the first stop and operating the left reel to stop within the range of the No. 6 BAR symbol being drawn into the lower row, different stop patterns will be obtained when Chance Eye A is won and when Chance Eye B is won. On the other hand, by setting a reel other than the left reel to the first stop or operating the left reel to stop outside the range of the No. 6 BAR symbol being drawn into the lower row, the same stop pattern will be obtained when Chance Eye A is won and when Chance Eye B is won. When "! Small Purple Navigation" and "! Big Purple Navigation" are executed, by setting the left reel to the first stop and stopping the left reel using the No. 6 BAR symbol as a guide, it becomes possible to determine whether Chance Eye A or Chance Eye B is won when Chance Eye A or Chance Eye B is won.

Furthermore, since the execution of the ! Big Purple Navigation suggests that there is a higher probability of winning Chance Number B than when the ! Small Purple Navigation is executed, the execution of the ! Big Purple Navigation can make the player hopeful of winning Chance Number B, which is more advantageous for the player in terms of awarding a bonus than when Chance Number A is won.

In addition, when a watermelon is won, the performance control unit 151 can execute a green navigation that suggests a watermelon win! Furthermore, when a watermelon is won, stopping the center and right reels within the range in which the watermelon symbol is drawn to the middle of the center reel or the bottom of the right reel will result in a watermelon stopping pattern and a win. On the other hand, stopping the center and right reels outside the range in which the watermelon symbol is drawn to the middle of the center reel or the bottom of the right reel will not result in a watermelon stopping pattern and will not result in a win.

[About navigation images and layers]
When it is determined that one of the push order navigation, 7 navigation,! small red navigation,! big red navigation,! small purple navigation,! big purple navigation, or! green navigation will be performed, or when it is determined that one of the push order navigations suggesting different operation modes will be performed, the performance control unit 151 sets a display command specifying video data for displaying a different navigation image, thereby creating a video list specifying the video data and layers specified by the display command through display control processing, and executes a video list read command to the display control circuit (VDP) 152. As a result, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 creates a playback list in which the video data specified by the video list is set, and by playing back the video data based on the settings set in the playback list, the corresponding navigation image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

In addition, all of the video data displaying navigation images that make up the push order navigation, video data displaying navigation images that make up the 7 navigation, video data displaying navigation images that make up the! Small Red Navi, video data displaying navigation images that make up the! Big Red Navi, video data displaying navigation images that make up the! Small Purple Navi, video data displaying navigation images that make up the! Big Purple Navi, and video data displaying navigation images that make up the! Green Navi are video data that display navigation images in a common navigation area, and at least a portion of these navigation images are displayed in a position where at least a portion of the navigation image overlaps in the common navigation area, making it easier to recognize the operation mode suggested by the navigation images when any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation,! Small Red Navi,! Big Red Navi,! Small Purple Navi,! Big Purple Navi, or! Green Navi is executed.

Furthermore, among the navigation images that make up the push order navigation, all video data that display navigation images suggesting different operation modes are video data that display the navigation images in a common navigation area, and at least a portion of these navigation images are displayed in a position in which at least a portion of the navigation image overlaps in the common navigation area, making it easier to recognize the operation mode suggested by the navigation image no matter which push order navigation suggesting which operation mode is executed.

In addition, when video data is specified for different layers in a video list, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 creates a playlist in which video data for each layer is set based on the specified video data, and plays the video data based on the settings set in the playlist. At this time, videos based on the video data are displayed overlapping each other according to the priority based on the layer in the playlist, with videos based on video data set in areas with lower layer numbers being displayed in the foreground.

In addition, while it is possible to specify multiple video data by specifying the same layer in a video list, only one video data can be set for the same layer in a playback list. Even if multiple video data specifying the same layer are specified in a video list, only one video data can be set for the same layer in the playback list, and a video based on the set video data will be displayed.

In this embodiment, when multiple video data specifying the same layer are specified in the video list, the video data specified later for that layer in the video list is set in the playback list as the video data for that layer. In such cases, it is only necessary to display the video based on the video data specified later, thereby simplifying the control by the display control circuit (VDP) 152.

Furthermore, when multiple video data specifying the same layer are specified in the video list, the video data specified first for that layer in the video list may be set in the playback list as the video data for that layer. Even in such cases, it is sufficient to display only the video based on the video data specified first, thereby simplifying control by the display control circuit (VDP) 152.

In addition, in this embodiment, when multiple video data specifying the same layer are specified in the video list, only one video data is set for the same layer in the playback list, so that when multiple video data are set for the same layer, only a video based on one of the video data specified for the same layer is displayed. However, when multiple video data specifying the same layer are specified in the video list, multiple video data specifying the same layer can also be set in the playback list, but when multiple video data are set for the same layer during playback, only a video based on one video data can be displayed. In this case, when multiple video data are specified for the same layer in the playback list, the control by the display control circuit (VDP) 152 can be simplified by displaying only a video based on the video data set for that layer later, or by displaying only a video based on the video data set for that layer earlier.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 151 creates a video list that specifies the same layer 20 as the layer of video data for displaying navigation images when executing any of the following: push order navigation, 7 navigation,! small red navigation,! big red navigation,! small purple navigation,! big purple navigation, and! green navigation. Therefore, even if a previous display command remains due to some kind of malfunction, and video data for navigation images that suggest different operation modes or contents are specified by the video list among the navigation images that make up push order navigation, the navigation image that makes up 7 navigation, the navigation image that makes up! small red navigation, the navigation image that makes up! big red navigation, the navigation image that makes up! small purple navigation, the navigation image that makes up! big purple navigation, and the navigation image that makes up! green navigation, only one of the video data is set in the playback list, and only the navigation image that suggests that content is displayed.

Specifically, even if the video list specifies video data for navigation images that make up the push order navigation and video data for navigation images that make up the 7-navigation, only one of the video data is set in the playback list, and only the navigation image that suggests one content is displayed, preventing navigation images that suggest different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other. In particular, the suggested operation modes will not be difficult to understand due to the navigation images that make up the push order navigation and the navigation images that make up the 7-navigation being displayed overlapping each other with some overlapping in the navigation area.

Furthermore, even if video data of navigation images that suggest different stop orders are simultaneously specified in the video list among the video data of navigation images that make up the push order navigation, only one of the video data is set in the playback list and only the navigation image suggesting one content is displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other. In particular, navigation images suggesting different operation modes will not be displayed overlapping each other in the navigation area, making it difficult to understand the suggested operation modes.

Furthermore, even if the video list specifies video data for the navigation image that makes up the ! Small Red Navi or the ! Big Red Navi and video data for the navigation image that makes up the ! Small Purple Navi or the ! Big Purple Navi or the video data for the navigation image that makes up the ! Green Navi, only one of the video data is set in the playlist and only the navigation image that suggests one of the video data is displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different winning roles from being overlapped. In particular, there is no overlap in the navigation area between the navigation image that makes up the ! Small Red Navi or the ! Big Red Navi and the navigation image that makes up the ! Small Purple Navi or the navigation image that makes up the ! Big Purple Navi or the navigation image that makes up the ! Green Navi, making it difficult to understand the suggested winning role.

Furthermore, even if the video list specifies video data for the navigation image that makes up the ! Small Red Navigation and video data for the navigation image that makes up the ! Large Red Navigation, or video data for the navigation image that makes up the ! Small Purple Navigation and video data for the navigation image that makes up the ! Large Purple Navigation, only one of the video data will be set in the playlist and only the navigation image that suggests one of the contents will be displayed, preventing navigation images that suggest different winning possibilities from being displayed overlapping each other. In particular, there will be no overlapping in the navigation area, where the navigation images that make up the ! Small Red Navigation and the ! Large Red Navigation, or the navigation images that make up the ! Small Purple Navigation and the ! Large Purple Navigation, overlap and are displayed overlapping, making it difficult to understand the suggested winning possibilities.

In addition, when executing any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation,! small red navigation,! big red navigation,! small purple navigation,! big purple navigation, and! green navigation, the performance control unit 151 creates a video list that specifies the same layer for the image data of the navigation image from the start of displaying the navigation image until the display ends, and can display the navigation image with the same priority as images based on video data that specify other layers from the start of displaying the navigation image until the display of the navigation image ends.

In addition, when executing any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation,! small red navigation,! big red navigation,! small purple navigation,! big purple navigation, and! green navigation, the performance control unit 151 changes the display of the navigation image to a video based on different video data each time a stop operation is performed after starting the display of the navigation image, and creates a video list that specifies the same layer as the video data before the change for the image data after the change.After starting the display of the navigation image, the navigation image that has changed due to the stop operation can be displayed with the same priority as images based on video data with other layers specified.

Furthermore, a video list can be created that specifies a layer with a higher priority for the post-change video data than the image data before the change. By configuring it in this way, even if video data for displaying the pre-change navigation image remains, the post-change navigation image can be displayed with priority.

[Regarding Modification Example 1 of Display Control]
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 151 sets a display command in the performance control process, creates a video list in the display control process that specifies the video data and layers, etc. specified by the display command, and executes a video list read command to the display control circuit (VDP) 152, which causes the display control circuit (VDP) 152 to create a playback list in which the video data specified by the video list is set, and plays the video data based on the settings set in the playback list, causing the corresponding image to be displayed on the LCD display 51. However, the performance control unit 151 may also be configured to execute the display control process for each frame in which an image is updated, and set an image list in the shared memory 153 for each frame that specifies the image data and layers, etc. for each frame that make up the video data specified by the display command, and the display control circuit (VDP) 152 may draw the image data specified by the image list in the frame buffer of the VRAM 155 in the next frame, causing the LCD display 51 to display an image based on the settings set in the image list.

In this configuration, when image data is specified for different layers in the image list, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 sets the image data for each layer based on the specified image data and draws the image in the frame buffer based on the settings. In this case, images based on image data are drawn so that they are displayed overlapping each other according to the priority based on the specified layer, with images based on image data set in areas with lower layer numbers being displayed in the foreground.

In addition, it is possible to specify multiple image data by specifying the same layer in the image list, but the display control circuit (VDP) 152 can only set one image data for the same layer. Even if multiple image data specifying the same layer are specified in the image list, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 will only set one image data for the same layer, and the image based on the set image data will be displayed as the image for that layer.

Furthermore, when multiple image data specifying the same layer are specified in the image list, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 is configured so that the image data specified later for that layer in the image list is set as the image data for that layer.In such cases, it is sufficient to display only the image based on the image data specified later as the image for that layer, thereby simplifying the control by the display control circuit (VDP) 152.

Furthermore, when multiple image data specifying the same layer are specified in the image list, the image data specified first for that layer in the image list may be set as the image data for that layer. Even in such cases, it is sufficient to display only the image based on the image data specified first as the image for that layer, thereby simplifying control by the display control circuit (VDP) 152.

Furthermore, in this configuration, the performance control unit 151 creates an image list that specifies the same layer as the layer of image data for displaying the navigation image when executing any of the following: push order navigation, 7 navigation,! small red navigation,! big red navigation,! small purple navigation,! big purple navigation, and! green navigation.By doing so, even if part of the image list from an earlier frame remains due to some kind of malfunction, and image data for navigation images that suggest different operation modes or contents are specified in the image list for the push order navigation, 7 navigation,! small red navigation,! big red navigation,! small purple navigation,! big purple navigation, and! green navigation, by specifying the same layer for all, only one of the image data will be set as the image data for that layer, and only the navigation image suggesting the specific content can be displayed.

Specifically, even if the image list specifies image data for navigation images that make up the push order navigation and image data for navigation images that make up the 7 navigation, by specifying the same layer for both, only one of the image data will be set as the image data for that layer, and only the navigation image that suggests one content will be displayed, preventing navigation images that suggest different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

Furthermore, even if the image list simultaneously specifies image data of navigation images that make up the push order navigation, each of which suggests a different stop order, the same layer is specified for all of them, so only one of the image data is set as the image data for that layer, and only the navigation image suggesting one content is displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

Also, even if the image list specifies image data for the navigation image that makes up the! Small Red Navi or image data for the navigation image that makes up the! Large Red Navi and image data for the navigation image that makes up the! Small Purple Navi or image data for the navigation image that makes up the! Large Purple Navi or image data for the navigation image that makes up the! Green Navi, by specifying the same layer for all of them, only one of the image data will be set as the image data for that layer, and only the navigation image that suggests one content will be displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different winning roles from being displayed overlapping each other.

Also, even if the image list specifies image data for the navigation image that makes up the ! Small Red Navigation and image data for the navigation image that makes up the ! Large Red Navigation, or image data for the navigation image that makes up the ! Small Purple Navigation and image data for the navigation image that makes up the ! Large Purple Navigation, by specifying the same layer for both, only one of the image data will be set as the image data for that layer, and only the navigation image that suggests one content will be displayed, preventing navigation images that suggest different winning possibilities from being displayed overlapping each other.

In addition, when executing any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, and ! green navigation, the performance control unit 151 creates an image list that specifies the same layer for the image data of the navigation image from the start of displaying the navigation image until the display ends, thereby allowing the navigation image to be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data with other layers specified from the start of displaying the navigation image until the display of the navigation image ends.

In addition, when the performance control unit 151 executes any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation,! small red navigation,! big red navigation,! small purple navigation,! big purple navigation, and! green navigation, after starting to display the navigation image, it changes to an image based on different image data each time a stop operation is performed, and by creating an image list that specifies the same layer for the changed image data as the image data before the change, after starting to display the navigation image, the navigation image that has changed due to the stop operation can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data that specify other layers.

Furthermore, an image list can be created that specifies a layer with a higher priority for the post-change image data than for the pre-change image data. By configuring it in this way, even if image data for displaying the pre-change navigation image remains, the post-change navigation image can be displayed with priority.

[Display Control Modification Example 2]
In display control variant 1, the performance control unit 151 executes display control processing for each frame that updates an image, and sets an image list for each frame that specifies the image data and layers, etc., for each frame that make up the video data specified by the display command in the shared memory 153, and the display control circuit (VDP) 152 draws the image data specified by the image list in the frame buffer of the VRAM 155 in the next frame, thereby causing the LCD display 51 to display an image based on the settings set in the image list.However, it is also possible to configure the performance control unit 151 to execute display control processing for each frame that updates an image, and to create an image list for each frame that sets the image data for each frame that makes up the video data specified by the display command in order of lowest display priority, and set the created image list in the shared memory 153, and the display control circuit (VDP) 152 draws the image data specified by the image list in the frame buffer of the VRAM 155 in the order set in the image list in the next frame, thereby causing the LCD display 51 to display an image based on the settings set in the image list.

In this configuration, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 draws the image data set in the image list in the frame buffer of the VRAM 155 in the order set in the image list, so that image data set later in the image list is drawn and displayed in front of image data set earlier, with image data set later in the image list being displayed closer to the front.

In addition, a priority is set for image data in advance, and when creating an image list, the performance control unit 151 specifies the image data to be used for the frame, and by extracting the specified image data in order from lowest priority and setting them in the image list, an image list is created in which the image data are arranged in order from lowest priority. At this time, if multiple image data with the same priority are specified as image data to be used for the frame, the performance control unit 151 will only set one image data, and multiple image data with the same priority will not be set in the image list, and only images based on any one image data will be displayed.

In addition, when multiple image data with the same priority are specified, the performance control unit 151 is configured so that the image data extracted later is set as the image data with that priority.In such cases, it is only necessary to set the image data extracted later, simplifying the control for creating the image list.

Furthermore, when multiple image data sets with the same priority are specified, the image data extracted first may be set as the image data with that priority. Even in such cases, it is sufficient to set only the image data extracted first, simplifying the control for creating the image list.

Even with this configuration, the performance control unit 151 sets the same priority for the image data used to display the navigation images when executing any of the following: push order navigation, 7 navigation,! small red navigation,! big red navigation,! small purple navigation,! big purple navigation, and! green navigation. Therefore, even if, due to some malfunction, multiple image data for navigation images suggesting different operation modes or contents are specified among the navigation images that make up the push order navigation, 7 navigation,! small red navigation,! big red navigation,! small purple navigation,! big purple navigation, and! green navigation, because all of them have the same priority, only one of the image data will be set in the image list, and only the navigation image suggesting one content can be displayed.

Specifically, even if image data for a navigation image that constitutes Push Order Navigation and image data for a navigation image that constitutes 7 Navigation are specified, they both have the same priority, so only one of the image data items is set in the image list and only the navigation image that suggests one content is displayed, preventing navigation images that suggest different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

Furthermore, even if image data of navigation images that suggest different stop orders are specified at the same time among the image data of navigation images that make up the push order navigation, all have the same priority, so only one of the image data is set in the image list and only the navigation image suggesting one content is displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

Also, even if image data of the navigation image that makes up the small red navigation or image data of the navigation image that makes up the large red navigation and image data of the navigation image that makes up the small purple navigation or image data of the navigation image that makes up the large purple navigation or image data of the navigation image that makes up the green navigation are specified, they all have the same priority, so only one of the image data will be set in the image list and only the navigation image that suggests one content will be displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different winning roles from being displayed overlapping each other.

Also, even if image data for the navigation image that makes up the Small Red Navigation and the Large Red Navigation are specified, or even if image data for the navigation image that makes up the Small Purple Navigation and the Large Purple Navigation are specified, they all have the same priority, so only one of the image data will be set in the image list and only the navigation image that suggests one content will be displayed, preventing navigation images with different suggested winning probabilities from being displayed overlapping each other.

In addition, when the performance control unit 151 executes any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, and ! green navigation, the same priority is set for the image data of the navigation image from the start of displaying the navigation image until the display ends, so that the navigation image can be displayed with the same priority relative to images based on other image data from the start of displaying the navigation image until the display of the navigation image ends.

In addition, when the performance control unit 151 executes any of the following: push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, and ! green navigation, after starting to display the navigation image, it changes to an image based on different image data each time a stop operation is performed, and the image data after the change is set to the same priority as the image data before the change.This means that after starting to display the navigation image, the navigation image that has changed due to a stop operation can be displayed with the same priority as images based on other image data.

Furthermore, the post-change image data may be set to a higher priority than the pre-change image data. By configuring it in this way, even if image data for displaying the pre-change navigation image remains, the post-change navigation image can be displayed with priority.

[About lamp data and lamp layers]
When it is decided to execute any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, small red navigation, big red navigation, small purple navigation, big purple navigation, and green navigation, or when it is decided to execute any of the push order navigations suggesting different operation modes, the performance control unit 151 sets lamp commands that specify lamp data for lighting up LEDs in different light emission patterns, and sets the lamp data specified by the lamp commands in the corresponding lamp layer through lamp control processing. As a result, the performance control unit 151 controls the lighting of the LEDs in a light emission pattern based on the lamp data set in the lamp layer.

In addition, when one of the push order navigations that suggest different operation modes is executed, lamp data is set that defines a lighting pattern that lights up different areas of the performance effect LED 52 (left area, center area, right area).When the push order navigation is executed, if the operation mode suggested by the type of push order role differs, different areas will light up, making it easy to recognize the operation mode from the difference in the lit areas.

In addition, when lamp data is set for different lamp layers, the performance control unit 151 controls the lighting of the LEDs using a light emission pattern based on the lamp data set for the lamp layer with the highest priority among the set lamp data.

In addition, only one lamp data can be set for the same lamp layer, and even if multiple lamp commands specifying the same lamp layer are set, only one lamp data is set for the same lamp layer, and the lighting of the LED is controlled using a light emission pattern based on the set lamp data.

In this embodiment, when multiple lamp commands specifying the same lamp layer are set, the lamp data specified by the lamp command set last is set as the lamp data for that lamp layer. In such cases, LED lighting control can be simplified by simply controlling the lighting of the LEDs using a light emission pattern based on the lamp data specified by the lamp command set last.

In addition, if multiple lamp commands specifying the same lamp layer are set, the lamp data specified by the lamp command set first may be set as the lamp data for that lamp layer. Even in such cases, LED lighting control can be simplified by simply controlling the lighting of the LEDs using a light emission pattern based on the lamp data specified by the lamp command set first.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 151 sets the corresponding lamp data to the same lamp layer 2 regardless of whether the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, or ! green navigation is executed. Therefore, even if a previous lamp command remains due to some malfunction, and a light-emitting pattern suggesting a different operation mode or content is specified among the light-emitting patterns corresponding to the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, and ! green navigation, only one of the light-emitting patterns is set to the lamp layer, and the LED lighting is controlled using the light-emitting pattern for that content.

Specifically, even if lamp data for a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the push order navigation and a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the 7 navigation are specified, only one of the lamp data is set in the lamp layer, and the LED lighting is controlled with a light-emitting pattern that suggests one content, preventing the operation mode suggested by the light-emitting pattern from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, even if lamp data with lighting patterns that suggest different stop orders are simultaneously specified among the lamp data with lighting patterns corresponding to the push order navigation, only one of the lamp data is set in the lamp layer, and the LED lighting is controlled with a lighting pattern that suggests one content, preventing the operation mode suggested by the lighting pattern from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, even if lamp data with a lighting pattern corresponding to a small red navigation or a large red navigation, lamp data with a lighting pattern corresponding to a small purple navigation or a large purple navigation, or lamp data with a lighting pattern corresponding to a green navigation are specified, only one of the lamp data will be set in the lamp layer, and the LED lighting will be controlled with a lighting pattern that suggests one of the contents, preventing the winning combination suggested by the lighting pattern from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, if the lighting patterns corresponding to the small red navigation and the large red navigation are different, and the lighting patterns corresponding to the small purple navigation and the large purple navigation are different, even if lamp data for the lighting patterns corresponding to the small red navigation and the large red navigation are specified, or if lamp data for the lighting patterns corresponding to the small purple navigation and the large purple navigation are specified, only one of the lamp data will be set in the lamp layer, and the LED will be controlled to light up with a lighting pattern that suggests one of the contents, preventing the possibility of winning suggested by the lighting pattern from becoming difficult to recognize.

[About navigation voice and tracks]
When it is decided to execute any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, small red navigation, big red navigation, small purple navigation, big purple navigation, and green navigation, or when it is decided to execute any of the push order navigations suggesting different operation modes, the performance control unit 151 sets a voice command specifying voice data for outputting a different navigation voice, and a sound control process creates a sound designation command specifying the voice data and track specified by the voice command, and transmits the sound designation command to the sound control unit 157. As a result, the sound control unit 157 creates a playlist in which the voice data specified by the sound designation command is set, and plays the voice data based on the settings set in the playlist, thereby outputting the corresponding voice from the speakers 53 and 54.

In addition, the sound specification command allows you to specify the volume for each piece of audio data. When executing any of the following: push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, ! green navigation, or when suggesting a different operation mode, the same volume is specified for the audio data used to output the corresponding navigation voice. This means that even when the navigation voice suggests a different operation mode or different content, the volume of the navigation voice does not change, making it easier to hear.

In addition, when audio data is specified for different tracks by a sound specification command, the sound control unit 157 creates a playlist in which audio data for each track is set based on the specified audio data, and plays the audio data based on the settings set in the playlist. At this time, if audio data is set for multiple tracks, the sound based on this audio data is synthesized and output from speakers 53 and 54.

In addition, while the sound designation command can specify multiple pieces of audio data by specifying the same track, only one piece of audio data can be set for the same track in the playback list. Even if multiple pieces of audio data specifying the same track are specified using the sound designation command, only one piece of audio data will be set for the same track in the playback list, and the set audio data will be played.

In this embodiment, when multiple pieces of audio data specifying the same track are specified by a sound designation command, the audio data that is specified later for that track by the sound designation command is set in the playback list as the audio data for that track.In such cases, it is only necessary to play back the audio data that is specified later, thereby simplifying the control by the sound control unit 157.

In addition, when multiple pieces of audio data specifying the same track are specified by a sound designation command, the audio data that was specified first for that track by the sound designation command may be set in the playback list as the audio data for that track.Even in such cases, it is sufficient to play only the audio data that was specified first, thereby simplifying the control by the sound control unit 157.

In addition, in this embodiment, when multiple pieces of audio data specifying the same track are specified by a sound designation command, only one piece of audio data is set for the same track in the playback list, so that when multiple pieces of audio data are set for the same track, only one of the pieces of audio data specified for the same track is played. However, when multiple pieces of audio data specifying the same track are specified by a sound designation command, multiple pieces of audio data specifying the same track can also be set in the playback list, but when multiple pieces of audio data are set for the same track, only one piece of audio data may be played during playback. In this case, when multiple pieces of audio data are specified for the same track in the playback list, the control by the sound control unit 157 can be simplified by playing only the audio data that was set for that track last, or by playing only the audio data that was set for that track first.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 151 creates a sound designation command that specifies the same track 2 as the audio data track for outputting the navigation voice, regardless of whether the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, or ! green navigation is executed. Therefore, even if a previous audio command or sound designation command remains due to some malfunction, and audio data for the navigation voice that suggests a different operation mode or content is specified by the sound designation command, only one of the audio data will be set in the playback list, and only the navigation voice suggesting that content will be output.

Specifically, even if a sound specification command specifies navigation voice audio data corresponding to push order navigation and navigation voice audio data corresponding to 7 navigation, only one of the voice data will be set in the playback list, and only the navigation voice suggesting one content will be output, preventing navigation voices suggesting different operation modes from being output at the same time.

In addition, even if a sound specification command is used to simultaneously specify navigation voice audio data corresponding to push-order navigation that suggests different stop orders, only one of the audio data will be set in the playback list and only the navigation voice suggesting one content will be output, preventing navigation voices suggesting different operation modes from being output simultaneously.

Also, even if the sound specification command specifies the navigation voice audio data corresponding to the ! Small Red Navigation System and the ! Small Purple Navigation System or the ! Large Purple Navigation System or the ! Green Navigation System, only one of the audio data will be set in the playlist and only the navigation voice suggesting that one content will be output, preventing navigation voices suggesting different winning roles from being output at the same time.

Furthermore, if the sound specification command specifies navigation voice audio data corresponding to the ! Small Red Navigation System and the ! Large Red Navigation System, and even if navigation voice audio data corresponding to the ! Small Purple Navigation System and the ! Large Purple Navigation System are specified, only one of the audio data will be set in the playlist and only the navigation voice suggesting that one content will be output, preventing navigation voices with different suggested winning probabilities from being output at the same time.

[About navigating]
When a weak cherry or strong cherry is won, the left reel is made the first stop, and by performing a stop operation on the left reel within the range of the No. 5 cherry symbol being drawn to the bottom row, it becomes possible to determine whether a weak cherry or a strong cherry has been won, but the operation mode suggested by 7Navi suggests an operation mode in which the reels stop in the order right, middle, left, and if the stop operation is performed in the operation mode suggested by 7Navi, it becomes impossible to determine whether a weak cherry or a strong cherry has been won, when a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won.

Furthermore, when chance symbol A or chance symbol B is won, by stopping the left reel first and operating the left reel to stop within the range of the No. 6 BAR symbol being drawn into the lower row, it is possible to determine whether chance symbol A or B has won when chance symbol A or B is won; however, the operation mode suggested by 7Navi suggests an operation mode in which the reels stop in the order right, center, and left, and if the operation is operated in the operation mode suggested by 7Navi, it will be impossible to determine whether chance symbol A or B has won when chance symbol A or B is won.

Furthermore, when a watermelon is won, stopping the middle and right reels within the range in which the watermelon symbol is drawn into the middle of the middle reel and the bottom of the right reel will cause the watermelon to stop and result in a win; however, the operation mode suggested by 7Navi suggests the operation mode at the timing of the stop operation within the range in which the black 7 symbol is drawn into the top of the left reel, the middle of the middle reel, and the bottom of the right reel. As shown in Figure 3, the range in which the black 7 symbol is drawn into the bottom of the right reel and the range in which the watermelon symbol is drawn into the bottom of the right reel do not overlap, so if the stop operation is performed in the operation mode suggested by 7Navi, the watermelon will not be able to win when a watermelon is won.

For this reason, the performance control unit 151 checks the navigation flag based on the start operation of the game, determines whether the execution of 7 Navi has been decided, and whether a predetermined role (weak cherry, strong cherry, chance eye A, chance eye B, watermelon) has been won, and executes 7 Navi on the condition that the execution of 7 Navi has been decided and it is determined that a predetermined role has not been won.

This prevents situations where, due to some kind of malfunction, such as command rewriting, a weak or strong cherry is won, but the execution of 7Navi is decided, 7Navi is not executed, and the stop operation is performed using the operation pattern suggested by the erroneously executed 7Navi, which prevents the different stop patterns depending on whether a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won from being derived, making it impossible to determine whether a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won.

In addition, even if the execution of 7Navi is determined despite the fact that Chance A or Chance B has been won due to some kind of malfunction, 7Navi may not be executed, and the stop operation may be performed in the operation mode suggested by the erroneously executed 7Navi, preventing the different stop mode depending on whether Chance A or Chance B has been won, and making it impossible to distinguish whether Chance A or Chance B has been won.

In addition, even if a watermelon is won due to some kind of malfunction, and it has been decided that 7Navi should be executed, 7Navi may not be executed, and the stopping operation may be performed using the operation pattern suggested by the erroneously executed 7Navi, resulting in the watermelon stopping pattern not being derived and making it impossible to win a watermelon.

In addition, when a push order role is won, the main role can be stopped by performing a stop operation in the stop order corresponding to the type of push order role, but the operation mode suggested by 7Navi suggests an operation mode in the stop order of right, middle, left, and if a stop operation is performed in the operation mode suggested by 7Navi, the main role cannot be stopped when some push order roles are won.

On the other hand, when a 7-line reel or a 7-not-line reel is won, the ready state of the 7-line reel or black 7 symbol can be stopped by performing the stop operation in the right-center-left stopping order, but the operation method suggested by the push order navigation may suggest an operation method for a stopping order other than right-center-left, and if the stop operation is performed in the operation method suggested by the push order navigation, it may not be possible to stop the ready state of the 7-line reel or black 7 symbol.

For this reason, the performance control unit 151 checks the navigation flag based on the start operation of the game, determines whether or not the execution of 7-navigation has been decided, and whether or not the execution of push order navigation has been decided, and executes 7-navigation on the condition that it is decided that the execution of 7-navigation has been decided, but that the execution of push order navigation has not been decided.

This prevents a situation where, due to some kind of malfunction, the execution of the button sequence navigation is determined, but the execution of the 7-position navigation is also determined, and the 7-position navigation is not executed, resulting in the execution of navigations suggesting different operation modes being executed in combination.

In addition, when a 7-match replay or a 7-missing replay is won, control is exercised to prevent the 7-match replay or black 7 symbol from being stopped by performing a stop operation in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order or at a stop operation timing other than the predetermined stop operation timing. However, even in this case, control is exercised to stop the state in which either replay will win. Therefore, even if a 7-match replay or a 7-missing replay is actually won and the execution of 7-navigation has been determined, the player will not be disadvantaged even if the 7-navigation is not executed because it is determined that a predetermined role has been won or because it is determined that the execution of push order navigation has been determined.

[Fail-safe processing]
When the presentation control unit 151 receives an error command indicating the start of an error state in which game progress is disabled, a setting change command indicating the start of a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed and game progress is disabled, or a setting confirmation command indicating the start of a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed and game progress is disabled, it causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display an error image indicating an error state, a setting change in progress image indicating a setting change state, or a setting confirmation in progress image indicating a setting confirmation state, respectively.

In addition, the video data for displaying error images, setting change images, and setting confirmation images is set to a layer with a higher priority than the video data for displaying images associated with effects that are normally executed, so when the device is in an error state, setting change state, or setting confirmation state, the error image, setting change image, and setting confirmation image can be displayed in priority over images associated with effects.

When the presentation control unit 151 receives a game start command indicating the start of gameplay based on a game start operation, it performs start fail-safe processing and executes processing to erase the error image, setting change image, and setting check image by setting a display command that specifies clearing the video data specified in layer 20 on which the error image, setting change image, and setting check image are displayed. Therefore, even if the error state, setting change state, or setting check state has ended but the error image, setting change image, or setting check image continues to be displayed due to a malfunction, the error image, setting change image, or setting check image is erased when gameplay begins based on a start operation, preventing the presentation that accompanies the progress of gameplay from being disrupted.

In addition, the start-up fail-safe processing is performed before processing related to game progress, such as effect determination processing 1 and effect setting processing. Therefore, the error image, setting change image, and setting confirmation image are erased before processing related to game progress, so the error image, setting change image, and setting confirmation image do not affect the effects that accompany game progress.

In addition, when the performance control unit 151 is controlled to the error state, setting change state, or setting confirmation state, it sets the error flag, setting change in progress flag, and setting confirmation in progress flag, respectively. When the termination conditions for terminating the error state, setting change state, or setting confirmation state are met and an error command indicating the end of the error state, a setting change command indicating the end of the setting change state, or a setting confirmation command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state is received, the performance control unit 151 clears the error flag, setting change in progress flag, and setting confirmation in progress flag, respectively, and executes processing to erase the error image, setting change in progress image, and setting confirmation in progress image.

Then, during the start-up fail-safe processing, the presentation control unit 151 determines whether the error flag, setting change flag, or setting confirmation flag is set, and if it determines that these flags are not set, it executes processing to erase the error image, setting change image, or setting confirmation image. This prevents the error image, setting change image, or setting confirmation image from being erased even when the system is controlled to the error state, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Furthermore, since the error flag, setting change flag, and setting confirmation flag are cleared when the termination conditions for terminating the error state, setting change state, or setting confirmation state are met, it is possible to appropriately determine whether the error state, setting change state, or setting confirmation state has ended when game play begins based on the start operation.

In addition, when push order navigation, 7 navigation, or ! navigation is executed, the performance control unit 151 displays a navigation image on the LCD display 51. In addition, after displaying a navigation image in response to the execution of push order navigation, 7 navigation, or ! navigation, the performance control unit 151 performs processing to update or erase the navigation image each time a stop operation is performed. In more detail, the navigation image is updated or erased by referencing the navigation process table and setting a display command to update or erase the navigation image. In particular, if an operation different from the operation mode suggested by push order navigation or 7 navigation is performed, all displayed navigation images are erased.

When the presentation control unit 151 receives a game start command indicating the start of a game based on a game start operation, it performs start fail-safe processing and executes processing to erase the navigation image by setting a display command that specifies clearing the video data specified in the layer 50 on which the navigation image is displayed. Therefore, even if the display of the navigation image from the previous game continues due to a malfunction, the navigation image is erased when the game starts based on a start operation, preventing the navigation image from interfering with the presentation as the game progresses.

In addition, when the presentation control unit 151 receives a game end command indicating the end of play, it performs end fail-safe processing and executes processing to erase the navigation image by setting a display command that specifies clearing the video data specified in layer 50 on which the navigation image is displayed. This prevents the navigation image from continuing to be displayed even after the game has ended, preventing the presentation that accompanies the progress of the game from being disrupted.

In addition, although the display mode of the navigation image differs depending on whether the navigation image is push order navigation, 7 navigation, or ! navigation, the performance control unit 151 sets a common display command and erases the navigation image using common processing regardless of which navigation image is displayed, thereby reducing the program capacity required to erase the navigation image.

In addition, the performance control unit 151 displays different navigation images using push order navigation depending on the suggested operation mode, but regardless of which operation mode a navigation image suggesting that operation mode is displayed, it sets a common display command and erases the navigation image using common processing, thereby reducing the program capacity required to erase the navigation image.

In addition, the performance control unit 151 sets a common display command and erases the navigation image using a common process whether the navigation image is erased using start-up fail-safe processing, whether the navigation image is erased using end-up fail-safe processing, or whether the navigation image is erased due to a stop operation performed using an operation mode different from the operation mode suggested during execution of the push order navigation, thereby reducing the program capacity required to erase the navigation image.

Next, we will explain the slot machine 2 of Example 2. In this example, we will only explain the configuration that differs from Example 1; as the other configurations are common to Example 1, we will omit the explanation here.

In Example 1, the role ratio monitor 89 is connected to the medal count control board 17, and the medal count control unit 171 counts the role ratio information and controls the role ratio monitor 89 to display the counted role ratio information. However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 132, the role ratio monitor 89 is connected to the main control board 16, and the main control unit 161 counts the role ratio information and controls the role ratio monitor 89 to display the counted role ratio information.

[7-segment display]
FIG. 133 shows the 7-segment displays that make up the gaming aid display 12 and the winning combination monitor 89. As shown in FIG. 133, the 7-segment display includes seven segments, segments A to G, and a DP (decimal point). For example, to display "1" on a 1-segment 7-segment display, segments B and C are illuminated. This allows "1" to be displayed on the 7-segment display. In the following description, the 1-segment segment and the 1-LED, such as the 1-bet LED 14, are collectively referred to as the "light-emitting unit."

[Control by main control unit 161]
Control by the main control unit 161 will be described using FIG. 134. First, the digits will be described. A "digit" is composed of one or more light-emitting elements. Below, digits will also be referred to as "DG." Two or more DGs will also be referred to as a DG group. In this embodiment, the first DG group includes DG1 to DG4. The second DG group includes DG1 to DG4 that are different from the DG1 to DG4 included in the first DG group. A DG is sometimes referred to as a "group."

In the example of FIG. 134, DG1 of the first DG group is a DG that includes the seven segments (segments A to G) included in the first-digit 7-segment display of the gaming support display 12 and an anode. DG2 of the first DG group is a DG that includes the seven segments (segments A to G) included in the second-digit 7-segment display of the gaming support display 12 and an anode. DG3 of the first DG group is a DG that includes seven LEDs and an anode. The seven LEDs are the 1BET LED 14, 2BET LED 15, 3BET LED 16, replay lamp 91, outer end signal lamp 92, insert possible lamp 93, and start valid lamp 94, respectively. DG4 of the first DG group is a DG that includes the seven segments (segments A to G) included in the 7-segment display of the setting value display 24 and an anode.

DG1 of the second DG group is a DG that includes the eight segments (segments A to G and segment DP) included in the first-digit 7-segment display of the role ratio monitor 89, and an anode. Similarly, DG2 to DG4 of the second DG group are DGs that include the eight segments (segments A to G and segment DP) included in the second-digit to fourth-digit 7-segment displays of the role ratio monitor 89, and an anode.

Next, we will explain the main control board 16. The main control board 16 is equipped with a main control unit 161 and multiple output ports. In the example of Figure 134, the multiple output ports are shown as a first output port 61, a second output port 62, and a third output port 63, but in reality, other output ports also exist.

The first output port 61, the second output port 62, and the third output port 63 each have eight output terminals D0 to D7. Of the eight output terminals D0 to D7 of the first output port 61, seven output terminals D0 to D6 output light-emitting signals S0 to S6, respectively. Of the eight output terminals D0 to D7 of the second output port 62, eight output terminals D0 to D7 output light-emitting signals S10 to S17, respectively. In this way, the light-emitting signals S0 to S6 and the light-emitting signals S10 to S17 are output separately (from different output ports). Of the eight output terminals D0 to D7 of the third output port 63, four output terminals D0 to D3 output selection signals DG1 to DG4, respectively.

The selection signal DG is a signal used to select (designate) the DG of the light-emitting unit that will be the target for light emission. The light-emitting signals S0 to S6 are signals that specify the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting unit included in the DG selected by the selection signal DG from among the six DGs in the first DG group. The light-emitting signals S10 to S17 are signals that specify the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting unit included in the DG selected by the selection signal DG from among the four DGs in the second DG group.

First, let us explain the first output port 61.

The signal line from the output terminal D0 of the first output port 61 is connected to segments A of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the 1BET LED of DG3 of the first DG group. The light-emitting signal S0 is output from the output terminal D0 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S0 is input to segments A of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the 1BET LED of DG3 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D1 of the first output port 61 is connected to the segments B of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the 2BET LED of DG3 of the first DG group. The light-emitting signal S1 is output from the output terminal D1 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S1 is input to the segments B of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the 2BET LED of DG3 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D2 of the first output port 61 is connected to the segments C of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the 3BET LED of DG3 of the first DG group. The light-emitting signal S2 is output from the output terminal D2 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S2 is input to the segments C of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the 3BET LED of DG3 of the first DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D3 of the first output port 61 is connected to the segments D of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the replay lamp of DG3 of the first DG group. The light-emitting signal S3 is output from output terminal D3 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S3 is input to the segments D of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the replay lamp of DG3 of the first DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D4 of the first output port 61 is connected to segments E of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and to the outermost signal lamp of DG3 of the first DG group. The light-emitting signal S4 is output from output terminal D4 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S4 is input to segments E of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and to the outermost signal lamp of DG3 of the first DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D5 of the first output port 61 is connected to the segments F of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the turn-on ready lamp of DG3 of the first DG group. The light-emitting signal S5 is output from output terminal D5 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S5 is input to the segments F of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the turn-on ready lamp of DG3 of the first DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D6 of the first output port 61 is connected to the segments G of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the start enable lamp of DG3 of the first DG group. The light-emitting signal S6 is output from output terminal D6 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S6 is input to the segments G of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the start enable lamp of DG3 of the first DG group.

In addition, output terminal D7 of the first output port 61 is unused.

Next, we will explain the second output port 62.

The signal line from output terminal D0 of the second output port 62 is connected to segment A of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light-emitting signal S10 is output from output terminal D0 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S10 is input to segment A of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D1 of the second output port 62 is connected to segment B for each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light-emitting signal S11 is output from output terminal D1 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S11 is input to segment B for each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D2 of the second output port 62 is connected to each segment C of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light-emitting signal S12 is output from output terminal D2 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S12 is input to each segment C of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D3 of the second output port 62 is connected to each of the segments D of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light-emitting signal S13 is output from output terminal D3 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S13 is input to each of the segments D of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D4 of the second output port 62 is connected to segment E for each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light-emitting signal S14 is output from output terminal D4 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S14 is input to segment E for each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D5 of the second output port 62 is connected to the segments F of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light-emitting signal S15 is output from output terminal D5 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S15 is input to the segments F of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D6 of the second output port 62 is connected to each of the segments G of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light-emitting signal S16 is output from output terminal D6 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S16 is input to each of the segments G of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D7 of the second output port 62 is connected to the segments DP of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light-emitting signal S17 is output from output terminal D7 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light-emitting signal S17 is input to the segments DP of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

Next, we will explain the third output port 63.

The signal line from the output terminal D0 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of DG1 of the first DG group and the anode of DG1 of the second DG group. The selection signal DG1 is output from the output terminal D0 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the selection signal DG1 is input to the anode of DG1 of the first DG group and the anode of DG1 of the second DG group.

A signal line from the output terminal D1 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of DG2 of the first DG group and the anode of DG2 of the second DG group. The selection signal DG2 is output from the output terminal D1 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the selection signal DG2 is input to the anode of DG2 of the first DG group and the anode of DG2 of the second DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D2 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of DG3 of the first DG group and the anode of DG3 of the second DG group. The selection signal DG3 is output from output terminal D2 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the selection signal DG3 is input to the anode of DG3 of the first DG group and the anode of DG3 of the second DG group.

The signal line from output terminal D3 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of DG4 of the first DG group and the anode of DG4 of the second DG group. The selection signal DG4 is output from output terminal D3 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the selection signal DG4 is input to the anode of DG4 of the first DG group and the anode of DG4 of the second DG group.

The output terminals D4, D5, D6, and D7 of the third output port 63 are all unused. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 134, the selection signals DG1 to DG4 are common to the first and second DG groups. In other words, the selection signals DG1 to DG4 are shared by the first and second DG groups. Note that if the number of DGs differs between the first and second DG groups, it is sufficient that the selection signal DG is shared for some of the DGs in the first and second DG groups. This simplifies the configuration for controlling the DGs in the first and second DG groups by sharing the selection signal DG for some of the DGs in the first and second DG groups when the number of DGs differs between the first and second DG groups.

Furthermore, each of the output terminals D0 to D6 of the first output port 61 corresponds to a light-emitting unit to which the light-emitting signal output from each of the output terminals D0 to D6 is input. Furthermore, each of the output terminals D0 to D7 of the second output port 62 corresponds to a light-emitting unit to which the light-emitting signal output from each of the output terminals D0 to D7 is input.

For example, output terminal D0 of the first output port 61 corresponds to segment A of DG1 of the first DG group, segment A of DG2 of the first DG group, segment A of DG3 of the first DG group, segment A of DG4 of the first DG group, 1BETLED of DG5 of the first DG group, and segment A of DG6 of the first DG group. Furthermore, output terminal D0 of the second output port 62 corresponds to segment A of DG1 of the second DG group, segment A of DG2 of the second DG group, segment A of DG3 of the second DG group, and segment A of DG4 of the second DG group. Note that in Figure 134, the signal lines from each of the output terminals D0 to D6 of the first output port 61 and the signal lines from each of the output terminals D0 to D7 of the second output port 62 have been omitted to simplify the drawing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the unused output terminals (NC: Non-Connect), i.e., D7 of the first output port 61 and D4 to D7 of the third output port 63, are connected to ground. No signal lines are wired between these unused output terminals and the light-emitting units.

The anode of each DG is a common anode shared by the cathodes of each light-emitting element included in that DG. For example, the anode of DG1 in the first DG group is a common anode shared by the cathodes of each of the first-digit segments A to G of the gaming support display 12.

The main control unit 161 executes bit control (8-bit control) for the control of the first output port 61, second output port 62, and third output port 63. For the selection signal DG output from the third output port 63, for example, when outputting selection signal DG1, bit control of "00000001" is executed, and when outputting selection signal DG3, bit control of "00000100" is executed. Furthermore, of the 8-digit bit notation, the first digit corresponds to the control for output terminal D0 of each output port, and the eighth digit corresponds to the control for output terminal D7 of each output port.

Furthermore, when segments A of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group are illuminated, a light-emitting signal S0 is output from output terminal D0 of the first output port 61, and bit control of "00000001" is executed. Furthermore, when segments A of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group are illuminated, a light-emitting signal S10 is output from output terminal D0 of the second output port 62, and bit control of "00000001" is executed.

When a selection signal DG is output from the third output port 63, the selection signal DG is input to the anode of the corresponding DG. Furthermore, when a light-emitting signal S is output from the first output port 61, the light-emitting signal S is input to the cathode of the corresponding light-emitting unit among the DGs in the first DG group. When the light-emitting signal S is input to the cathode of the light-emitting unit, the selection signal DG input to the anode flows as current to the cathode. This current flow from the anode to the cathode causes the light-emitting unit to which the light-emitting signal S is input to emit light.

Furthermore, when a light-emitting signal S is output from the second output port 62, the light-emitting signal S is input to the cathode of the corresponding light-emitting unit among the DGs of the second DG group. When the light-emitting signal S is input to the cathode of the light-emitting unit, the selection signal DG input to the anode flows as current to the cathode. As current flows from the anode to the cathode in this way, the light-emitting unit to which the light-emitting signal S is input emits light.

In this way, the selection signals DG1 to DG4 output from the third output port 63 can be considered to be signals for selecting (designating) the DG for which the light-emitting unit will emit light. Furthermore, the light-emitting signals S0 to S6 output from the first output port 61 and the light-emitting signals S10 to S17 output from the second output port 62 can be considered to be signals for designating the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting unit included in the DG selected by the selection signal DG.

Also, in Figure 134, the signal lines between each output terminal and the corresponding light-emitting element may be connected directly or indirectly (for example, via a board such as a relay board).

Furthermore, the slot machine 2 can be in a normal state, a setting change state, and a setting confirmation state. The normal state refers to the state in which play is in progress and the state in which play is in standby (for example, a state in which a demo screen is displayed). Hereinafter, the state in which the light-emitting section can emit light (a state in which light can be emitted) will be referred to as the "light-emitting state" when referring to the DG state, and the state in which the light-emitting section cannot emit light will be referred to as the "non-light-emitting state."

In the normal state, DG1-DG3 of the first DG group and DG1-DG4 of the second DG group are in an illumination-enabled state, while the other DGs are in a non-illuminating state. In the setting change state and setting confirmation state, DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group and DG1-DG4 of the second DG group are in an illumination-enabled state, while the other DGs are in a non-illuminating state. As a variant, in the setting change state and setting confirmation state, DG1-DG4 of the second DG group may be in a non-illuminating state. Also, in the setting change state and setting confirmation state, DG1-DG3 of the first DG group may be in a non-illuminating state.

DG1 to DG3 included in the first DG group are all mounted on a display board. The display board is attached inside the slot machine 2 so that the light-emitting elements included in DG1 to DG3 are exposed to the outside (see the location of the game information display unit 90 shown in Figure 1). DG4 included in the first DG group is mounted on the main control board 16. DG1 to DG4 included in the second DG group are mounted on the main control board 16. In Figure 134, DG4 of the first DG group, DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group, and the main control board 16 are shown separately, but in reality, they are mounted on the main control board 16.

The light-emitting elements included in the DGs of the first DG group are light-emitting elements related to the progress of the game. Therefore, processing for the first output port 61, which is the output port corresponding to the first DG group (processing to create a light-emitting signal for the first DG group), is processing executed by an in-capacity program. Hereinafter, processing executed by an in-capacity program will be referred to as "in-capacity processing."

On the other hand, the light-emitting elements included in the DGs of the second DG group are light-emitting elements that are not involved in the progress of the game. Therefore, processing to the second output port 62, which is the output port corresponding to the second DG group (processing to create a light-emitting signal for the second DG group), is processing executed by an off-capacity program. Hereinafter, processing executed by an off-capacity program will be referred to as "off-capacity processing."

In this way, since in-capacity processing and out-of-capacity processing can be separated according to the output port, the processing load can be reduced compared to gaming machines that have a mixture of in-capacity processing and out-of-capacity processing for a single output port.

[Signal switching processing]
135 is a flowchart of the signal switching process executed by the main control unit 161. This signal switching process is executed by timer interrupt processing (main) which is executed every predetermined period (0.56 ms in this embodiment).

First, in Sp1, the main control unit 161 clears the selection signal DG from the third output port 63. Here, "clearing the signal" means, in this embodiment, executing bit control of "00000000", which is all "0", for the output port that is outputting the signal. For example, clearing the selection signal DG means executing bit control of "00000000" for the third output port 63.

Next, in Sp2, the light-emitting signal of the first output port 61 (i.e., the light-emitting signal of the DG in the first DG group) is cleared. Next, in Sp3, bit control is performed on the first output port 61 to update and set the light-emitting signal of the first output port 61 (i.e., the light-emitting signal of the DG in the first DG group). Sp2 and Sp3 are performed by in-capacity processing.

Next, in Sp4, the light-emitting signal of the second output port 62 (i.e., the light-emitting signal of the DG of the second DG group) is cleared. Next, in Sp5, bit control is performed on the second output port 62 to update and set the light-emitting signal of the second output port 62 (i.e., the light-emitting signal of the DG of the second DG group). Sp4 and Sp5 are executed during out-of-capacity processing.

Next, in Step 6, bit control is performed on the third output port 63 to update and set the selection signal DG from the third output port 63. This bit control causes the updated selection signal to be output from the third output port 63. The selection signal DG is output from the output terminal set in the selection signal area of RAM 161c. Selection signal numbers 0 through 3 are assigned to output terminals D0 through D3, respectively. When the selection signal number is set to 0, the selection signal DG1 is output from output terminal D0. When the selection signal number is set to 1, the selection signal DG2 is output from output terminal D1. When the selection signal number is set to 2, the selection signal DG3 is output from output terminal D2. When the selection signal number is set to 3, the selection signal DG4 is output from output terminal D3. In Step 6, 1 is added to the selection signal number set in the selection signal area, and if the selection signal number after the addition exceeds 3, the selection signal number is corrected to 1. As a result, the selection signal number is updated every 0.56 ms in the order 0, 1, 2, 3, 0, 1, 2, 3, etc., and accordingly, the selection signals are repeatedly output in the order selection signal DG1, selection signal DG2, selection signal DG3, and selection signal DG4.

Furthermore, the output of the updated light-emitting signal from the first output port 61, the output of the updated light-emitting signal from the second output port 62, and the output of the updated selection signal from the third output port 63 will continue until the next signal switching process is executed (after 0.56 ms has elapsed).

Next, the processing of Figure 135 will be explained using a specific example. In this specific example, we will explain the case where, in the normal state, the game auxiliary display 12 displays "14" and the role ratio monitor 89 displays "0723". Here, we will explain the display of "14" on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display of "23" in the first and second digits on the role ratio monitor 89. In reality, in addition to the game auxiliary display 12 and role ratio monitor 89, the status LED (DG3 of the first DG group) also lights up depending on the game status. Furthermore, while the role ratio monitor 89 lights up the segment DP, the game auxiliary display 12 and the setting value display 24 do not light up the segment DP.

First, we will explain the process for displaying "4" in the first digit (DG1 of the first DG group) of the gaming aid display 12 and "3" in the first digit (DG1 of the second DG group) of the winning combination monitor 89. This process involves first outputting a selection signal DG1 from the third output port 63 to select DG1 of the first DG group and DG1 of the second DG group as the DGs whose segments (light-emitting sections) will be illuminated. Furthermore, the bit control for outputting the selection signal DG1 from the third output port 63 is "00000001," and this bit control is executed for the third output port 63.

While the selection signal DG1 is being output from the third output port 63, the first output port 61 executes a process to display "4" on DG1 of the first DG group, i.e., a process to illuminate segments B, C, F, and G. The process of illuminating these segments involves outputting light-emitting signals S1, S2, S6, and S7 from the first output port 61, and preventing the output of other light-emitting signals S. In other words, bit control of "01100110" is executed for the first output port 61.

Furthermore, while the selection signal DG1 is being output from the third output port 63, the second output port 62 executes processing to display "3" on DG1 of the second DG group, that is, processing to illuminate segments A, B, C, D, G, and DP. The processing to illuminate these segments involves outputting light-emitting signals S10, S11, S12, S13, S16, and S17 from the second output port 62, and preventing the output of other light-emitting signals S. In other words, bit control of "11001111" is executed for the second output port 62.

In this way, to display "4" in the first digit of the credit display (DG1 of the first DG group) and "3" in the first digit of the winning ratio monitor 89 (DG1 of the second DG group), bit control of "01100110" is executed for the first output port 61, bit control of "11001111" is executed for the second output port 62, and bit control of "00000001" is executed for the third output port 63.

When this state continues for 0.56 ms, the signal switching process shown in Figure 135 is executed. In Sp1, the selection signal DG is cleared. Specifically, the bit control of "00000001" for the third output port 63 is changed to bit control of "0000000".

Next, in Sp2, the light emission signal from the first output port 61 is cleared. Specifically, the bit control of "01100110" for the first output port 61 is changed to "0000000".

Next, in Sp3, bit control is executed for the first output port 61 to update the light-emitting signal of the first output port 61 (i.e., the light-emitting signal of the DG of the first DG group). Here, the process of updating the light-emitting signal of the first output port 61 so that a new "1" is displayed for DG2 of the first DG group is executed, that is, the process of illuminating segments B and C is executed. The process of illuminating these segments outputs light-emitting signals S2 and S3 from the first output port 61, and does not output other light-emitting signals S. In other words, bit control is executed for the first output port 61 to update from "0000000" to "00000110".

Next, in Sp4, the light emission signal from the second output port 62 is cleared. Specifically, the bit control of "11001111" for the second output port 62 is changed to "0000000".

Next, in Sp5, bit control is performed on the second output port 62 to update and set the light-emitting signal of the second output port 62 (i.e., the light-emitting signal of the DG of the second DG group). Here, processing is performed to newly display "2" on DG2 of the second DG group, that is, processing is performed to illuminate segments A, B, D, E, G, and DP. The processing to illuminate these segments outputs light-emitting signals S10, S11, S13, S14, S16, and S17 from the second output port 62, and does not output other light-emitting signals S. In other words, bit control is performed on the second output port 62 to update from "0000000" to "11011011".

Next, in Sp6, bit control is performed on the third output port 63 to update and set the selection signal DG. Here, bit control is performed on the third output port 63, updating it from "0000000" to "00000010."

By executing this processing, "4" is displayed in the first digit of the gaming support display 12, and "3" is displayed in the first digit of the role ratio monitor 89. After 0.56 ms, signal switching processing is executed, which ends the display of "4" in the first digit of the gaming support display 12 and displays "1" in the second digit of the gaming support display 12. At the same time, the display of "3" in the first digit of the role ratio monitor 89 ends, and "2" is displayed in the second digit of the role ratio monitor 89.

Then, 0.56 ms after the DG signal switching process is initiated, the next signal switching process is executed. During this signal switching process, new values (in this case, "8" is displayed on DG3 of the first DG group and "7" is displayed on DG4 of the second DG group) are displayed on DG3 of the first DG group (the first-digit 7-segment display of the gaming aid display 12) and DG3 of the second DG group (the third-digit 7-segment display of the winning combination monitor 89).

Figure 136 is a diagram explaining the switching of the selection signal DG. Figures 136(A) to 136(F) respectively show the output of selection signals DG1 to DG4 from output terminals D0 to D3 of the third output port 63.

As shown in Figures 136(A) to 136(D), the main control unit 161 switches the selection signal DG to be output in the following order (predetermined order): selection signal DG1 (00000001) → selection signal DG2 (00000010) → selection signal DG3 (00000100) → selection signal DG4 (00001000) → selection signal DG1 (00000001) → selection signal DG2 (00000010) ... Furthermore, the period during which one selection signal DG is output is a predetermined period, which in this embodiment is 0.56 ms. In other words, the main control unit 161 switches the selection signal DG to be output every 0.56 ms. For example, when selection signal DG1 is being output, DG1 of the first DG group and DG1 of the second DG group are selected (designated).

In each of Figures 136(A) to 136(D), the process of lowering the selection signal corresponds to Sp1 in Figure 135, and the process of raising the selection signal corresponds to Sp6.

In addition, the main control unit 161 switches the output of the light-emitting signal S from the first output port 61 (Sp2 and Sp3) and also switches the output of the light-emitting signal S from the second output port 62 (STp and Sp5) in synchronization with the switching of the output of the selection signal DG from the third output port 63.

When any of the selection signals DG1 to DG4 is output from the third output port 63, the DG in the first DG group that corresponds to the output selection signal DG is enabled to emit light, and the DG in the second DG group that corresponds to the output selection signal DG is enabled to emit light.

Furthermore, in the normal state, DG4 (setting value display 24) of the first DG is in a non-illuminating state. Therefore, in the normal state, while signal DG4 is being output from the third output port 63, non-illuminating bit control is executed for the first output port 61.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation state and setting change state, DG3 of the first DG group is in a non-light emitting state. Therefore, in the setting confirmation state and setting change state, while the selection signal DG2 is being output from the third output port 63, non-light emitting bit control is executed for the first output port 61.

Furthermore, if the first DG group and the second DG group have a different number of DGs, there will be no DGs in one DG group that correspond to a specific selection signal that selects a DG in the other DG group. In this case, when a specific selection signal is output, bit control can be performed to prevent any of the segments of the DGs in the other DG group from lighting up when the specific signal is output. This non-light-emitting bit control is bit control of "00000000", which means that all bits are 0. Therefore, when a specific selection signal is output, the segments in the other DG group will be turned off.

As explained in Figures 135 and 136, the method of switching the DG that causes the light-emitting unit to light up every short period of time (0.56 ms) to effectively make it appear as if multiple DGs are lighting up simultaneously is also referred to below as "dynamic lighting." If all DGs were to be made to light up simultaneously without adopting a configuration that performs dynamic lighting, it would be necessary to provide independent wiring for each DG and each light-emitting unit. However, doing so would increase the number of wires, which would increase costs and the assembly burden. In this embodiment, dynamic lighting can be used to solve these problems.

Furthermore, by implementing the dynamic lighting of this embodiment, the DG to be illuminated is switched sequentially using a signal switching process, which is an interrupt process executed every short period of time (0.56 ms in this embodiment). This effectively makes it appear almost identical to multiple DGs illuminating simultaneously (as if they were illuminating simultaneously to the human eye). Also, by using different LEDs to illuminate for each timer interrupt process (main), power consumption can be reduced and burn-in of the light-emitting section can be prevented. Furthermore, compared to LEDs that are constantly illuminating, repeated point illumination can increase brightness.

[Initializing the selection signal number]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 137, in the setting change state, DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group are in a first light-emitting mode. Specifically, the first and second digits of the gaming support indicator 12 are in a light-emitting mode in which "-" is displayed, the 1BET LED 14, 2BET LED 15, 3BET LED 16, the gaming support indicator 12, the replay lamp 91, the outer end signal lamp 92, the insert possible lamp 93, and the start valid lamp 94 (hereinafter referred to as gaming information indicators) are in an off state, and the setting value indicator 24 is in a light-emitting mode in which the setting value is displayed. Furthermore, DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group are in a light-emitting mode in which role ratio information is displayed in the first to fourth digits of the role ratio monitor 89.

Then, when the setting change state ends and the state transitions to normal, DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group switch from the first lighting mode to the second lighting mode. Specifically, the first digit of the game assist display 12 lights up to display "0," the second digit goes dark, the game information display lights up to display game information in normal mode, and the setting value display 24 goes dark. Meanwhile, DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group continue to light up to display role ratio information in the first through fourth digits of the role ratio monitor 89.

As mentioned above, to control the illumination of the DGs in the first DG group and the second DG group, the selection signal number is updated every 0.56 ms in the order 0, 1, 2, 3, 0, 1, 2, 3, etc. Accordingly, the selection signals are repeatedly output in the order selection signal DG1, selection signal DG2, selection signal DG3, selection signal DG4, switching the DGs to be illuminated among DGs 1-4 in the first DG group and DGs 1-4 in the second DG group. However, when transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, the main control unit 161 initializes the selection signal number to 0 regardless of the selection signal number set at that time. Therefore, when transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, regardless of whether selection signal DG1, selection signal DG2, selection signal DG3, or selection signal DG4 is displayed, the selection signals will again be output in the order selection signal DG1, selection signal DG2, selection signal DG3, etc. Furthermore, when transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, not only is the selected signal number initialized, but the light emission signals S0 to S6 output from the first and second output ports are also initialized, and the output of the light emission signals begins again.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the DGs in the first DG group switch from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode as a result of transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, the selection signal number is initialized and the selection signal switching begins again from selection signal DG1, preventing the light-emitting modes of the DGs in the first DG group from being disrupted. In particular, DGs DG1 to DG3 in the first DG group are DGs located in positions that are easily visible from the outside, and disruption of the light-emitting modes of these DGs can be prevented.

In addition, when transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, not only are the selection signal numbers initialized, but the first and second output ports, i.e., the light emission signals S0 to S6, are also initialized, and light emission signal output begins again, preventing disruption to the light emission behavior of the DGs in the first DG group.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 138, immediately after power is turned on, DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group will be in the illumination mode they had before power was cut off. Specifically, for example, if the normal state was in effect before power was cut off and an instruction number (e.g., "-3") was displayed on the game assist display 12, the illumination mode will change to one in which "3" is displayed in the first digit and "-" is displayed in the second digit, the game information display will be in an illumination mode in which game information is displayed, and the setting value display will be turned off. Furthermore, DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group will be in a third illumination mode in which a test pattern is displayed in the first through fourth digits of the winning combination monitor 89.

Then, five seconds after power is turned on, DG1-DG4 of the first DG group continue to emit light in the same manner as before power was turned off. Meanwhile, DG1-DG4 of the second DG group switch from the third emission mode to the fourth emission mode, in which role ratio information is displayed in the first through fourth digits of the role ratio monitor 89.

In this case, unlike when transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, the main control unit 161 maintains the selected signal number without initializing it, and continues to control the selection signal switching that is currently being performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the DG of the second DG group switches from the third light-emitting mode to the fourth light-emitting mode as the state transitions from immediately after power-on to five seconds after power-on, the selection signal number is maintained without being initialized, and selection signal switching control continues. Therefore, even when the light-emitting mode of the DG of the second DG group switches as the state transitions from immediately after power-on to five seconds after power-on, it is possible to prevent the light-emitting mode of the DG of the first DG group from being disrupted. In particular, it is possible to prevent disruption of the light-emitting mode of the DG of the first DG group, which is more visible from the outside, due to switching the light-emitting mode of the DG of the second DG group, which is less visible from the outside.

In this embodiment, the control of the display controlled by the main control unit 161 has been described, but the above control may also be applied to the control of the display controlled by the medal count control unit 171 or the performance control unit 151.

[Modification]
The present invention is not limited to the above-described first and second embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Modifications of the above-described embodiments that can be applied to the present invention will be described below.

[Regarding the value set in the second Q register]
In the first and second embodiments, it has been explained that the first and second Q registers used for the LDQ instruction are set to "F0" and "F3," respectively. That is, as shown in the address map of the memory area used by the main control unit 161, the first Q register used for executing an internal program is set to "F0," which is the upper address of the internal RAM area, and the second Q register used for executing an external program is set to "F3," which is the upper address of the external RAM area. This is because it is considered that the internal RAM area is frequently referenced when an internal program is executed, and the external RAM area is frequently referenced when an external program is executed.

However, in a modified example, for example, "F0," the upper address of the internal RAM area, may be set in both the first Q register and the second Q register. When "F0" is set in the second Q register, the LDQ instruction can be used when referencing the internal RAM area from an external program. Furthermore, since the same upper address is set in both the first Q register and the second Q register, program design is easier. In other words, programs can be designed without distinguishing between internal and external programs in how the LDQ instruction is handled.

[Serial communication circuit]
In the above description, when the main control unit 161 and the medal count control unit 171 are integrated, the main control unit 161, medal count control unit 171, performance control unit 151, and connection terminal board 1000 are connected by a serial communication circuit. However, at least a portion of the communication between the main control unit 161, medal count control unit 171, performance control unit 151, and connection terminal board 1000 may be parallel communication. This allows for faster communication speeds.

[Replay winning determination in post-ball control processing]
As shown in FIG. 80, in the post-ball control process, the main control unit 161 performs a replay winning determination in Sv1. This allows the update processes of Sv2 to Sv5 to be omitted when the replay display result is derived, thereby reducing the processing burden. However, only Sv3 and Sv4 may be omitted. In other words, even if it is determined that a replay has won, the read process from RAM 161c to the register (Sv2) and the write process from the register to RAM 161c (Sv5) are executed. This allows the main control unit 161 to execute the same processing content whether a replay has won or not, thereby stabilizing the program. In other words, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unexpected errors caused by processing branching.

[Mode allocation in AT state]
In the above description, an example was explained in which the AT1 state includes three modes, but the number of modes may be four or more. Furthermore, mode allocation may be performed not only in the AT1 state but also in the AT2 state. The main control unit 161 determines which mode to control to when controlled to the AT1 state or the AT2 state, using the difference count value.

[About gaming machines]
In the first and second embodiments, the present invention is applied to a slot machine that does not require any medals, but it may also be applied to a slot machine that sets the number of bets using medals or game balls as gaming value. In such a slot machine, medals owned by a player may be saved as credits.

In addition, in Examples 1 and 2, the present invention is shown as being applied to a slot machine 2, which is an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be applied to any gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a game is played by firing a gaming ball into a gaming area, or even general gaming machines other than slot machines and pachinko gaming machines.

2 Slot machine 3 Card unit 51 Liquid crystal display 52 Performance effect LED
53, 54 Speaker 151 Performance control unit 152 Display control circuit (VDP)
157 Sound control unit 161 Main control unit 161c RAM
171 Medal count control unit

Claims (1)

a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
A gaming machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning result can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of a plurality of variable display units,
a derivation operation means operated by a player to derive a display result;
a pre-determination means for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
image display means;
a specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect that displays a specific suggestion image that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination corresponding to the type of specific result, based on the determination result of the pre-determining means being any one of a plurality of types of specific results;
Equipped with
The gaming machine executes a process for erasing the specific suggestion image based on the fact that the display results have been derived on all the variable display sections, regardless of whether the specific suggestion image is displayed or not .